UC-NRLF 


$B    Efl    217 


m 


r^ 


IvIBRARV 

OF  THK 

University  of  California. 

Received       (yZ£^.  ^  jSq/ . 

Accession  Noi^i    /  ( Q       Class  No. 


^5f 


i: 


S<VT 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

.  IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/fromdarknesstoliOOduffrich 


FROM    DARKNESS 
TO    LIGHT 


Duffy's    Compendiums   of    Nature's 
Law,  Forces  and  Mind  Com- 
bined IN  One 

CONFORMABLE  TO  THIS,   HIS   GREAT  DISCOVERY, 

THAT  THE  SUN  AJ^D.  eIrTH  ARE  THE 

POLES    OF    THE    MAGNET 

EXPLAINS 

The  Motion  of  the  Earth — How  Maintained 
What  Space  is — What  Force  is 

ANSWERS    the    MYSTERIOUS    QUESTIONS,     "  WHAT    IS    MAG- 
NETISM;    WHAT    IS     ELECTRICITY?" — EXPLAINS     ALL 
THE  VARIED  PHENOMENA  OF  PHYSICAL  BEING— 
WHAT    IS     life;      how     SUSTAINED?  —  THE 
MAGNET   BEING    THE    KEY   THAT    UN- 
LOCKS   ALL    THESE    MYSTERIES 


jititbrsitt; 


AUTHOR'S   EDITION 


San  Francisco,  Cal. 

TERRENCE   DUFFY 

Author  and  Publisher 

1308  Golden  Gate  Ave. 

X893 


Copyright  1893 

BY 

Tereence  Duf»y. 


^Tjjis  page 

i  dedicate  to  my  esteemed  and  respected 
Friend, 

WtlUatft  |;r^us5)nell. 

Whom  I  hav*:  known  for  many  years,  and  who 

HAS  conversed  WITH    ME   IN    RELATION   TO   MY 
IDEAS    ON    THE    LaW    OP    NATURE    AND    ITS 
RESULTS,    HE    BEING    THE    ONLY    PERSON 
WHO     COULD     UNDERSTAND    AND    RE- 
SPOND     TO      MY      INVESTIGATIONS 
AND      STUDIES      OF     NATURE'S 

Law,   Force  and  Mind. 


"ij^*^  at  THi 

'T7HI7BESIT7! 


In  presenting  this  ivork  to  the  people  in  my  own 
crude  ivay,  I  hope  they  will  overlook  any  errors  or 
mistakes  that  I  may  have  made  in  the  language  used. 
I  have  endeavored  to  write  it  as  I  understand  it,  and 
have  it  as  concise  as  possible,  and  in  plain  words 
without  any  elaboration,  for  Nature  is  plain  and 
simple  in  all  her  ivorks,  and  I  am  simply  an  instal- 
ment of  nature. 


'  or  THS       •< 

Vhivbrsitt 

CONTENTS 


What  is  Electricity? 1 

The  Human  Body  a  Magnet, 8 

What  Takes  Place  in  the  Body  after  Death,     ....  15 

An  Illustration  of  the  Tension  of  Space, 18 

Action  of  Heat  and  Cold  on  the  Human  Body,   ...  25 

A  Look  into  the  Resistance  of  Heat  and  Cold,    ...  30 

What  is  Mind  or  Thought? 33 

When  the  Earth  Falls  from  the  Snn, 41 

The  Mind's  Jom-ney  into  the  Center  of  the  Earth,      .  44 

A  Look  on  the  Outside  of  the  Earth, 56 

A  Look  into  a  Common  Piece  of  Coal, 64 

A  Peep  into  Life.— What  is  Life?      ........  68 

A  Look  into  the  Action  of  Cold  Space, 77 

How  a  Sea-gull  Flies, 82 

A  Look  into  the  Water. — A  Fish  and  its  Actions  and 

Lifei 85 

The  Human  Eye;  its  Use  and  action,       ......  90 

What  is  Polarity?— The  Cause  and  Etfect, 93 

How  Can  We  Break  the  Tension  Lines  of  Space  and 

Keep  them  Open? 98 

A  Plant's  Growth,       103 

Action  between  the  Earth  and  Sun, 107 

Effect  of  the  Air  on  the  Earth, Ill 

What  is  Hunger  and  Thirst? — Appetite, 115 

A  Look  into  a  Sunbeam, 119 

A  Fire-fly.— What  is  the  Cause  of  its  Light?  ....  122 

The  Leyden  Jar,  and  its  Action, 125 

Electricity  and  the  Human  Body,  or  Animal  Life,      .  128 


VI  CONTENTS. 

What  is  Attraction  and  Cohesion? 131 

Cohesion  of  Matter, 134 

What  is  Combustion  or  Light?— Candle  Light  or  Oil 

Light,  .■ 187 

What  is  the  Cause  of  an  Electric  Current,  and  Why 

Does  it  Kill  a  Body? 140 

The  Telephone.— Its  Use, 145 

A  Tuning-fork,  and  its  Nature, 147 

The  Copper  Wire  as  a  Conductor,  or  Magnetic  Circuit 

of  Electricity, 149 

The  Brain, 151 

The  Present  Dynamo.— Its  Nature, 155 

Power  of  Mind  over   Mind,  or  an   Active  or  Strong 

Brain  over  a  Weak  Brain, 163 

What  is  Mesmerism  and  its  Cause? 167 

The  Sun's  Heat, 176 

What  is  Energy?— Coal,  Water,  Steam,  Tension,     .    .  188 

What  is  the  Storage  Battery,  and  What  do  We  Store?  193 

What  is  the  Aurora  Borealis,  and  its  Cause?  ....  204 

What  is  the  Cause  of  Cyclones? 207 

A  Look  into  a  Mirror  or  Looking-glass? 212 

A  Look  into  What  Takes  Place  in  a  Common  Kettle 

when  Boiling  Water, 233 

Mind  and  its  Relation  to  the  Body, 240 

Adhesion  and  Affinity, 244 

What  is  a  Resistance  Coil? 252 

Nature  of  the  Galvanic  Battery, 254 

What  is  the  Telegraph  Wire? 256 

What  is  the  Electric  Light? 257 

Steam  Whistle, 259 

Bell  Sound, 260 

A^ital  Force  and  its  Nature, 261 

Action  of  the  Dynamo, 275 

What  is  Disease  and  Decay  in  the  Vegetable  Family?  277 


[XJKIVBRSITT] 

FROM  DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 


WHAT    IS    ELECTRICITY? 

THIS  question  has  been  many  times  asked. 
After  many  years  of  investigation  and  thought 
in  the  field  of  Nature  under  Nature's  law,  I  have 
arrived  at  a  conclusion  of  Nature's  force  and  phe- 
nomenon. Let  us  take  our  minds  into  space,  and 
observe  what  can  be  discovered  in  space. 

There  can  be  no  space  or  vacancy ;  there  is 
something  everywhere.  What  is  that  something? 
The  sun  holds  the  earth  by  attraction.  What  is 
that  attraction?  It  is  a  pull,  suction  or  tension 
between  the  two  bodies.  If  the  sun  and  earth 
are  held  by  this  pull  or  strain,  there  must  be  a 
great  tension  between  the  two  bodies.  What  is 
the  tension  ?  Everything  in  space,  or  between  the 
earth  and  sun,  must  be  filled  with  this  pull  or 
tension.  All  matter  on  the  earth  must  be  in  that 
tension. 

Let  us  procure  a  common  piece  of  iron  to  make 
a  magnet.  That  iron  in  its  natural  state  has 
grown  up  on  that  tension.  It  permeates  it  as  it 
does  all  matter.  The  tension  is  part  and  parcel 
of  it.  We  prepare  this  iron  and  make  it  into  a 
magnet.  In  the  process  of  manufacture  it  is  un- 
dergoing changes.     The  heating  and  hammering 


Z  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

drives  all  gases  and  impurities  out  of  it  and 
makes  it  hard,  compressing  its  atoms,  binding 
them  together.  This  ruptures  the  atoms,  making 
them  unstable  or  sensitive,  or  vibrating  under 
strain  or  stress.  The  tempering  by  heating  and 
cooling  shrinks  and  expands  its  atoms,  inclosing 
the  lines  of  tension  within  the  magnet.  This 
heating  and  cooling  is  in  harmony  with  Nature, 
and  brings  the  magnet  into  the  embrace  of  the 
tension  around  it,  thus  forming  a  union  between 
them.  The  magnet  has  worked  itself  into  the 
tension,  and  the  tension  has  worked  itself  into 
the  magnet,  and  they  are  united.  The  common 
piece  of  iron  is  now  a  steel  magnet  ready  to  be 
magnetized.     What  is  magnetism  ? 

It  is  the  great  pull  or  tension  of  space.  If  the 
sun  holds  the  earth  in  space,  there  must  be  a  cer- 
tain pressure  per  square  inch.  We  will  assume 
ten  thousand  tons.  This  weight  or  pressure  is 
pressing  around  the  surface  of  the  magnet.  This 
would  crush  it  if  all  the  tension  of  space  were 
excluded  from  it,  but  the  lines  of  tension  are 
through  its  atoms,  making  an  internal  and  ex- 
ternal pressure,  but  in  equilibrium  at  rest. 

We  will  now  magnetize  the  magnet.  This  pro- 
duces a  circulation  or  circuit  through  its  poles. 
The  current  applied  to  the  magnet  broke  its  equi- 
librium, vibrating  its  atoms,  and  the  atoms  vi- 
brated the  tension,  and  the  pressure  on  the  out- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  3 

side  being  constant  pressed  into  the  poles,  pro- 
ducing a  circuit  or  flow.  The  circuit  once  formed 
cannot  rest  as  long  as  the  magnet  is  sensitive,  or 
in  harmony  with  the  tension;  the  great  pressure 
around  the  magnet  crushes  into  it,  keeping  up 
the  circulation. 

We  now  appl}^  the  armature  to  the  poles  of  the 
magnet.  It  falls  into  them  like  air  into  a  vacu- 
um. The  magnet  is  partially  a  magnetic  vacuum 
in  space,  and  the  pressure  outside  presses  into 
this  vacuum  and  produces  the  circulation.  The 
magnet  now  finished,  we  apply  it  to  use  to  pro- 
duce Electricity^ 

When  we  make  and  break  the  magnetic  poles, 
we  produce  Electricity.  We  are  then  acting  on 
the  tension  or  magnetic  vacuum  in  the  magnet, 
it  being  a  reservoir  of  energy  under  magnetic 
tension  or  in  vibrating  strain  or  circuit. 

What  is  Polarity  ?  The  earth  pulling  from  the 
sun  forms  the  poles.  The  earth  being  one,  and 
the  sun  the  other  pole.  The  space  between  them 
being  filled  with  the  pull  or  tension,  making  it 
as  solid  as  if  the  two  bodies  were  united.  When 
we  make  and  break  the  poles  we  are  acting  di- 
rectly on  the  pull  in  space  that  the  magnet  occu- 
pies. 

Now,  space  being  filled  with  tension  or  pull, 
we  place  a  conductor  or  copper  wire  to  utilize  this 
Electricity  or  magnetic  pull.     The  copper  being 

fesiVBRSITY^ 


4  FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

non-magnetic  makes  a  hole  in  space,  and  we  send 
what  we  call  a  current  through  it.  The  w4re 
forms  a  circuit  through  space. 

Now  this  space  around  the  conductor  is  filled 
with  this  magnetic  tension,  to  the  pressure  of 
ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch.  The  wire 
acts  as  a  tube  through  this  great  force,  and  the 
quantity  we  apply  is  displaced  through  tlie  other 
pole  or  end  of  the  wire.  This  displacement  i& 
the  circuit.  The  quantity  applied  has  to  be  dis- 
placed at  the  point  of  application  in  order  to  con- 
tinue the  circuit.  All  space  is  full  of  this  force 
that  we  acton  and  disturb.  We  cannot  put  any 
more  in  it,  w^e  simply  give  it  motion.  The  return 
circuit  through  the  earth  is  the  same  as  through 
the  wire. 

To  illustrate  the  nature  and  action  of  the  con- 
ductor, we  procure  a  piece  of  rubber  hose,  bend- 
ing it  in  the  form  of  a  horse  shoe,  we  fill  it  wdth 
water.  We  now  force  any  given  quantity  in  at 
one  end  and  the  same  quantity  will  discharge  at 
the  other  end.  The  water  did  not  travel  through 
the  hose,  it  was  merely  a  displacement  of  the 
quantity  applied.  The  hose  w^as  full  and  could 
not  hold  any  more.  As  space  is  full  and  can 
hold  no  more,  the  conductor  acts  like  the  hose; 
therefore.  Electricity  in  traveling  is  simply  a  dis- 
placement of  the  magnetic  pull  or  tension  of 
space. 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  O 

Again  we  illustrate.  We  take  the  same  hose 
and  fill  it  with  bullets.  We  now  force  in  at  one 
end,  one,  two  or  three  bullets.  The  same  number 
will  drop  out  at  the  other  end.  These  are  equiva- 
lent to  magnetic  vibrations,  pulls  or  electrical 
waves.  The  hose  is  filled  with  the  bullets,  and 
the  conductor  is  filled  with  the  tension;  neither 
can  hold  an}^  more.  Every  vibration  displaces 
a  vibration  of  the  same  quantity  at  the  other  pole 
or  end  of  the  conductor.  These  vibrations  pro- 
duce heat,  and  this  heat  expands  the  cold  tension 
in  the  conductor  and  displaces  the  same  quantity 
in  circuit  at  the  other  end  of  the  wire.  This 
tension  does  not  travel  or  move  only  in  circuit, 
and  a  vibration  disturbs  all  this  circuit  at  the 
same  instant,  and  it  finds  its  equilibrium  or  point 
of  rest  at  the  point  of  disturbance.  This  is  the 
circuit  disturbed. 

Can  space  be  displaced?  Air  and  all  other 
gases  may  be  displaced  or  compressed,  but  the  ten- 
sion of  space  cannot  be  displaced  or  compressed. 
We  procure  a  glass  tube  and  some  steel  filings. 
These  we  put  into  the  tube,  filling  it.  The  filings 
have  displaced  the  air  but  not  the  space;  whatever 
is  in  the  tube  is  in  the  filings.  We  place  the 
filings  in  a  crucible,  and  put  them  in  a  furnace 
and  melt  or  combine  these  atoms.  Whatever 
condition  was  in  the  crucible  must  be  in  the 
atoms  of  the  steel.     The  heat  raised  the  cold  and 


6  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

the  atoms  combined,  forming  a  fluid.  The  heat 
now  removed  and  the  cold  forms  a  solid  of  the 
atoms.  These  changes  have  not  displaced  the 
space  in  the  crucible.  Its  conditions  are  the 
same.  The  tension  of  space  presses  into  the  cru- 
cible and  around  each  atom  to  the  weight  of  the 
earth  pulling  from  the  sun  ;  therefore,  every  inch 
of  space  between  the  sun  and  earth  must  sustain 
an  inch  through  the  earth.  Now  the  earth  being 
eight  thousand  miles  in  diameter,  every  inch 
must  sustain  over  ten  thousand  tons. 

This  is  the  great  pressure  or  tension  that  forces 
its  way  into  everything  on  the  earth  and  cannot 
be  displaced.  It  is  our  Electricity,  magnetism, 
heat,  light  and  life.  In  referring  to  the  displac- 
ing or  compressing  the  tension  of  space,  it  must 
be  understood  that  it  is  meant  by  this  that  it 
cannot  be  expelled  from  any  body  or  matter,  or 
cannot  be  taken  out  of  one  place  and  put  into 
another,  or  cannot  be  compressed  like  air  or  any 
other  gases,  for  it  is  not  a  gas  or  anything  like  it. 

For  experiment,  we  procure  two  powerful  mag- 
nets and  place  their  poles  close  together,  say  an 
inch  apart.  There  must  be  a  great  pull  or  tension 
in  that  space.  If  we  pass  something  between 
these  poles  that  is  non-magnetic,  it  will  not  affect 
it  or  resist  its  passage,  yet  the  pull  is  there  ;  but  if 
we  put  a  piece  of  iron  in  the  space  it  will  be  held 
as  though  in  a  vice.     The  two  magnets  are  the 


FROM  darS^jlss  tcTlight.  7 

same  as  the  sun  and  earth.  The  pull  or  tension 
is  between  them,  and  is  constant  and  reliable. 
What  contrivances  of  man  can  break  these  lines 
of  pull  or  tension,  ten  thousand  tons  per  square 
inch  ?  When  we  can  do  this  we  will  have  tapped 
the  universal  force,  the  reservoir  of  energy  and 
life,  heat  and  light.  But  how  can  these  lines  be 
broken  or  kept  open  ?  Can  man  construct  any- 
thing to  expel  this  great  force  and  keep  it  under 
control  ?  The  copper  wire  comes  nearest  of  any- 
thing yet  devised  by  man.  The  atoms  of  the 
copper  lay  so  close  together  as  to  almost  form  a 
solid,  and  being  non-magnetic  and  non-vibratory 
cannot  absorb  or  take  up  any  of  the  magnetic 
force  or  tension  applied  to  it.  This  gives  the  ten- 
sion free  action  for  circulation  through  the  wires. 
The  two  magnets  are  in  circuit.  One  is  pressed 
into  the  other,  filling  the  circuit.  The  pressure 
around  them  has  pressed  them  together,  holding 
them  in  this  form  and  in  circuit.  They  have 
found  their  equilibrium  or  point  of  rest  in  their 
own  embrace,  and  united  and  pressed  together  by 
the  tension  of  spaco. 


FIIOM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 


THE  HUMAN  BODY  A  MAGNET. 

THE  blood  is  a  magnetic  fluid.  The  brain  is 
equivalent  to  a  magnetic  or  electrical  storage 
battery  or  coils.  The  brain  floats  in  the  tension 
of  space,  each  organ  being  like  millions  of  fine 
wires  coiled  in  receptacles,  for  the  storage  of  im- 
pressions, or  experience,  or  intelligence.  The 
more  of  these  coils  that  are  in  the  brain  the  more 
surface  they  offer  to  the  lines  of  tension  for  im- 
pressions, or  the  storing  of  knowledge. 

The  blood  is  a  magnetic  fluid,  floating  in  the 
tension  of  the  body.  The  blood  offers  a  resist- 
ance to  the  free  circulation  of  the  tension  of  the 
body,  and  is  put  in  motion.  This  is  the  same  as 
the  circulation  through  the  magnet.  Only  the 
magnet  circulates  heat  and  cold ;  but  the  body 
must  have  a  fluid  as  a  circulating  medium  to 
generate  heat,  to  keep  up  action  and  life.  Every 
molecule  of  blood  is  floating  in  the  tension,  vi- 
brating it,  producing  heat.  The  veins  of  the 
body  are  filled  with  this  magnetic  fluid,  as  it  cir- 
culates through  the  body.  It  is  constantly  dis- 
turbing the  lines  of  force,  generating  heat,  and 
vibrating  the  nerves,  and  they  resist  these  vibra- 
tions, and  become  heated,  and  expand,  and  act 
on  the  tension,  vibrating  it.     It  is  a  continuous 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  9 

interchange  of  action  through  the  bod}^,  to  keep 
up  life.  The  body  must  generate  heat,  to  keep  out 
the  cold.  It  is  a  battle  between  the  two  opposing 
actions.  All  atoms  and  bodies  are  individual 
magnets;  for  the  tension  is  in  them  and  circu- 
lates through  them,  keeping  up  their  life  and 
motion,  giving  them  all  their  individuality  and 
family  relations. 

The  circulation  of  the  body  is  its  life.  Stop  it, 
and  death  ensues.  The  body  is  like  a  sponge;  it 
is  all  a  mass  of  spongy  matter,  containing  mil- 
lions of  pores.  A  needle  applied  to  the  surface 
of  the  body  could  not  find  a  place  without  a  pore, 
and  so  it  is  all  through  the  body  ;  and  it  contains 
the  fluids  which  are  water  and  blood.  The  water 
is  distributed  all  through  the  body,  like  a  sponge. 
The  blood  is  in  the  veins  and  arteries,  incased  in 
little  tubes,  like  small  rubber  tubing.  This  tub- 
ing conducts  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  which 
is  the  circulation  of  heat  and  the  circulation  of 
the  tension,  and  heat  and  cold. 

The  circulation  of  the  body  is  produced  by  the 
tension  and  nerves  resisting  each  other.  The\^ 
generate  heat,  and  cause  the  blood  to  circulate. 
This  is  like  the  magnet.  It  is  the  circuit  or  cir- 
culation between  the  sun  and  earth,  and  is  pro- 
duced in  the  body ;  for  it  offers  a  resistance  to 
its  circuit,  or  lines  of  pull  or  tension. 

This   circulation    between   the  sun  and  earth 


10  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

ignores  all  obstructions  of  matter,  it  being  in  all 
matter,  holding  it  at  rest,  and  when  vibrated  on, 
it  circulates  through  all  matter.  Nothing  can 
confine  it  or  compress  it,  when  heat  or  vibrations 
are  applied  to  it.  This  is  the  great  circulating 
and  equalizing  medium. 

If  the  blood  is  in  a  healthy  condition,  having 
no  congealed  matter  in  it,  then  it  can  circulate 
freely ;  but  if  there  is  any  impurities,  such  as 
coagulated  or  sour,  fermenting  matter  in  the 
blood,  this,  in  passing  through  the  veins,  would 
clog  them  and  prevent  a  free  circulation,  causing 
heat  and  fever  at  this  point.  The  smallest  parti- 
cle of  disease  in  the  body  offers  a  resistance  to 
the  free  circulation,  causing  pain.  All  diseased 
or  sour,  fermenting  impurities  in  this  circulation 
offer  a  resistance  to  it,  and  cause  heat  to  be 
generated  at  this  point.  This  is  what  causes  all 
pain  and  disease.  The  circulation  in  the  body 
should  be  perfectly  free,  in  order  to  be  healthy 
and  in  a  happy  state  of  mind  ;  that  is,  the  tension 
in  the  body  should  have  free  action  and  circula- 
tion. Then  it  would  be  in  harmony  with  the 
law  of  Nature  ;  that  is,  the  sun  and  earth  breathes 
through  this  body,  causing  its  circulation  and 
maintaining  its  life.  The  circulation  of  tHe  blood 
through  the  body  is  continually  disturbing  the 
lines  of  tension  from  the  outside,  causing  the 
pressure  around  the  body  to  press  into  it,  keeping 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  11 

up  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  heat  and 
cold. 

All  circulations  in  all  bodies  in  harmony  with 
Nature  are  sweet  and  pure  in  life ;  for  Nature's 
law  is  purity  in  all  her  actions.  She  is  always 
ready  to  sweeten  and  purify  all  impurities. 
This  she  is  continually  doing  by  maintaining 
her  pull  or  circulation.  This  action  produces 
motion  in  everything  on  the  earth,  preventing 
sourness  or  stagnation.  Each  molecule  of  blood 
incloses  the  tension  within  it,  and  when  disturbed 
by  the  circulation  these  molecules  vibrate  it, 
generating  heat,  and  the  heat  keeps  up  the  circu- 
lation by  displacing  the  cold.  The  water  or 
moisture  of  the  body  is  all  in  circulation  or  mo- 
tion, from  the  vibration  of  the  tension  by  the  heat 
generated  by  the  resistance  of  the  matter  of  the 
body.  This  body  is  a  mere  shadow  in  the  ten- 
sion. It  is  floating  through  it,  like  a  fish  floating 
in  the  water  ;  but  the  tension  ofl'ers  no  resistance 
to  motion,  like  the  water.  It  is  the  matter  that 
offers  a  resistance  to  the  free  circulation  of  the 
tension,  causing  heat. 

Now,  this  body  comes  from  the  seeds,  and  these 
seeds  combined  and  a  body  grew  from  them. 
These  seeds  gradually  expanded,  occupying  more 
space,  maturing  and  developing  into  a  body. 
This  was  Nature's  way  of  building  up  a  body. 

Everything  must  grow   up    in    the    tension. 


12  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

Nothing  can  get  into  this  tension  only  b}^  growing 
up  in  it.  This  growth  does  not  add  anything  to 
the  earth's  mass ;  it  is  only  a  condensed  matter 
of  the  gases  that  are  now  on  the  earth.  These 
gases  cannot  be  added  to  or  diminished.  They 
are  indestructible,  and  circulate  through  the  eartli 
and  air,  and  all  bodies  grow  from  these  gases  by 
condensation.  This  is  the  earth's  circulation. 
Now,  these  gases  feed  all  animal  and  vegetable 
life.  They  grow  and  decay,  forming  a  gas.  This 
gas  mixes  with  the  air  and  all  other  gases,  and 
are  condensed  into  rain,  and  fall  on  tlie  earth,  to 
build  up  more  bodies.  This  is  Nature's  simple 
circnlation.  This  body,  in  the  process  of  growth 
and  maturity,  filled  no  space  in  this  tension.  It 
was  only  a  condensation  of  gases. 

All  these  gases  are  divided  into  atoms.  So  the 
body  is  built  up  of  atoms.  Now,  these  atoms  are 
indestructible  and  everlasting,  and  this  body  grew 
up  in  the  tension  imprisoned  in  it,  and  it  cannot 
get  out  of  it  as  long  as  it  has  form  or  action  ;  but 
as  soon  as  the  body  ceases  action  the  change  be- 
pfins.  The  bodv  now  offers  a  resistance  to  the 
circulation  of  the  tension,  and  heat  is  generated 
in  its  mass  ;  for  the  body  is  now  one  mass  of  inert 
matter.  All  this  matter  is  the  atoms.  These 
atoms  cannot  liberate  themselves  in  this  cold  con- 
dition ;  but  the  matter  begins  to  ferment.  This 
is  heat,  and  this  heat  liberates  all  the  atoms, 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  18 

forming  a  gas.  Now,  the  body,  or  atoms,  lias  got 
out  of  the  tension  througli  the  gas,  bat  the  form 
remains  where  the  body  was;  they  are  now  sepa- 
rated from  the  tension. 

Now,  the  body  grew  up  from  atoms,  or  gas» 
These  atoms  consolidated,  and  formed  the  body. 
All  these  atoms  have  life  and  circulation,  and  are 
condensed  into  the  body,  and  the  body  can  sep- 
arate these  atoms,  or  get  out  of  the  tension,  only 
by  going  back  into  the  condition  it  came  from 
into  atoms.  The  tension  in  the  body  can  be 
made  larger  or  smaller  only  by  heat  or  cold  ;  but 
as  the  gases  are  liberated  by  the  heat  generated 
by  the  fermentation,  they  mix  with  the  air,  and 
are  carried  up  into  the  cold-air  space,  and  con- 
densed into  the  rain  to  fertilize  the  soil  of  the 
earth. 

The  gases  that  have  evaporated  from  this  body 
have  not  disturbed  or  destroyed  the  tension  that 
the  body  occupied.  These  gases  left  this  tension 
intact.  It  can  be  moved  only  by  the  body  that 
it  occupies,  and  that  has  the  use  of  it,  as  long  as 
it  can  act  on  or  utilize  it.  Now,  all  these  atoms 
that  formed  this  body  were  in  the  tension,  part 
and  parcel  of  it,  but  having  a  form,  these  atoms 
were  of  different  families — that  is,  different  gases 
— and  these  gases  combined  to  build  a  body. 
These  atoms  were  not  made.  They  have  always 
existed,  and  they  can  condense  into  other  bodies,. 


14  FROM    DARKNESS    TO   LIGHT. 

but  not  in  a  mass.  They  are  separated  by  the 
air,  and  circulate  through  it,  and  are  deposited 
on  the  earth,  and  produce  vegetation,  and  the 
animals  feed  on  this  vegetation,  maintaining  life 
and  motion.  Now,  this  vegetation  is  the  atoms 
or  gases  condensed  into  them,  and  the  animals 
feeding  on  this  vegetation  or  gases  condense  them 
into  the  animal,  and  the  body  grows  up  and  ma- 
tures on  them.  Now,  the  body  is  composed  of 
atoms  and  the  tension.  The  atoms  are  heat,  and 
the  tension  is  the  one  and  only  force  filling  all 
space  and  matter;  so  the  matter  of  the  body  is 
heat,  and  the  tension  is  the  cold.  These  two 
giants  are  continually  fighting  for  place,  and  this 
hghting  is  what  gives  life  to  all  bodies.  This  is 
a  mutual  fight  to  produce  life.  It  is  not  as  man 
may  fight.  It  is  Nature's  fight  to  maintain  life. 
We  find  the  body  is  heat.  This  heat  has  to  re- 
sist or  fight  the  cold  tension  of  space.  This  ac- 
tion continued  maintains  life  in  all  matter,  for 
all  matter  has  heat  and  life  in  it. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  15 


WHAT    TAKES    PLACE    IN    THE    BODY 
AFTER    DEATH. 

THIS  body  is  what  we  call  matter.  This  mat- 
ter is  condensed  gases,  or  atoms.  These  atoms, 
or  gases,  can  separate  and  dissolve  out  of  this 
body  or  the  space  they  occupied.  The  tension  is 
in  this  body  at  rest.  This  is  the  space  the  body 
occupied.  This  body  gradually  dissolves  into 
gases,  going  back  into  what  it  came  from.  This 
dissolution  does  not  disturb  the  tension  of  this 
body ;  for  it  grew  up  in  it,  and  can  get  out  of  it 
only  by  evaporation  or  separation  of  the  gases  or 
atoms. 

Now,  the  matter  of  this  body  does  not  rot  or 
decay,  going  into  nothing.  This  decay  is  a  puri- 
fication by  fermentation,  liberating  all  the  gases, 
giving  them  freedom  to  go  off  and  condense  into 
some  other  body  or  matter.  All  these  gases  mix 
with  the  air,  and  become  purified,  and  conder.se 
into  rain,  and  fall  on  the  earth,  to  build  up  more 
matter  and  bodies.  These  gases  cannot  be  de- 
stroyed or  burned  up.  They  are  indestructible, 
like  all  other  matter  or  gases.  Now,  these  gases 
consolidated,  and  a  bod}^  grew  up  from  them. 
This  body  had  life  and  motion ;  for  these  gases 


16  FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

formed  a  body,  and  this  body  was  the  tension, 
part  and  parcel  of  it,  giving  it  life  and  motion ; 
but  the  gases  condensed  into  this  body,  giving  it 
form.  This  form  held  the  tension  within  it,  and 
the  form  resisted  the  circulation  of  this  tension, 
and  life  is  produced  in  it.  Now,  we  cannot  un- 
derstand how  this  body  was  made;  for  we  find 
that  all  the  matter  or  material  that  this  body  is 
composed  of  has  existed,  and  there  is  nothing 
made  or  nothing  destroyed.  This  is  Nature's 
simple  circulation.  All  the  resources  for  build- 
ing up  bodies  or  matter  are  here  existing,  and 
everything  must  grow  up  from  this  by  condensa- 
tion. This  condensation  is  a  slow  work  of  Na- 
ture, and  is  accomplished  by  depositing  atom  by 
atom,  to  build  up  the  body  or  matter  in  process 
of  growth.  Nature  is  never  in  a  hurry.  She  can 
afford  to  take  her  time,  for  she  does  lier  work 
well,  and  never  makes  a  mistake.  Can  man  say 
as  much  ?  Now,  we  find  that  a  body  can  be  made 
or  formed  only  by  condensation  of  the  gases  of 
tlie  earth,  and  these  gases  are  indestructible  and 
everlasting  as  the  tension  that  fills  all  space  and 
matter.  We  find  that  nothing  can  be  made,  gen- 
erated, or  produced;  for  everything  is  finished 
and  cannot  be  destroyed.  We  simply  act  on,  or 
utilize  the  conditions  that  are  now^  on  the  earth. 
These  conditions  we  did  not  make,  generate,  or 
produce.     Nature  left  none  of  her  work  unfin- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 


17 


ished,  and  she  did  this  work  well,  with  wisdom, 
intelligence,  and  reason.  Man  is  the  only  being 
that  can  criticise  this  work  of  Nature. 


^:±^ 


THl 


[tutivbrsitt] 


18  FKOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


AN    ILLUSTRATION    OF    THE    TENSION 
OF    SPACE. 

LET  us  make  or   build   up  a  small  artificial 
world,  and  comprehend  what  is  the  tension 
of  space. 

We  procure  a  glass  globe,  with  an  opening. 
This  globe  may  be  about  three  feet  in  diameter, 
and  the  opening  about  six  inches.  We  collect 
dust,  sand,  and  rocks,  and  all  other  matter  that 
may  be  in  the  earth ,  and  we  pulverize  all  this 
mass,  and  put  it  into  the  globe.  Now,  this  globe 
is  filled  with  the  tension  of  space.  The  sun  and 
earth  are  pulling  their  lines  through  it,  to  the 
pressure  of  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch. 
It  contains  tension  and  air.  As  we  fill  it  with 
the  dust,  the  air  is  being  expelled ;  but  we  can- 
not expel  the  space  or  the  conditions  in  it.  Ev- 
ery, atom  of  dust  is  encased  in  the  tension.  We 
pound  the  dust  gently,  to  compress  it,  and  force 
all  the  air  out  of  it,  and  we  now  pour  some  water 
on  it,  to  unite  and  hold  it  together.  The  globe 
is  now  filled  with  the  same  ingredients  as  the 
earth  contains.  We  allow  this  globe  to  remain 
under  the  sun's  rays  until  it  becomes  dry  and 
hard.     This  matter  in  this  globe  has  not  dis- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  19 

placed  its  space ;  whatever  strain,  tension,  or  con- 
dition was  in  it  is  in  its  mass.  The  heat  im- 
parted to  it  evaporated  the  v/ater,  and  the  air 
took  its  place.  We  will  now  break  this  globe, 
and  let  its  contents  stand  alone.  We  have  a  little 
world,  with  all  the  conditions  of  our  own  world. 
The  air  and  tension  is  in,  around  and  througli 
this  little  world,  in  equilibrium  and  at  rest.  The 
sun's  lines  pass  all  through  it  to  the  same  pres- 
sure as  there  is  throughout  space;  but  it  offers 
a  resistance  to  the  lines  of  tension,  and  heat  is 
produced  in  its  mass.  Its  tension  is  vibrated, 
and  a  circulation  produced.  The  air  is  heated 
and  expanded,  and  vibrates  the  tension.  The 
tension  vibrates  the  air,  and  the  matter  resists, 
and  heat  is  generated.  The  cold  tension  outside 
is  constantly  pressing  around  it,  trying  to  be- 
come equalized.  They  resist  each  other,  and  heat 
is  the  result  of  the  battle.  As  the  heated  air  cir- 
culates around  this  little  world,  it  is  continually 
disturbing  the  lines  of  tension  and  protecting  it 
from  the  cold,  preventing  its  lines  from  concen- 
trating around  it  and  crushing  out  its  heat.  But 
the  heated  -air  constantly  circulates  around  it, 
forming  a  cushion  or  insulation ;  for  the  heat  gen- 
erated in  the  little  world  is  being  absorbed  by 
the  cold  space,  and  the  cold  is  drawn  in  to  fill  its 
place.  This  is  its  circulation  and  life;  for  so 
long  as  it  can  generate  heat,  it  can  maintain  life. 


20  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

This  little  world  has  been  built  up  from  atoms 
on  the  tension  within  it.  These  atoms  did  not 
fill  any  space;  they  simply  occupy  a  portion  of 
space,  the  same  as  gas.  They  cannot  displace 
space.  It  is  too  fine  for  anything  to  separate  or 
divide  it.  Everything  grows  up  in  it,  and  what- 
ever aff'ects  it  aff'ects  everything.  It  holds  the 
tension  and  air  at  rest,  and  when  the  sun  shines 
on  it  this  tension  and  air  are  vibrated,  and  its 
matter  or  mass  resists  these  vibrations  and  be- 
comes heated,  and  this  heat  circulates  through  it 
and  life  is  continued. 

As  long  as  the  sun  shines  on  this  little  world, 
it  can  maintain  its  circulation,  which  is  its  life. 
The  sun's  lines  are  the  lines  of  tension.  Let  us 
suspend  this  little  world — say  about  four  feet 
from  the  ground — and  apply  heat  to  its  surface. 
As  the  heat  increases  around  it,  its  matter  will 
vaporize  and  go  off*  in  heat.  That  is,  we  apply 
sufficient  heat  to  it  to  dissolve  or  vaporize  it. 
This  heat  will  displace  sufficient  cold  to  allow  its 
atoms  to  dissolve,  and  the  cold  space  will  pull  up 
this  heat;  and  as  the  heat  rises  the  cold  will  take 
its  place,  and  thus  form  a  circulation  of  heat  and 
cold.  This  is  the  action  that  dissolves  and  va- 
porizes its  atoms.  It  is  the  interchange  of  heat 
and  cold  that  vibrates  the  tension  within  its  mass, 
and  when  these  vibrations  are  rapid  enough,  the 
atoms  separate  from  these  vibrations.     The  ores- 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  21 

sure  that  holds  them  together  is  being  vibrated 
and  thrown  out  of  equilibrium.  The  heat  and 
and  cold  are  seeking  a  point  of  rest.  One  is  re- 
sisting the  other,  trying  to  occupy  each  other's 
place.  The  cold  is  constant,  and  presses  all  around 
the  heat,  and  the  heat  is  trying  to  make  a  hole 
in  the  cold  space;  but  this  it  cannot  do,  for  it 
would  take,  perhaps,  a  million  degrees  of  heat  to 
make  a  vacuum  in  cold  space.  If  we  were  in  this 
cold  space,  midway  between  the  sun  and  earth 
(it  is,  say,  a  million  degrees  below  zero),  in  order 
to  be  on  an  equal  with  it,  we  would  have  to  be 
able  to  generate  a  million  degrees  of  heat  to  live 
there.  Now,  this  little  world  has  disappeared  in 
heat  and  vapor,  and  gone  up  to  the  clouds,  and 
condensed  into  the  cold-air  space.  After  all  the 
heat  has  been  extracted  by  the  cold  space,  all 
this  vapor  mixes  with  the  moisture  in  the  clouds^ 
and  condenses  into  water,  and  the  cold  presses  it 
back  to  the  earth  again ;  it  being  no  more  heat, 
the  heat  has  vaporized  it  and  the  cold  has  con- 
densed it. 

One  has  done  as  much  work  as  the  other. 
There  has  been  nothing  lost.  It  has  all  come 
back  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest,  and  we  could 
gather  or  concentrate  all  the  atoms  of  that  little 
world  and  build  it  up  again.  And  as  w^e  would 
build  it  after  the  first  form  and  prepare  it  in  the 
same  way,  and  apply  cold  instead  of  heat  to  dis- 


22  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

solve  or  vaporize  it,  this  would  have  to  be  done 
by  throwing  or  launching  it  out  into  the  cold 
space  beyond  the  air.  This  cold  would  concen- 
trate its  lines  around  and  through  its  atoms,  and 
vaporize  them,  as  the  heat  has  done.  This 
little  world  would  disappear  in  space,  and  per- 
haps condense  back  again  to  the  earth  or  some 
other  world  or  planet. 

But  if  this  little  world  could  generate  a  million 
degrees  of  heat  within  itself,  it  could  resist  the 
cold  and  maintain  itself.  A  million  degrees  of 
heat  and  a  million  degrees  of  cold,  pressing 
against  each  other,  would  exert  great  force.  This 
is  the  great  cold  pressure  that  presses  against  all 
heat  and  against  and  around  the  earth ;  for  the 
earth  is  a  ball  of  heat,  rolling  around  in  this 
great  cold  space,  and  they  are  seeking  an  equilib- 
rium or  point  of  rest. 

The  heat  vaporizes  our  little  world  by  raising 
the  cold  pressure  around  it,  and  allowing  its 
atoms  to  dissolve  or  separate.  The  circulation 
produced  by  the  heat  vibrated  the  tension  so  rap- 
idly that  its  atoms  could  not  hold  together.  The 
atoms  resisted  these  vibrations,  producing  heat ; 
and  the  heat  displaced  the  cold,  and  the  cold 
displaced  the  heat.  They  were  constantly  chang- 
ing places,  seeking  an  equilibrium  or  point  of 
rest.  The  matter  of  the  little  world  being  the 
resisting  medium,  the  cold  molecules  of  air  are 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  23 

drawn  into  the  intense  heat,  and  they  explode, 
breaking  the  lines  of  tension,  generating  heat 
and  light.  This  action  keeps  out  the  cold  suffi- 
ciently to  allow  all  its  atoms  to  dissolve,  and  the 
cold  crushes  our  little  world,  for  it  could  not 
generate  heat  to  resist  it.  It  ^vas  a  product  of 
the  earth,  and  was  encroaching  on  the  cold 
space,  and  as  it  advanced  into  this  cold  space, 
the  pressure  increased  around  it  by  degrees,  un- 
til it  could  resist  no  more,  and  it  was  crushed 
like  a  soap-bubble,  and  disappeared  in  space.  It 
became  a  part  of  space,  or  an  invisible  gas. 

The  heat  can  vaporize  matter,  and  the  cold 
can  vaporize  matter,  or  change  what  we  call  a 
solid  into  a  gas.  One  is  equal  to  the  other.  A 
degree  of  heat  raises  a  degree  of  cold.  The  cold 
is  inert  and  dead.  The  heat  raises  the  cold,  and 
gives  it  motion  or  circulation.  The  heat  gives 
the  cold  life  by  forcing  it  to  move.  The  heat 
radiates  from  the  earth ;  that  is,  we  always  ob- 
serve the  heat  generated  by  the  sun's  pull  as- 
cends from  the  earth,  not  descends  from  the  sun. 

If  we  fill  a  barrel  with  w^ater,  and  apply  suffi- 
cient cold  to  it,  it  w411  freeze  or  become  a  solid. 
This  cold  has  solidified  this  water,  and  it  holds 
it  in  this  form  at  rest.  We  break  this  barrel, 
and  allow  the  ice  to  stand  alone  in  its  present 
form ;  as  long  as  we  maintain  this  cold  it  will 
remain  a  solid. 


24  FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

Let  US  apply  heat  to  it,  and  watch  the  result. 
We  form  a  circle  of  small  pieces  of  wood  around 
it,  and  ignite  this  wood.  The  flame  and  heat 
displace  the  cold  by  breaking  its  lines  and  form- 
ing a  circulation.  This  circulation  vibrates  the 
lines  of  tension  around  the  ice,  separating  its 
molecules  and  dissolving  it.  The  heat  has  lifted 
the  cold  from  around  the  ice,  and  allowed  it  to 
dissolve  into  water  or  fluid.  As  we  increase  the 
heat,  this  water  will  become  vapor,  or  steam,  and 
will  ascend  into  the  clouds,  condense  into  rain, 
and  come  back  again  to  the  earth,  it  being  the 
point  of  rest. 

This  is  its  circulation  of  heat  and  cold.  The 
lieat  raised  the  pressure  of  cold  from  the  ice,  and 
it  dissolved  and  became  vapor.  This  vapor  was 
heat,  and  this  heat  was  pulled  up  to  the  cold-air 
space,  and  there  condensed  into  water,  after  all 
the  heat  was  extracted  from  it,  by  the  cold  ten- 
sion of  space.  As  the  heat  ascends,  the  cold  de- 
scends, to  fill  its  place,  and  so  the  circulation  is 
continued  of  heat  and  cold.  Thus,  we  find  the 
cold  pressure  held  the  ice  in  its  solid  form,  and 
the  heat  raised  the  cold  from  around  the  ice  and 
allowed  it  to  become  a  fluid,  and  as  the  heat  is 
increased,  the  water  becomes  a  vapor,  or  steam, 
and  is  pulled  up  by  the  cold  space. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  25 


ACTION   OF   HEAT   AND    COLD  ON  THE 
HUMAN  BODY. 

LET  us  observe  the  action  of  heat  and  cold  on 
a  human  body  in  a  healthy  condition.  We  in- 
close ourselves  in  a  room,  and  the  temperature 
is — say,  sixty  degrees  above  zero — and  we  feel 
good.  Our  blood  circulates  freely,  its  heat  being 
ninety-six  degrees.  This  is  thirty-six  degrees 
above  the  air  of  the  room.  This  allows  free  in- 
terchange through  the  body  of  heat  and  cold. 
As  fast  as  the  heat  is  generated  in  the  body,  the 
air  around  it  absorbs  and  carries  it  off,  and 
allows  the  cold  to  enter  and  fill  its  place.  There 
is  a  pressure  of  heat  in  the  body,  and  a  pressure 
of  cold  around  the  body.  They  are  seeking  an 
equilibrium,  or  a  point  of  rest,  through  the  body. 
They  are  fighting  for  each  other's  places,  and  this 
fight  generates  the  heat  and  keeps  up  the  battle. 
This  is  activity,  and  a  free  circulation.  Let  us 
increase  the  heat  in  the  room  to  about  ninety 
degrees.  This  makes  the  heat  in  the  body  and 
the  heat  in  the  room  nearly  equal.  The  body 
will  become  feverish.  Its  temperature  will  rise ; 
for  the  air  cannot  carry  off  the  heat  as  fast  as 
generated.     The  breathing  is  difficult  and  oppres- 


26  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

sive,  and  as  we  increase  the  heat,  the  blood's 
heat  increases,  and  at  one  hundred  degrees  in 
the  room  the  pressure  is  about  equal,  and  there 
is  no  interchange  of  circulation  of  heat  and  cold. 
The  heat  has  found  its  equilibrium  and  point  of 
rest  in  and  around  the  body.  There  is  no  more 
interchange  of  actions. 

The  air  cannot  carry  off  any  of  the  heat  gene- 
rated in  the  body,  and  this  heat  remains  in  the 
body,  and  causes  suffocation  or  death. 

Now,  let  us  reduce  the  heat  around  the  body, 
and  watch  the  result.  Degree  by  degree,  we  re- 
duce the  heat,  and  the  circulation  begins  to  move 
slowly  until  we  reach  the  normal,  and  the  bod}^ 
is  in  a  healthy  state  ;  as  we  may  reduce  the  heat 
until  we  reach  zero.  The  blood  must  circulate 
rapidly,  to  produce  heat,  as  fast  as  it  is  absorbed 
from  it  by  the  cold  around  it.  There  is  a  pres- 
sure of  heat  in  the  body,  and  a  pressure  of  cold 
around  the  body.  They  are  trying  to  occupy  each 
other's  place.  The  cold  presses  around  the  body^ 
and  the  heat  presses  from  the  body.  The  body 
is  a  vacuum  of  cold,  and  the  space  around  the 
body  is  a  vacuum  of  heat.  They  want  to  become 
equalized  ;  but  the  body  must  exercise  and  move 
around,  to  keep  up  its  circulation  and  heat,  for 
the  cold  is  constantly  pulling  the  heat  out  of  it, 
and  it  must  be  able  to  generate  this  heat  as  fast 
as   it  is  extricated.      The  cold  is  reducing  tho 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  27 

heat,  and  the  body  is  using  all  its  force  to  keep 
out  the  cold.  This  is  a  struggle  for  life — between 
heat  and  cold.  The  body  is  exhausting  its  en- 
ergy, and  gradually  reducing  its  nervous  and 
muscular  force  by  this  battle  with  the  cold. 

As  we  increase  the  cold,  it  presses  around  the 
body,  trying  to  crush  it ;  but  the  body  still  strug- 
gles to  keep  it  out.  The  body  has  to  do  all  the 
fighting ;  for  the  cold  is  constant,  and  lets  the 
heat  do  all  the  struggling.  The  cold  gains  on 
the  heat,  and  the  body  is  rigid  and  at  rest.  The 
cold  has  found  its  equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest, 
through  the  body. 

We  find  heat  and  cold  to  be  the  great  giants 
of  force.  One  resists  the  other  until  they  be- 
come equalized.  The  heat  gives  the  cold  mo- 
tion by  expanding  it,  filling  more  space ;  and  the 
cold  shrinks  the  heat,  compressing  it  into  a 
smaller  space.  This  action  is  continually  taking 
place  in  the  atmosphere,  giving  it  motion  and 
circulation,  vibrating  the  lines  of  tension,  gene- 
rating heat.  The  cold  is  inert,  a  dead  pressure 
or  weight,  filling  all  space  between  the  earth  and 
sun.  The  heat  has  to  raise  this  weight,  to  give  it 
motion,  which  is  circulation.  All  action  between 
heat  and  cold  is  by  circulation  or  interchange  of 
place.  As  the  heat  moves,  the  cold  fills  its  place, 
forming  a  circulation  and  motion,  which  is  life. 
The  heat  presses  the  cold  up  from  the  earth,  thus 


28  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

protecting  the  surface  of  the  earth  from  the  cold. 
This  heat  has  to  lift  the  cold.  One  presses  against 
the  other,  and  the  heat  reacts  against  the  earth, 
generating  heat  and  light.  This  is  all  vibrating 
action  on  the  air  and  tension.  The  reaction  of 
the  heat  is  a  reflection.  The  molecules  of  the 
air  are  like  glass  beads ;  they  reflect  their  light 
into  each  other,  and  the  tension  conducts  this 
light  on  to  the  earth.  The  earth  resists,  and  re- 
flects it  back  into  the  air,  generating  heat  and 
light. 

This  is  what  we  call  radiation.  This  radiation 
of  heat  and  light  vibrates  the  lines  of  tension, 
keeping  up  this  action  and  circulation.  This 
prevents  the  cold  tension  from  concentrating  its 
lines  close  to  the  earth.  It  forces  the  cold  up- 
ward, thus  protecting  the  earth,  imparting  life 
to  it. 

The  sun  and  earth  are  in  constant  communica- 
tion or  circulation  with  each  other.  This  space 
between  these  bodies  is  filled  with  this  tension  to 
the  weight  of  the  earth  pulling  from  the  sun. 
Nothing  can  separate  this  pull;  everything  is 
grown  up  in  it,  and  is  part  and  parcel  of  it,  and 
must  obey  its  motion  or  action.  All  matter  is  a 
mere  shadow  in  this  tension,  and  when  disturbed 
sufticiently,  it  can  vaporize  or  dissolve  all  matter 
into  invisible  gas,  either  through  heat  or  cold 
pressure.     One  is  equal  to  the  other.     An}^  mat- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  29 

ter  or  body  in  these  lines  of  tension  offers  a  resist- 
ance to  their  action  or  circulation,  and  heat  is 
generated  in  them,  and  a  circulation  is  produced. 
This  circulation  produces  life  in  all  animal  and 
vegetable  matter;  for  it  is  the  circulation  of  the 
life  of  the  sun  and  earth.  They  are  breathing 
the  breath  of  life  into  everything  between  them. 
They  are  imparting  part  of  their  life-force  to  all 
this  matter  on  the  earth. 

Tliis  circulation  is  like  our  life  blood ;  for  it  is 
the  sun's  and  earth's  circulation  that  is  in  our 
veins,  and  as  they  breathe  or  circulate  we  do  the 
same.  We  are  a  product  of  them,  and  must  obey 
their  laws  of  motion,  which  is  their  circulation. 
The  circulation  is  all  through  the  earth,  generat- 
ing heat  in  it,  for  the  earth,  or  the  matter  of  the 
earth,  offers  a  resistance  to  this  circulation,  and 
heat  is  generated  by  the  tension  being  vibrated, 
and  it  vibrates  against  the  matter  of  the  earth, 
and  causes  the  heat,  and  the  heat  displaces  the 
cold,  and  so  the  circulation  is  continued. 


30  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


A  LOOK  INTO  THE  RESISTANCE  OF  HEAT 
AND  COLD. 

THE  cold  is  inertia;  that  is,  it  is  dead,  motion- 
less. We  procure  an  anvil ;  this  will  represent 
the  cold.  It  is  the  resisting  medium,  or  point  of 
rest.  We  place  a  piece  of  glass  on  the  anvil,  and 
strike  it  with  a  sledge  hammer.  This  will  pul- 
verize the  glass.  The  force  applied  through  the 
hammer  represents  the  heat,  and  the  glass  repre- 
sents the  force  exerted.  The  glass  received  the 
shock  or  pressure  of  the  hammer,  the  anvil  re- 
sisted, heat  is  generated,  and  the  glass  is  pulver- 
ized or  vaporized  from  the  impact  pressure.  This 
is  similar  to  the  impact  of  the  heated  air  again:t. 
the  cold  tension  of  space.  The  molecules  of  heat- 
ed air  are  like  the  hammer  striking  against  the 
the  cold.  The  cold  resists  the  heat,  and  the  air  is 
vaporized ;  for  all  the  molecules  of  air  explode 
from  this  pressure,  generating  heat  and  light, 
when  the  bombardment  is  rapid  enough.  Now, 
imagine  thehammer  striking  this  anvil  a  million 
times  in  one  second.  Assuming  that  it  fell  two 
feet  every  stroke,  what  would  become  of  the  anvil 
or  hammer?  They  would  be  vaporized,  like  air 
or  glass.     But  think  of  the  billions  of  molecules 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  31 

of  heated  air  that  hammor  against  the  cold  ten- 
sion in  a  common  tallow-candle  flame !  Ever}^ 
second  the  explosions  of  the  molecules  of  air  are 
so  rapid  that  the  cold  is  like  the  anvil ;  it  will  not 
move,  and  the  air  bombards  against  it,  generating 
heat  and  light.  If  the  cold  tension  would  move 
out  as  fast  as  the  air  became  heated,  there  would 
be  no  resistance,  and  there  could  be  no  heat  or 
light  generated. 

The  earth  pulling  from  the  sun  generates  heat 
in  the  air  and  earth,  and  produces  life  and  mo- 
tion, in  all  animal  and  vegetable  matter.  This 
life  is  the  life  of  the  sun  and  earth,  their  circuit 
or  circulation.  This  is  imparted  to  everything 
on  the  earth.  The  heat  evaporates  the  water, 
and  it  is  carried  up  into  the  clouds  and  condensed 
back  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest.  This  is  a 
circulation.  The  water  falling  on  the  earth 
causes  the  growth  of  all  vegetable  life.  The  ani- 
mal life  feeds  on  this  vegetable  life,  generating 
heat  in  their  circulation,  which  is  their  life. 
This  is  a  circulation.  The  vegetable  matter  is 
absorbed  by  the  animal,  and  the  animal  is  ab- 
sorbed by  the  human  animals,  and  it  all  goes 
back  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest.  This  is  a  cir- 
culation. 

The  earth  produces  all  animal  and  vegetable 
life,  and  this  all  goes  back  to  the  earth,  the  point 
of  rest.     This  is  all  a  simple  circulation,  or  ac- 


32  FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

tion,  between  the  sun  and  earth,  and  everything 
must  obey  this  law,  for  it  is  their  life.  All  the 
matter  and  bodies  on  the  earth  and  in  all  the 
universe  are  in  circulation,  obeying  this  one 
universal  law  of  force  and  life.  This  is  one 
grand  universal  circulation. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 


WHAT  IS  MIND   OR   THOUGHT? 

ALL  space  being  filled  with  tension  or  cold  pres- 
sure, everything  grows  up  on  this  pressure,  it 
being  equal  everywhere,  and  anything  that  can 
vibrate  on  it  can  communicate  through  it  to 
some  other  object  or  matter  of  its  kind ;  provid- 
ing, they  are  in  harmony  with  each  other,  and 
the  time  occupied  in  this  communication  would 
be  the  resistance  in  the  matter  acted  on.  The 
space  between  this  matter  occupies  no  time  in 
transmission ;  for  every  vibration  produced  dis- 
places a  vibration  of  the  same  quantity  at  the 
end  of  the  circuit. 

Now,  the  brain  is  vibrating  on  this  force,  for 
all  the  organs  are  floating  in  it,  and  when  they 
vibrate  they  disturb  the  space  they  occupy.  This 
space  is  thrown  out  of  equilibrium  by  these 
vibrations,  and  the  brain  tries  to  equalize  this 
disturbance  by  putting  some  other  organ  in  vi- 
bration. These  organs  are  working  in  thought. 
They  are  trying  to  remember  some  incident  or 
place.  They  are  communicating  with  all  the 
organs  in  their  circuit;  and  when  they  have  dis- 
covered or  found  the  object  they  were  in  search 
of,  they  then  find  their  equilibrium.     Each  or- 


34  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

gan  of  the  brain  has  millions  of  little  nerves, 
and  these  nerves  are  vibrating  this  tension  or 
force  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square 
inch.  When  we  think,  we  disturb  this  force  in 
the  brain,  and  the  space  where  the  thought  is 
located  is  disturbed  to  the  same  extent;  for  the 
brain  is  a  circuit,  and  can  communicate  to  any 
distance,  for  there  is  no  distance  to  this  brain's 
circuit.  The  brain  being  a  center,  acts  through 
this  force. 

Now  the  brain  being  a  central  station,  can 
communicate  through  this  force  to  any  part  of  its 
nerves  that  are  in  vibration.  These  vibrations 
disturb  the  same  quantity  at  the  point  of  thought ; 
for  every  nerve  of  the  brain  has  its  quantity  or 
range  of  vibrations,  and  they  disturb  this  quan- 
tity at  the  point  of  resistance.  This  is  at  the 
point  of  thought.  All  the  nerves  of  the  brain 
are  in  circuit  through  this  force.  The  brain  can 
see  through  the  nerves  vibrating  on  this  tension  ; 
for  there  is  no  darkness  to  an  active  brain.  The 
nerves  of  the  brain  can  make  their  own  light, 
through  this  force;  and  when  we  think,  we  dis- 
turb a  certain  organ,  and  this  organ  communi- 
cates with  another  organ  in  its  line  of  work  or 
action,  by  vibrating  the  tension.  This  gives  a 
sound,  and  alarms  all  the  organs  that  are  in 
harmony  with  it,  and  they  are  put  in  vibration 
and  communicate  with  each  other  through  these 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  35 

sound  vibrations.  All  these  sound  vibrations 
are  harmonious,  and  do  not  interfere  with  each 
other.  They  travel  on  their  own  lines.  These 
are  the  lines  of  tension.  Now,  the  brain,  think- 
ing, is  acting  on  the  great  force  within  it,  and 
there  is  no  end  or  limit  to  this  great  force;  it  is 
universal  everywhere. 

When  the  brain  disturbs  this  force,  it  disturbs 
the  equilibrium  of  the  sun  and  earth ;  for  it  is 
in  the  space  between  them,  and  their  lines  pass 
through  it.  These  lines  in  the  brain  are  heated 
— say,  ninety-six  degrees  above  zero — and  the 
temperature  outside  the  brain  is  sixty  degrees, 
Now,  the  heat  in  the  brain  presses  out  against 
the  cold,  and  the  cold  presses  in  against  the  heat. 
They  want  to  become  equalized.  This  keeps  up 
a  circulation  of  heat  and  cold.  This  disturbs 
the  lines  of  tensions,  giving  the  brain  free  action 
and  circulation. 

The  brain  is  a  ganglion  mass  of  nerves,  float- 
ing in  this  force.  These  nerves  are  all  in  vibra- 
tion, from  the  heat  in  the  brain.  These  nerves 
are  like  the  glow-worm.  They  are  capable  of 
generating  light  between  themselves,  by  vibrat- 
ing on  the  tension.  This  would  be  when  the 
brain  is  in  great  thought,  trying  to  remember 
some  incident  or  place,  or  studying  out  some 
problem  of  mentality.  All  the  nerves  w^ould  be 
concentrated  this  time,  and  they  would  vibrate 


36  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

the  tension  rapidly  enough  to  make  the  brain 
luminous  without  heat.  When  we  want  to  study 
out  some  great  problem,  we  close  our  eyes,  and 
look  or  see  through  our  brain.  We  are  in 
thought.  All  our  nervous  system  is  concentrated 
in  our  brain  at  this  time.  They  are  all  assist- 
ing each  other,  trying  to  find  an  equilibrium 
by  discovering  the  missing  link,  and,  when  dis- 
covered the  brain  finds  its  equilibrium. 

Now,  the  brain  has  been  out  of  equilibrium  by 
thinking,  and  this  brain  occupies  a  portion  of 
space  between  the  sun  and  earth,  and  this  space 
has  been  disturbed  by  this  brain,  and  the  sun 
and  earth  are  pulling  their  lines  through  this 
brain,  and  the  brain  is  vibrating  its  nerves  on 
this  force,  disturbing  them.  These  vibrations  in 
this  brain  are  disturbing  the  space  between  the 
sun  and  earth  and  all  space;  for  this  brain  could 
not  think  if  it  had  no  conductor.  The  tension 
is  solid  everywhere,  and  the  brain  has  this  ten- 
sion as  a  conductor  for  all  thought  or  action. 
The  nerves  of  the  brain  are  a  mere  shadow  in 
this  tension  or  force.  It  reflects  all  matter,  and 
all  matter  is  incased  in  it  and  reflected  through 
it,  and,  when  it  is  vibrated  rapidly  enough  by 
the  nerves,  it  becomes  luminous.  The  eyes  are 
luminous,  and  reflect  their  light  into  the  brain. 
Now,  the  light  that  illumines  the  eyes  is  acting  on 
the  brain.     The  same  action  is  inside  and  out- 


Itihivbksiit; 


FROM   DAR^gSS=^P^==£lGHT.  37 

side  the  brain;  but  the  nerves  resist  more  than  the 
air,  and  heat  is  generated  in  the  brain,  and  a  cir- 
culation is  produced.  This  circulation  is  con- 
tinually disturbing  the  lines  of  tension,  keeping 
up  the  circulation  and  life  of  the  brain. 

Now,  if  two  brains  were  of  the  same  nervous 
structure,  acting  on  the  same  lines  of  tension, 
having  the  same  ranges  of  vibration,  and  were 
growing  up  in  the  same  location,  under  the  same 
influence,  and  if  they  were  separated  from  each 
other  after  they  had  matured,  they  could  com- 
municate through  their  brains  to  each  other; 
for  a  thought  or  action  of  the  brain  of  either 
would  affect  the  same  organs  in  the  other.  They 
would  form  a  perfect  circuit,  and  could  commu- 
nicate with  each  other;  providing  that  the  tem- 
perature that  these  brains  were  in  would  be  the 
same,  for  the  heat  must  be  equal  around  these 
two  brains  to  form  a  perfect  circuit  or  equilib- 
rium. The  air  insulates  and  retards  the  action 
of  these  brains;  for  it  is  constantly  crossing  the 
lines  of  tension,  disturbing  them. 

If  we  had  two  instruments  that  had  the  same 
ranges  of  vibration,  constructed  exactly  alike, 
and  would  sound  the  same  note,  and  if  they 
were  made  from  the  same  piece  of  metal,  in  the 
same  temperature,  and  separated  for  several  miles, 
and,  if  we  would  sound  one  by  vibrating  it,  it 
would  sound  the  other;   for  they  would   be  in 


38  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

perfect  harmony,  and  when  we  disturb  one,  it 
finds  its  equilibrium  in  the  other,  and  the  time 
occupied  in  this  communication  is  the  resistance 
in  the  matter  acted  on.  This  is  the  metal  and 
air;  they  are  resisting  mediums.  If  these  instru- 
ments were  in  communication  with  the  sun  and 
earth,  the  time  would  be  the  same;  for  it  takes 
no  time  to  communicate  to  any  point  or  place. 
If  we  had  a  rod  of  steel  connected  from  the  sun 
to  the  earth,  and  if  we  moved  it  one  foot  from 
the  earth,  it  would  enter  the  sun  one  foot ;  and 
if  we  could  move  this  rod  up  and  down  a  thous- 
and times  a  minute,  we  would  be  communicating 
with  the  sun  and  earth,  and  the  time  occupied 
in  this  communication  would  be  the  resistance 
in  the  rod,  or  the  time  that  it  would  take  to 
move  the  rod  up  and  down  once.  This  time 
would  be  the  one  thousandth  part  of  a  minute. 

Now,  let  us  point  this  rod  in  any  direction  that 
we  want  to  communicate  with,  and  move  it  one 
inch  in  that  direction,  and  we  have  connected 
with  the  object  we  want.  This  rod  is  like  the 
tension  of  space.  This  solid  is  everywhere,  and 
is  in  communication  with  all  space  and  matter, 
and  this  is  what  the  brain  communicates  through. 

When  the  brain  thinks,  its  nerves  moves  this 
rod,  and  it  is  in  communication  with  the  object 
it  thinks  of.  This  is  mind,  or  thought.  Now  the 
brain  has   millions   of  these  rods,  stretching  out 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  39 

in  all  directions  ;  for  every  nerve  of  the  brain  is 
equivalent  to  one  of  these  rods.  When  the  brain 
sounds,  or  taps,  one  of  these  rods,  it  has  found 
the  circuit,  and  it  can  communicate  through  any 
of  these  circuits.  Now,  these  rods  arelike  mind,  or 
the  tension  and  the  nerves  of  the  brain  are  matter 
acting  on  these  rods,  or  tension.  This  is  matter 
acting  on  mind.  Think  of  the  vastness  of  this 
mind.  This  means  all  the  universe,  illimitable 
space,  with  all  the  planetery  s^^stems  throughout 
all  that  vast  space;  and  mind  has  all  that  to  act 
on  and  disturb ! 

We  find  that  all  matter  can  be  dissolved  or 
vaporized  by  either  heat  or  cold  pressure,  when 
this  pressure  is  great  enough.  Now,  this  matter 
will  disappear  in  an  invisible  gas,  and  go  up  to 
the  clouds  in  heat,  and  condense  and  come  back 
to  the  earth  again.  It  cannot  get  away  from  the 
earth,  for  it  is  part  and  parcel  of  it,  and  must 
come  back  to  it,  the  earth  being  the  point  of  rest. 
Now,  this  matter  is  a  condensation  by  the  cold 
tension  of  space.  It  is  condensed  on  this  tension  or 
cold  pressure.  All  the  atoms,  or  molecules,  of  this 
matter,  are  floating  in  this  force,  and  as  the  cold 
increases  around  this  condensed  matter,  it  presses 
it  into  a  smaller  space,  compressing  its  atoms  to- 
gether, forming  what  we  call  a  solid.  The  atoms 
fill  no  space  in  this  solid  ;  they  are  only  a  con- 
densed gas  pressed  into  the  tension.     This  ten- 


40  FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

sion  divides  every  atom,  no  matter  how  small  it 
may  be.  Now,  the  tension  is  the  solid  that  holds 
the  atoms  in  the  solid  form.  It  binds  them  to- 
gether, holding  them  in  this  form  at  rest.  The 
pressure  is  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 
square  inch.  This  pressure  is  pressing  on  its  own 
lines,  not  on  the  solid  metal.  Nothing  can  ex- 
elude  this  tension.  It  is  everything,  and  every- 
thing grows  up  on  it. 

This  solid  has  been  condensed  on  the  tension, 
and  as  we  apply  heat  to  it  we  vibrate  the  tension 
that  holds  it  in  this  solid  form.  This  throws  this 
space  out  of  equilibrium,  and  allows  all  the  atoms 
to  separate  and  go  back  to  their  original  condition 
of  gas.  This  gas  has  gone  out  of  this  space,  but 
tlie  space  is  left. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  41 


WHEN   THE  EAETH   FALLS  FROM   THE 

SUN. 

THE  sun's  atmosphere  expands  and  stretches, 
generating  heat  and  light  in  it.  Thisexpansion 
may  be  hundreds  of  miles.  This  would  be  a 
great  wave  of  heated  air,  like  an  immense  sea  of 
flame.  The  earth  would  pull  this  flame  outward, 
allowing  the  earth  to  move  away  from  the  sun. 
This  movement  generates  heat  in  the  earth's  at- 
mosphere, through  the  lines  of  tension.  As  the 
earth  moves  away  from  the  sun,  the  heat  gener- 
ated by  this  movement  is  absorbed  by  the  cold 
space,  and  the  earth  is  pulled  back  by  this  shrink- 
age, or  pull ;  and  some  other  body  pulls  on  the 
sun  in  the  opposite  direction,  and  asit  approaches 
the  sun,  this  allows  the  earth  to  move  away  from 
the  sun  again.  This  would  form  a  balance,  or 
equilibrium;  as  one  body  is  moving  away  the  other 
is  approaching.  This  would  keep  the  sun's  at- 
mosphere in  great  commotion  ;  for  it  would  be 
pulled  in  all  directions  by  the  bodies  pulling  on 
it,  and  the  waves  of  light  and  heat  would  be 
surging  in  all  directions,  seeking  an  equilibrium 
or  a  point  of  rest.  But  there  could  be  no  rest 
there,  for  it  is  all  life  and  motion.     Think  of  all 


42  FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

the  thousands  of  bodies  pulling  and  surging  on 
the  sun  and  its  vast  atmosphere,  trying  to  pull  it 
all  to  pieces,  but  it  resists  this  pull,  and  heat  is 
generated  in  its  atmosphere.  Its  tension  is  vi- 
brated by  the  moving  air,  and  the  cold  tension 
of  space  is  pressing  all  around  this  sun,  trying  to 
crush  out  its  heat;  but  the  bodies  pulling  on  it 
keep  up  its  heat  and  light,  by  vibrating  its  ten- 
sion. There  is  nothing  consumed  in  all  this 
great  work  of  Nature.  These  bodies  are  in  per- 
fect harmony.  There  is  no  quarreling  or  fight- 
ing amongst  them.  They  all  do  their  own  work, 
and  assist  each  other,  and  harmony  prevails.  It 
is  not  reasonable  to  assume  that  the  sun  is  a 
burning  mass;  for  we  do  not  see  any  indications 
of  it  on  our  earth.  We  receive  heat  and  light 
without  any  consumption  of  matter.  These  come 
through  our  atmosphere  and  produce  the  air  mo- 
tion, or  circulation.  Our  clouds  at  some  times 
takes  the  colors  of  flames  from  the  position  the 
earth  offers  to  the  sun.  These  clouds,  if  viewed 
from  the  sun,  would  look  like  immense  flames,  as 
they  would  move  from  the  pressure  of  air.  This 
would  give  the  inhabitants  of  the  sun  the  im- 
pression that  our  earth  was  a  burning  mass  ;  for 
the  earth  would  be  constantly  offering  a  different 
view  of  its  clouds  to  the  sun.  These  clouds  offer 
a  resistance  to  the  lines  of  tension,  and  the  heat 
and  light  are  generated  in  them,  and  this  heat 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  43 

and  light  are  reflected  upward.  This  makes  the 
outer  portions  of  the  clouds  look  brilliant,  giving 
them  the  various  colors  ;  and  these  clouds  mov- 
ing rapidly,  owing  to  a  great  storm,  would  ap- 
pear from  the  sun  like  the  earth  was  a  sea  of 
flame;  for  the  matter  of  the  earth  would  not  be 
seen,  owing  to  the  brilliant  light  reflected  up- 
wards. 

Now,  we  look  at  the  sun,  and  say  it  is  a  burn- 
ing mass,  giving  out  all  its  heat  into  space.  The 
inhabitants  of  the  sun  would  say  the  same  thing 
of  our  earth  ;  but  they  could  not  prove  it.  Nature 
consumes  nothing  in  all  her  work.  It  is  only  a 
circulation,  or  interchange  of  place.  Nature  de- 
stroys or  wastes  nothing  in  all  her  actions ;  it  is 
reciprocal  and  harmonious. 


44  FKOAI   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


THE  MIND'S  JOURNEY  INTO   THE    CEN- 
TER OF  THE  EARTH. 

AT  the  surface  we  find  the  temperature  ahout 
sixty  degrees  above  zero,  and  as  we  descend 
it  is  continually  getting  warmer.  Every  few  feet 
makes  a  little  difference.  The  formation  of  the 
strata  of  rock  and  earth  are  varying  and  chang- 
ing. Some  are  hard  and  tough,  and  others  are 
soft  and  brittle.  Some  are  of  sand  formation, 
others  are  like  flint,  and  others  are  an  admixture 
of  all  these  combined.  The  ledges  of  these  rocks 
are  generally  slanting,  indicating  eruptions  at 
some  period  of  the  earth's  life.  Again  we  meet 
gravel  and  sand  formations,  indicating  rivers 
or  streams  of  water.  This  water  is  as  clear  as 
crystal,  it  having  been  filtered  through  many 
thousand  feet  of  earth. 

We  observe  all  kinds  of  metal  in  a  solid  form. 
These  metals  are  all  beautiful  and  clean.  They 
are  in  the  ledges  and  in  strata,  in  all  imaginable 
forms  and  sizes,  from  an  atom  to  the  size  of  a 
barrel.  They  are  continually  varying  in  heat. 
We  have  descended  4,000  feet,  and  it  is  about 
the  boiliug  point  of  water;  for  we  see  the  steam 
arising  from  some  water  near  us,  and  we  feel  that 


FliOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  45 

we  are  nearing  the  warm  place  where  many  peo- 
ple ought  to  go.  This  heat  does  not  affect  the 
metal.  We  find  there  is  a  great  pressure  on  us, 
but  we  are  prepared  to  resist  pressure  and  heat. 
It  is  getting  warmer  as  we  descend.  We  have 
passed  the  water  belt.  The  heat  is  dry  and  pen- 
etrating. As  we  look  around  us,  the  scene  is 
wonderfully  beautiful.  The  crystals  in  the  rocks 
scintillate  like  stars.  They  seem  to  be  under 
great  pressure  or  strain.  They  reflect  all  the 
colors  of  the  rainbow.  They  are  all  in  vibration, 
projecting  their  sparks  of  light.  The  lights  and 
shadows  are  beautiful,  and  in  perfect  harmony — 
no  discord.  The  sound  is  bewildering.  It  is  as 
varying  as  the  colors  are.  Our  bodies  are  in  har- 
mony with  it,  and  we  feel  happy.  As  we  de- 
scend it  is  getting  warmer,  the  colors  are  chang- 
ing, and  the  pressure  getting  greater.  The  light 
is  increasing,  and  we  can  see  further.  The  rocks 
are  more  transparent  and  luminous.  They  seem 
to  radiate  the  heat  and  light.  The  metals  are 
in  a  larger  formation,  and  more  varying  and 
brilliant  in  colors,  and  getting  softer  as  they  2:et 
hotter.  As  we  strike  them  with  a  hammer,  they 
give  no  sound.  It  is  like  striking  a  piece  of  lead. 
The  heat  is  getting  greater,  and  the  scene  is  con- 
tinually changing.  As  we  move  down,  the  rocks 
are  crumbling  and  brittle,  almost  ready  to  melt, 
and  the  heat  presses  up  against   us,  trying  to 


46  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

drive  us  out  of  its  domain;  but  we  are  deter- 
mined to  reach  the  center,  and  find  out  what  it 
consists  of.  As  we  reach  the  molten  rock  and 
lava,  our  bodies  float  on  it,  and  we  have  to  exert 
our  force  to  penetrate  this  to  go  further  down. 
As  we  float  and  swim  through  this  fluid,  the  heat 
and  resistance  increases.  The  fluid  is  getting 
thinner  and  warmer.  It  is  perfectly  incandes- 
cent, and  brilliant  beyond  description.  This  is 
a  world  of  light  and  heat.  We  look  around,  and 
see  the  scene  constantly  changing.  This  fluid 
seems  to  be  rolling  like  waves  of  the  ocean,  only 
these  are  waves  of  light  and  heat ;  but  we  can- 
not understand  how  this  heat  is  generated  or 
maintained. 

We  are  swimming  and  floating  through  this 
fluid,  seeking  the  center,  and  it  is  getting  thinner 
and  hotter,  and  more  brilliant.  We  can  see  for 
miles  around  us,  and  the  heat  is  increasing.  AVe 
are  two  thousand  miles  from  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  and  the  temperature  is  about  ten  thousand 
degrees  above  zero,  and  constantly  increasing  as 
we  near  the  center.  The  light  is  more  brilliant. 
It  is  beyond  description.  The  heat  seems  to  be 
forced  out  from  the  center  of  the  earth.  It  is  no 
more  a  fluid.  It  seems  to  be  like  gas  or  vapor. 
It  is  not  a  solid.  There  is  no  weight  to  it.  We 
float  in  it,  like  a  bird  in  the  air.  Everything  is 
transparent.     We  can  see  for  hundreds  of  miles, 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  47 

and  this  scene  is  dazzling  and  bewildering  beyond 
human  imagination.  We  are  nearing  the  center, 
and  the  pressure  is  decreasing  and  the  heat  is 
increasing — say,  about  twenty  thousand  degrees 
above  zero.  We  find  no  resistance  in  moving 
through  this  vapor.  It  is  thinner  than  the  air 
of  the  earth,  but  cannot  escape,  being  held  by 
the  crust  of  the  earth,  which  is  about  one  hun- 
dred miles  thick. 

The  sound  of  the  vibrating  gas  or  vapor,  as  we 
float  through  it,  is  charming  and  enchanting,  put- 
ting us  in  mind  of  Aladdin's  Cave  in  the  fairy 
tales  ;  but  there  is  nothing  solid  around  us.  It  is 
like  a  vast  world  of  molten  gold,  with  sparks  of 
diamonds  and  rubies  projecting  in  every  direc- 
tion. We  wonder  what  produces  these  sparks, 
for  we  cannot  see  any  connecting  link  for  them 
to  travel  on  ;  but  they  all  seem  to  be  going  to  the 
center,  like  ourselves.  The  colors  are  changing 
into  a  silver  hue,  as  we  near  the  center.  The 
sparks  are  decreasing,  but  the  light  is  more  bril- 
liant, as  there  seems  to  be  nothing  to  obstruct 
our  view.  It  is  like  looking  at  the  stars  or  into 
space.  There  seems  to  be  no  end  to  this  space. 
We  are  very  near  the  object  of  our  journey,  and 
we  are  glad  and  delighted.  Our  thermometer 
will  not  move,  and  we  cannot  indicate  the  heat; 
but  it  does  not  appear  to  be  as  warm  as  we  reach 
the  center.     The  heat  seems  to  liave  been  forced 


48  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

outward,  leaving  this  space  a  partial  vacuum  of 
heat.  As  we  look  off  in  every  direction,  the 
scene  is  grand — our  pen  could  not  picture  such 
a  scene.  This  center  seems  to  be  a  point  of  rest, 
for  there  is  no  motion.  It  is  as  still  as  death ; 
but  there  can  be  no  death  here;  this  is  a  place 
of  life.  Everything  within  this  great  vault  is 
alive  and  happy,  for  the  heat  gives  it  life  and 
motion.  There  is  no  cold  in  here  to  kill  any  of 
these  beautiful  objects.  They  are  all  in  perfect 
harmony,  and  traveling  on  their  own  lines.  These 
lines  pass  out  in  all  directions,  radiating  out  from 
this  central  point.  They  appear  to  have  con- 
nected their  lines  here,  and  are  holding  the  earth 
together,  continuing  it  in  its  present  form.  If 
we  should  use  this  point  as  a  telegraph  station, 
we  could  communicate  witli  every  inch  of  the 
surface  of  the  earth  ;  for  if  we  were  to  sound  or 
vibrate  the  tension  in  this  center,  it  would  sound 
and  vibrate  the  tension  throughout  all  the  earth. 
It  would  be  like  sounding  a  bell.  This  is  a  very, 
sensitive  point.  It  is  as  sensitive  as  our  hearts. 
It  is  pulsating,  or  breathing.  The  lines  of  ten- 
sion are  heated,  and  they  expand  and  vibrate. 
These  vibrations  pass  out  to  the  surface,  and  are 
then  absorbed  into  space. 

We  wonder  how  this  great  cavern  or  hollow 
globe  can  sustain  the  great  weight  of  the  crust 
of  the  earth  and  all  the  molten  mass  of  metals , 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  49 

why  they  all  do  not  fall  into  the  center,  it  being 
the  point  of  rest;  and  why  the  molten  metal  is 
forced  outwards;  and  why  the  earth  does  not 
explode,  with  all  this  great  heat.  But  there  is 
nothing  explosive  here.  These  gases  and  vapors 
are  in  harmony  and  do  not  quarrel  or  fight,  like 
man.  But  if  the  air  of  the  earth  should  come 
in  here,  then  there  would  be  a  battle  and  an  ex- 
plosion; and  if  the  water  could  come  in,  we 
would  have  an  earthquake.  It  occasionally  gets 
into  the  surface  heat  from  the  ocean,  there  being 
some  very  deep  valleys  in  parts  of  its  bottom. 
When  the  water  forces  its  way  into  the  crevices 
of  the  rocks,  there  is  an  explosion,  and  the  water 
will  be  thrown  into  the  air,  producing  what  we 
call  a  tidal  wave  and  an  earthquake. 

We  are  now  desirous  of  returning  to  the  sur- 
face, after  surveying  the  interior,  and  we  will  take 
observations  as  we  come  out  on  the  other  side. 
We  are  now  on  the  lines  of  tension,  and  will 
travel  on  these  lines,  as  nothing  can  retard  or 
resist  us  on  these  lines.  We  are  moving  rapidly. 
We  pass  through  this  gas  like  a  meteor.  The 
feeling  is  like  falling  from  the  clouds;  but  we 
strike  against  nothing.  Everything  is  visible. 
As  we  leave  the  gas  belt,  and  approach  the  denser 
vapor,  we  see  the  sparks  scintillating  in  all  their 
varied  colors,  as  we  flash  through  them  into 
another  stratum  of  heavier  vapor,  with  different 


50  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

colors  and  variations,  and  a  higher  degree  of 
heat.  We  find  no  resistance  to  our  progress; 
but  we  hear  beautiful  sounds,  ever  changing, 
and  rising,  and  falling.  These  are  the  lines  of 
tension  that  are  in  vibration  under  the  strain  of 
heat  that  they  have  to  pass  through.  These 
lines  are  continuous  and  unbroken ;  for  we  have 
not  stopped  at  any  station — we  are  on  a  liome 
journey,  and  have  a  through  ticket  for  the  sur- 
face. The  metals  are  all  in  harmony,  and  are 
enjoying  themselves  in  their  fluid  form.  The 
colors  are  changing,  as  the  density  increases,  and 
we  are  happy  in  anticipation  that  we  will  soon 
reach  the  surface.  The  metal  is  getting  heavier 
and  harder;  but  it  off'ers  no  objection  to  our  pas- 
sage through t  it.  The  metals  seem  to  salute  us, 
as  we  pass  through  them.  The  sound  is  chang- 
ing as  the  heat  decreases,  and  the  colors  of  the 
metals  are  getting  duller  and  harder  as  we  near 
the  surface.  The  lava  ofifers  no  resistance  to  us; 
only  it  gives  out  a  peculiar  sound. 

We  are  near  the  earthy  matter,  and  are  ob- 
serving the  different  formations  of  the  rock,  and 
their  different  colors  and  heats.  As  we  pass 
through  them,  we  can  see  the  quartz  and  gold 
and  its  different  form  and  richness,  and  all  the 
various  metals.  None  of  them  try  to  stop  us, 
but  give  us  momentum  ;  for  weare  their  life  and 
liold  them  in  their  p.^icnt  form.     We  see  the 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  51 

steam  around  us  as  we  pass  upwards,  and  the 
heat  is  decreasing,  and  we  are  beginning  to  feel 
cold  as  we  come  to  the  surface  and  get  into  the 
light  of  the  sun,  which  is  not  to  be  compared  to 
the  sun  in  the  center  of  the  earth.  We  have  ar- 
rived on  the  surface,  after  our  journey  through 
the  earth,  and  found  everything  in  there  heated. 
Gas,  molten  metal,  and  vapor,  all  in  intense 
heat,  and  we  wonder  how  this  heat  is  main- 
tained. 

We  find  the  lines  of  tension  all  through  the 
earth,  and  in  vibration  from  the  resistance  of  the 
composition  of  the  earth.  This  resistance  of  the 
matter  of  the  earth  to  the  lines  of  tension  gen- 
erates the  heat  the  same  as  a  resistance  coil.  The 
earth  resists  the  circuit,  or  circulation  of  these 
lines,  and  it  becomes  heated.  This  is  a  continu- 
ous action ;  for  the  earth  is  in  constant  rotation, 
disturbing  these  lines,  and  generating  the  heat, 
and  the  cold  space  is  continually  pulling  on  this 
heat.  But  the  crust  of  the  earth  protects  it  from 
this  pull,  and  saves  its  life;  for  if  this  cold  space 
could  pull  all  the  heat  out  of  the  earth,  death 
would  ensue. 

The  center  of  the  earth  is  matter  vaporized  by 
the  heat  within  it.  This  heat  is  about — say, 
from  ten  thousand  to  fifty  thousand  degrees 
above  zero.  Now  the  earth  is  surrounded  or 
floating  in  a  cold  space  of — say,  from  zero  to  a 


52  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

million  degrees  below  zero.  These  difFereut  heats 
are  seeking  an  equilibrium  or  point  of  rest.  The 
earth  must  maintain  its  heat  to  resist  the  cold, 
and  the  cold  is  the  great  weight  that  presses 
around  the  heat,  trying  to  crush  it  out.  But  the 
earth,  pulling  and  rolling  in  this  great  pressure 
of  cold,  is  constantly  generating  heat  by  disturb- 
ing the  lines  of  the  cold  tension  —  vibrating 
them.  The  air  is  the  insulator,  preventing  the 
heat  from  being  drawn  off  too  rapidly,  and  pre- 
venting the  cold  from  concentrating  its  lines 
around  and  through  the  earth,  thus  crushing  out 
all  its  heat.  Then  there  could  be  no  more  action 
or  life ;  for  they  would  have  found  their  equilib- 
rium and  point  of  rest  in  the  earth,  and  there 
would  be  no  more  earth.  The  cold  would  crusli 
it  in  its  embrace,  and  it  would  disappear  in 
space. 

Now,  if  we  were  to  take  a  piece  of  metal  out  of 
the  center  of  the  earth,  and  put  it  into  the  cold 
space — say,  one  thousand  degrees  below  zero — 
this  metal  would  have  to  raise  or  displace  this 
great  pressure  of  cold.  The  heat  could  not  main- 
tain its  form  against  this  weight  of  cold.  But 
if  this  metal  could  hold  its  form  and  become 
cold  under  this  pressure,  it  would  be  harder  than 
any  diamond  that  was  ever  discovered.  The 
heated  metal  would  offer  a  resistance  to  the  cold. 
It  would   be  occupying   its  space;  therefore   it 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO      LIGHT.  b6 

would  have  to  resist  or  lift  the  cold  pressure,  and 
as  it  would  cool  it  would  be  crushed  under  this 
weight,  and  disappear  in  space.  But  if  we  could 
take  a  quantity  of  molten  glass,  and  cool  it  un- 
der a  temperature  of — say,  one  thousand  degrees 
below  zero,  we  could  have  diamonds  and  all 
kinds  of  precious  stones,  if  portions  of  the  glass 
were  colored  to  imitate  these  gems.  The  cold  is 
the  pressure  that  makes  everything  hard  and 
solid,  or  hard  and  brittle,  depending  on  the  rapid 
change  from  heat  to  cold.  These  gems  would  be 
cooled  under  such  great  pressure  that  they  would 
inclose  within  themselves  the  lines  of  tension 
under  strain;  that  is,  the  tension  of  space  would 
be  imprisoned  within  them,  thus  giving  them 
light,  for  they  would  be  under  strain,  and  the 
tension  would  shine  or  give  out  light.  When 
we  vibrate  the  cold,  we  produce  Jieat,  for  the 
cold  resists  these  vibrations.  Heat,  however 
produced,  is  by  vibrations,  and  vibrations,  how- 
ever produced,  are  a  product  of  heat ;  and  these 
actions  have  the  cold  as  a  resistance  to  act  on. 
Thus,  we  find  a  great  pressure  of  heat  inside  of 
the  earth,  and  a  great  pressure  of  cold  around 
the  earth.  One  resisting,  the  other  seeking  an 
equilibrium  or  point  of  rest.  This  heat  is  a 
pressure,  and  the  cold  is  a  pressure.  One  re- 
sists the  other;  they  try  to  occupy  each  other's 
place,  and    are    resisted.      This  struggle   keeps 


54  FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

up  the  heat  and  light,  and  tlie  struggle 
goes  on. 

We  find  the  center  of  the  earth  filled  with  an 
incandescent  mass  of  metal  vapor  and  gaseous 
substance  in  various  colors  and  conditions  of 
fluidity.  All  the  heavy  matter  appears  to  be 
pressed  outward.  This  is  from  the  great  heat  and 
rotation  of  the  earth  through  space.  The  heated 
metal  presses  out  against  the  crust,  which  is  the 
float  or  refuse  from  the  metal  of  the  earth.  This 
is  a  great  internal  pressure.  It  would  burst  the 
earth  asunder,  if  it  did  not  have  something  to 
counter-balance  this  pressure.  But  the  cold  ten- 
sion of  space  presses  all  around  the  earth,  trying 
to  get  into  its  center  and  crush  out  the  heat 
that  is  in  there;  the  heat  resists  this  cold,  and 
they  brace  themselves  against  each  other,  like 
two  giants.  Shoulder  to  shoulder  they  struggle, 
and  the  more  they  struggle,  the  more  heat  is 
generated ;  for  this  action  vibrates  the  tension  in 
the  earth,  and  the  matter  of  the  earth  resists  and 
heat  is  produced. 

The  cold  tension  is  constantly  pressing  all 
around  the  earth,  and  the  inside  is  heated  and 
in  vibration.  The  outside  tension  lines  are  dis- 
turbed by  these  vibrations.  It  cannot  find  its 
equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest;  for  the  heat  is  con- 
tinually breaking  these  lines.  This  causes  the 
cold  tension  of  space  to  press  into  the  earth  with 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  55 

all  its  force ;  but  all  the  air  is  in  vibration,  dis- 
turbing the  lines  of  tension,  thus  preventing 
them  from  concentrating  their  lines  and  crushing 
out  all  the  heat  and  life  in  the  earth. 


56  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


A  LOOK  ON  THE  OUTSIDE  OF  THE 
EARTH. 

WE  see  the  earth  rolling  in  space,  without  any 
support — no  apparent  means  of  sustaining 
it  all  alone  in  an  intense  cold  space.  We  find  no 
heat  coming  from  the  sun,  no  sound  or  motion. 
It  is  as  still  as  death.  The  air  is. light,  and  thin, 
and  piercing  cold,  thousands  of  degrees  below 
zero. 

We  look  down  on  the  atmosphere,  and  observe 
its  changes  continually  varying  in  density.  The 
clouds  are  moving  in  every  direction.  They  re- 
flect the  effect  of  the  sun's  vibrations,  causing 
various  imaginations  on  our  minds.  We  wonder 
how  the  earth  can  roll  in  space,  carrying  the  air 
with  it,  and  why  the  air  is  not  thrown  off  and 
discarded,  and  how  the  earth  and  air  get  their 
heat.  We  see  no  means  of  heat,  or  of  producing 
it.  We  try  to  look  and  observe  things  on  the 
earth,  but  can  see  nothing  but  a  mass.  No  indi- 
vidual thing  can  be  seen  ;  the  earth  rolling 
around,  continually — changing  the  scene.  The 
oceans  and  lakes  are  reflected  like  mirrors  into 
the  clouds  and  air,  causing  beautiful  effects. 
These  clouds  look  like  mountains  of  snow,  rolling 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  57 

in  space,  continually  changing  the  panorama. 
We  find  the  earth  rotates  in  space  without  any 
resistance.  The  air  is  moving  with  it.  If  there 
were  any  resistance  to  the  motion  of  the  earth,  it 
would  soon  come  to  rest ;  and  if  the  sun  attracted 
the  earth,  it  would  offer  a  resistance  to  its  mo- 
tion. We  have  ascended  beyond  the  atmos- 
phere, and  found  nothing  but  cold,  open  space, 
and  have  not  been  able  to  find  the  means  of  pro- 
ducing heat,  light,  life  or  motion. 

We  have  gone  beyond  the  air  space  of  the 
earth,  and  found  nothing  but  cold,  and  are  desir- 
ous to  return  to  the  earth  again.  As  we  descend, 
we  find  the  air  is  growing  more  dense ;  every 
hundred  feet  we  descend  it  is  changing  in  tem- 
perature and  density.  The  sensation  is  strange. 
We  begin  to  see  things  on  earth.  The  mountains 
and  lakes  are  becoming  visible.  We  are  moving 
with  the  air  of  the  earth.  It  is  getting  warmer 
— say  about  five  hundred  degrees  below  zero  at 
twenty-five  miles  from  the  earth — and  getting 
warmer  as  we  descend.  Every  few  feet  makes  a 
little  difference,  and  the  air  becomes  more  dense, 
but  no  moisture.  It  is  perfectly  dry  and  cutting, 
penetrating  through  our  bodies  like  needles  ;  but 
we  are  used  to  it,  and  don't  mind  it.  It  is  con- 
tinually changing  as  we  near  the  earth.  The 
scene  is  beautiful  and  varying,  ever  changing. 
The  mountains  are  coming  nearer,  and  the  ocean 


58  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

looks  like  an  immense  mirror,  with  its  grand  re- 
flection. The  rivers  and  streams  look  like  silver 
serpents,  brilliantly  polished.  We  are  nearing 
the  clouds,  with  their  brilliant  colors  reflected  up- 
wards, like  mountains  of  silver.  It  is  gradually 
getting  warmer  and  more  comfortable.  Our  blood 
is  beginning  to  thaw  out,  and  the  circulation  is 
about  to  move,  a  very  peculiar  sensation  after 
being  frozen  so  long.  We  are  in  the  clouds,  and 
the  air  is  becoming  moist;  the  clouds  are  filled 
with  snow.  This  is  frozen  vapor,  or  condensed 
water.  As  we  pass  through  this  snow  belt  we  are 
almost  blinded.  The  wind  is  blowing  with  great 
force,  pressing  the  fine  snow  into  our  eyes  and  ears. 
This  is  many  thousand  feet  thick.  We  are  now 
below  the  snow  belt,  and  it  feels  warmer;  our 
blood  is  in  circulation,  and  we  begin  to  realize 
that  we  still  live.  The  feeling  is  strange.  The 
air  is  moist,  and  getting  warmer.  We  observe 
things  on  the  earth.  The  city  looks  like  a  check- 
erboard. As  we  look  up  and  down,  the  contrast 
is  wonderful  beyond  description.  The  air  is  get- 
ting warmer  and  moister.  The  heat  seems  to  ra- 
diate from  the  earth  in  waves,  flashing  upwards 
with  great  force.  These  waves  are  more  intense 
as  we  near  the  earth.  They  flash  up  in  our  faces 
like  flames.  They  seem  to  be  pulled  up  by  some 
great  power.  The  houses  are  now  visible,  and 
the  streets  can  be  seen.     We  can  see  the  people 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  59 

moving  in  the  streets,  and  we  feel  rejoiced  and 
happy  to  be  neariog  the  land  of  rest  and  life,  for 
we  have  not  found  any  life  above  the  clouds. 
Our  bodies  are  feeling  better,  and  our  minds 
more  active.  The  circulation  is  good,  and  we 
feel  warm  and  comfortable.  It  is  still  getting 
warmer,  and  everything  visible  as  we  land  on  the 
earth  and  once  more  stand  erect  on  solid  ground. 
We  are  delighted  and  happy  that  we  are  alive 
after  our  journey  through  space,  and  found  noth- 
ing or  got  no  information,  only  we  found  no  heat 
beyond  the  air  space  of  the  earth,  and  that  we 
found  that  all  the  heat  came  from  the  earth. 
But  the  connecting  link  we  could  not  find — how 
the  earth  generates  its  Jieat,  or  how  it  gets  its  mo- 
tion, light  or  life. 

The  space  beyond  the  air  is  intensely  cold, 
varying  from  the  earth  to,  say,  one  thousand 
miles  beyond.  Every  mile  makes  a  difference 
of,  say,  ten  degrees.  This  would  make  the 
outer  mile  ten  thousand  degrees  below  zero. 
This  is  a  very  cold  space.  It  would  crush 
anything.  Nothing  could  resist  it.  If  we  should 
put  a  piece  of  steel  into  this  cold,  it  would 
be  crushed  into  vapor.  The  steel  would  offer  a 
resistance  to  this  cold  pressure.  It  would  be  oc- 
cupying its  space.  But  if  the  steel  could  keep  up 
the  heat  sufficient  to  resist  the  cold,  then  it  would 
maintain  itself ;  but  it  would  have  to  fight  against 


60  FROM   DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

ten  thousand  degrees  of  cold,  and  so  it  would 
have  to  keep  up  ten  thousand  degrees  of  heat,  to 
be  on  an  equal  with  it.  This  heat  would  be  as 
destructive  as  the  cold.  The  steel  could  not  main- 
tain its  form  against  either.  The  heat  would  ex- 
pand the  steel ;  every  one  of  its  atoms  would  ex- 
pand or  explode,  going  off  into  gas  or  vapor. 
But  how  could  we  produce  such  a  heat?  As  the 
cold  increases,  the  heat  must  be  increased  to  re- 
sist it.  If  we  were  living  in  a  temperature  of  one 
thousand  degrees  below  zero,  we  would  have  to 
have  blood  or  circulation  in  our  bodies  of  eleven 
hundred  degrees  above  zero,  to  be  able  to  resist 
this  great  pressure  of  cold.  If  we  were  to  try  to 
melt  iron,  we  would  have  to  raise  the  heat  another 
thousand  degrees,  which  would  be  a  difficult 
matter.  If  we  would  boil  w^ater  the  temperature 
would  have  to  be  raised  to  about  twelve  hundred 
above  zero. 

The  cold  is  the  pressure  that  the  heat  must 
raise  or  lift.  A  degree  of  heat  raises  a  degree  of 
cold.  One  is  equal  to  the  other.  Cold  is  con- 
stant, and  the  heat  is  a  product,  or  inconstant, 
and  must  fight  the  cold  and  displace  it,  and  so  it 
is  a  battle  between  the  two  giants ;  one  resists 
the  other,  and  so  the  battle  goes  on. 

Now,  if  we  w^ere  to  make  a  hollow  globe  of 
iron  and  launch  it  out  into  this  cold  space,  and 
if  w^e  were  living  in  it  and  could  generate  heat  suf- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  Gl' 

ficient  to  radiate  outside  the  globe,  then  we  could 
maintain  it  as  long  as  we  could  supply  the  heat. 
The  heat  in  the  globe  would  lift  the  cold,  and 
break  its  lines;  but  the  cold  would  be  constantly 
absorbing  the  heat,  and  the  heat  must  be  con- 
stantly supplied.  Our  fuel  would  soon  give  out. 
We  could  not  feed  this  giant  cold.  It  would  soon 
consume  all  the  fuel  in  the  earth,  if  supplied  to 
the  iron  globe,  and  then  the  cold  pressure  would 
concentrate  its  lines  around  the  globe,  as  the  heat 
would  be  reduced.  The  cold  would  gradually 
crush  its  lines  through  the  iron,  and  unite  these 
lines  through  every  atom  and  vaporize  them,  and 
the  globe  would  disappear  in  space.  It  would 
become  a  part  of  space. 

Now,  if  there  were  no  air  around  the  earth,  it 
would  be  crushed  like  the  globe,  and  disappear 
in  space,  and  might  condense,  concentrate,  and 
form  other  planets  or  worlds.  The  air  around 
the  earth  generates  the  heat,  distributes  it,  and 
holds  it,  thus  protecting  the  earth  and  breaking 
the  lines  of  cold,  preventing  them  from  concen- 
trating their  lines.  The  air  is  a  cushion.  Every 
molecule  of  air  incloses  a  portion  of  these  lines, 
and  is  in  motion,  crossing  and  recrossing  them, 
producing  heat  and  protecting  the  earth ;  but 
there  is  nothing  consumed  in  producing  this 
heat.  But  if  the  earth  had  to  supply  fuel  to 
maintain  this  heat,  to  fight  the  cold  to  maintain 


62  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

its  life, how  long  would  it  last?  It  would  soon 
be  consumed.  If  the  sun  has  to  consume  itself 
in  order  to  protect  its  family  of  planets  or  worlds, 
and  if  it  should  radiate  its  heat  into  space,  it 
would  soon  become  cold.  How  could  the  heat 
of  the  sun  reach  the  earth  after  passing  through 
93,000,000  of  miles  of  intense  cold  ?  Could  heat 
pass  through  a  block  of  ice  and  produce  heat? 

The  sun's  heat  must  be  generated  the  same  as 
the  earth's.  They  pull  from  each  other,  and  their 
atmospheres  resist  this  pull,  and  heat  is  produced. 
These  atmospheres  cannot  be  consumed  or  de- 
stroyed, but  can  generate  heat  and  hold  it  in 
sufficient  quantities  to  protect  their  own  bodies 
and  maintain  life.  How  does  the  heat  pass 
through  the  block  of  ice  ?  The  ice  occupies  a 
portion  of  space,  and  the  tension  is  in  that  space. 
The  molecules  of  water  hold  the  tension  within 
them,  and  the  ice  is  held  in  its  form  by  this  ten- 
sion, or  cold  pressure.  The  ice  is  in  the  tension, 
part  and  parcel  of  it,  offering  no  resistance  to  the 
lines  of  tension. 

The  action  of  the  sun's  rays  on  the  ice  are 
through  this  tension.  The  vibrations  produced 
by  the  sun  on  the  lines  in  and  through  the  ice 
are  magnified  or  focused,  or  intensified,  and  pass 
through  the  ice  ;  for  the  ice  is  in  harmony  with 
these  lines,  being  cold  and  transparent.  The  ice 
is   like   a   sheet   of  glass;    the   vibrations   pass 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  63 

through  it  without  resistance.  These  vibrations 
travel  on  the  lines  of  tension  ;  that  is,  their 
own  lines.  The  earth  pulling  from  the  sun,  the 
ice  is  in  that  pull,  and  the  effect  of  that  pull 
passes  through  the  ice,  producing  the  heat.  The 
air  resists  this  pull,  and  becomes  heated  and  ex- 
pands, and  is  put  in  motion,  constantly  crossing 
and  recrossing  these  lines,  keeping  up  the  heat 
and  circulation.  Every  molecule  of  water  is 
crystallized,  and  each  reflects  its  light  on  the 
other ;  and  when  the  tension  is  vibrated,  these 
molecules  are  excited,  concentrating  their  lines, 
producing  the  heat,  as  if  by  reflection. 

If  we  try  to  make  heat  pass  through  this  ice, 
it  will  melt  it.  This  is  artificial  heat,  and  can- 
not pass  through  on  the  lines  of  tension,  or 
through  the  water  of  the  ice.  As  the  heat  comes 
in  contact  with  the  ice,  it  offers  a  resistance  to  it, 
and  is  melted  or  dissolved.  The  ice  absorbs  the 
heat  all  around  it.  This  heai;  is  displacing  the 
cold,  and  the  cold  is  absorbing  the  heat.  They 
are  seeking  an  equilibrium  or  point  of  rest.  As 
fast  as  the  ice  absorbs  the  heat,  it  melts  or  raises 
the  cold  pressure,  and  allows  it  to  become  a  fluid. 

UFIVBRSITYl 


64  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


A   LOOK   INTO   A    COMMON    PIECE    OF 
COAL. 

IT  is  a  product  of  heat,  produced  or  grown  up 
under  Nature's  laws.  The  action  of  the  sun  on 
the  coal  concentrated  its  energy  or  vibrations, 
storing  them  in  it  for  future  use  or  liberation. 
Now,  this  piece  of  coal  occupies  a  portion  of 
space,  and  the  tension  is  in  that  space,  and  is 
cold,  and  rigid,  and  at  rest.  The  coal  is  of  a 
gaseous  or  carbonaceous  nature,  capable  of  being 
divided  into  atoms,  or  molecules.  It  is  cold,  and 
requires  heat  to  separate  or  liberate  its  atoms. 
If  we  apply  heat  to  this  coal,  it  will  raise  the 
cold  from  around  it.  This  cold  is  the  pressure 
that  holds  it  in  its  present  form.  As  the  Iieat 
increases,  the  cold  decreases,  and  allows  the 
atoms  of  the  coal  to  separate  or  dissolve,  or  be- 
come gaseous.  Each  atom  of  the  coal  holds  in 
itself  some  of  the  tension,  and  when  the  heat  is 
great  enough^  they  explode,  producing  the  light, 
or  flame.  These  explosions  break  the  lines  of 
tension,  causing  the  great  heat.  These  atoms  are 
surrounded  by  the  cold  tension  of  space  to  the 
pressure  of  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch. 
They  explode  against  this  pressure.     This  is  a 


niOM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  65 

coRtiniious  explosion  of  these  atoms  of  gas;  for 
the  heat  liherates  all  the  atoms  or  molecules  of 
the  coal,  forming  into  gas.  The  air  combines 
with  the  gas,  and  causes  the  circuhition.  Each 
molecule  combines  with  a  molecule  of  air  and  ex- 
plodes, breaking  the  lines  of  tension.  This  is  all 
around  the  coal,  lifting  the  cold  and  displacing 
it.  The  tension  inside  of  the  coal  being  cold  and 
surrounded  by  the  heat,  one  is  acting  against  the 
other,  crossing  each  other's  lines,  generating  iieat 
and  light. 

When  the  coal  is  under  combustion  or  combi- 
nation, it  lias  to  raise  the  pressure  of  the  cold, 
which  is  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 
square  inch.  This  is  the  great  resistance  the 
heat  has  to  act  on  and  overcome.  The  heat 
jnakes  a  hole  in  this  space,  and  the  cold  crushes 
against  this  heat.  One  resists  the  other,  and  heat 
and  light  are  produced.  The  molecules  of  air 
and  gas  combine,  and  expand  against  this  great 
pressure,  heat  is  generated,  and  the  molecules  are 
crushed  and  exploded, producing  heat  and  light. 
All  this  action  of  heat  and  cold  are  vibrating, 
acting  on  the  air  and  tension.  The  coal  is  inert 
and  dead,  and  when  the  heat  is  applied,  it  vi- 
brates the  air,  and  the  air  vibrates  the  tension. 
This  is  the  first  action  or  motion.  Each  mole- 
cule of  air  holds  within  it  some  of  the  tension, 
and  when  it  moves,  it  expands,  and  vibrates  the 


66  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

air  and  tension  within  and  around  it.  These  vi- 
brations are  transmitted  to  the  surrounding  air 
and  tension,  generating  heat.  When  these  vibra- 
tions become  numerous,  the}^  crowd  each  other, 
and  break  the  equilibrium  around  the  coal. 
This  space  now  being  under  vibratory  strain, 
causes  the  tension  outside  of  the  coal  to  press 
into  this  vibrating  space,  causing  heat  and  light. 
The  coal  is  being  liberated  of  its  atoms  by  the 
heat  produced  by  the  vibrating  air  and  tension. 
The  tension  inside  of  the  coal  is  under  great  vi- 
bratory strain.  Its  lines  are  being  broken  by 
the  circulation  around  it,  thus  severing  the  force 
that  holds  it  in  form,  allowing  it  to  dissolve  or 
vaporize,  or  go  off  into  gas,  where  it  came  from. 
This  coal  has  been  produced  from  vapor  or  air, 
and  condensed  or  concentrated  into  a  solid  by 
the  cold  tension  of  space.  This  has  preserved  it, 
and  when  the  heat  is  supplied,  it  goes  back  into 
its  original  form  or  condition,  for  Nature  to  re- 
peat her  work  of  condensing  or  concentrating  it 
into  some  other  body  or  form. 

The  cold  air  and  tension  condenses  all  the 
gases,  and  presses  them  back  to  the  earth,  it  being 
the  point  of  rest ;  and  when  there  is  heat  enough 
produced  to  raise  this  cold  pressure  from  these 
gases,  they  rise  again,  they  then  being  heat.  This 
heat  is  pulled  up  by  the  cold  tension  of  space, 
the  air  resists,  and  is  heated  and  put  in  motion, 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  G7 

and  mixes  with  these  gases,  separating  them. 
The  air  carries  these  gases  into  the  clouds,  where 
they  are  condensed  into  raindrops,  to  fall  back  to 
the  earth  again,  to  go  through  the  same  process. 
This  is  a  continuous  action  or  work  of  Nature,  of 
keeping  up  the  circulation  and  life  of  the  earth. 
Wood  is  similar  to  coal.  The  tension  is  in  the 
wood  at  rest ;  and  when  it  is  vibrated,  the  fibre 
resists,  and  heat  is  produced,  the  cold  is  raised 
and  the  atoms  of  the  wood  combine  with  the  air, 
and  are  vaporized  from  the  pressure  of  the  cold. 
The  atoms  expand  and  explode  against  this  cold, 
disturbing  its  lines,  producing  heat  and  light. 


GS  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


A    PEEP   INTO    LIFE.  — WHAT    IS   LIFE? 

LIFE  is  a  product  of  a  combination  of  actions 
and  principles  in  the  human  family.  It  is  a 
product  of  male  and  female  —  positive  and  nega- 
tive. A  circuit  between  the  two.  The  same  as 
the  circuit  between  the  poles  of  the  magnet.  The 
magnet  poles  are  the  circuit  between  the  sun  and 
earth.  This  circuit  is  reproduced  between  male 
and  female  in  contact.  The  nervous  system  acts 
through  the  tension  of  the  body.  Each  nerve 
gives  its  portion  of  seed  through  this  circuit. 

As  the  nerves  of  the  bodies  are  weaker  or 
stronger,  healthy  or  diseased,  so  will  the  product 
or  offspring  be.  A  diseased  or  weak  nerve  can- 
not produce  a  healthy  one.  The  little  nerves 
of  these  two  bodies  are  concentrated  to  make  a 
circuit.  They  are  straining  the  whole  nervous 
system,  vibrating  the  tension  within  them.  This 
is  the  life  throes  or  action  of  the  nerves  on  the 
tension  of  the  bodies,  concentratmg  all  their  forces 
to  form  union  or  circuit.  This  now  formed,  the 
connection  is  made,  and  the  nervous  fluids  com- 
bined to  build  up  a  body.  These  bodies  have 
acted  through  their  nerves  on  the  tension  within 
them. 


FKOM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  G9 

The  nervous  excitation  of  the  male's  body  pro- 
duced heat  in  it,  and  expanded  the  fluid,  vibra- 
ting the  nerves,  and  the  nerves  vibrated  the 
tension,  and  produced  the  flow.  The  male  is  tlio 
sun's  poles  producing  heat.  This  heat  is  ab- 
sorbed by  the  female,  she  being  of  the  earth's 
pole,  cold.  The  cold  absorbs  the  heat,  and  the 
heat  displaces  the  cold,  and  life  begins.  This 
nervous  fluid  has  been  produced  from  the  nerv- 
ous structure  of  these  bodies  acting  through  the 
tension  of  space.  All  this  condition  or  action  is 
imparted  to  the  product  of  these  bodies.  It  is 
an  impression  or  reflection  of  them  through  tlie 
tension ;  for  the  tension  reflects  all  matter,  and 
all  matter  is  incased  in  it  and  reflected  through  it. 

Now,  the  nerve  seeds  have  been  planted  in  good 
soil,  and  they  begin  to  germinate  and  take  root. 
Now,  there  is  no  intelligence  imparted  to  these 
seeds,  except  through  the  nerves  and  tension,  and 
they  cannot  transmit  intelligence.  They  trans- 
mit force,  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of  the 
nerves.  The  seed  is  growing  under  the  influence 
and  condition  of  the  female;  she  being  in  healthy 
condition,  the  seed  will  be  the  same.  This  is 
Nature's  way  of  producing  and  propagating  life. 
The  seeds  are  subsisting  on  the  female's  body,  it 
being  like  the  earth,  producing  vegetable  life. 
The  plant  subsists  on  the  elements  of  the  soil  of 
the  earth,  and  grows  and   matures  under  its  in- 


70  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

fluence  and  condition.  The  seed  in  the  female 
now  matured  is  born  or  produced  from  its  mother. 
This  child  has  no  intelligence,  cannot  see,  cannot 
speak,  or  think,  or  act,  perfectly  helpless;  but  it 
is  a  product  of  a  nervous  matter  under  nervous 
tension,  and  these  conditions  are  reproduced  in  it. 
This  child  is  now  under  the  influence  or  con- 
trol of  the  parents,  night  and  day,  and  they  are 
imparting  their  intelligence  to  their  child,  and 
it  absorbs  into  its  nervous  system  this  intelli- 
gence as  fast  as  the  nerves  increase  in  strength. 
From  one  to  three  months  old,  the  child  becomes 
sensitive  to  the  influence  around  it.  This  child 
is  a  product  of  the  parents,  produced  from  the 
nervous  system,  part  and  parcel  of  them,  and  it 
is  continually  absorbing  into  its  nervous  system 
their  actions  and  intelligence,  providing  these 
nervous  systems  are  in  harmony  with  the  ten- 
sion. These  nervous  structures  are  vibrating  on 
the  tension,  and  the  vibrations  are  imparted  to 
the  child,  and  absorbed  by  its  nervous  system. 
At  this  period  of  life,  the  child  does  not  observe 
or  notice  anything.  All  feeling  or  sensation  is 
through  its  nerves.  Every  day  the  nerves  are 
growing  and  maturing  under  this  intelligence 
around  it.  At  five  or  six  months  old,  it  begins 
to  observe.  Its  brain  is  an  impression,  or  com- 
bination, or  reproduction  of  the  parents'  brains. 
The  child  is  not  responsible  for  its  life  or  being. 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  71 

It  had  no  will  or  say  in  coming  into  this  world. 
From  five  months  to  a  year  old,  its  nerves  are 
stronger,  and  it  is  more  susceptible  to  impres- 
sions or  influences.  Its  mother  is  continually 
imparting  to  it  her  love  and  emotions,  and  it  is 
continually  absorbing  them.  Its  nerves  are  feed- 
ing on  these  affections  or  expressions.  They  are 
impressed  on  it,  like  the  reflection  of  our  face  in 
the  mirror.  As  it  begins  to  observe,  the  mother's 
X3yes  reflect  her  intelligence  and  emotion  into  the 
child's  eyes,  and  into  its  brain.  All  this  is  vibra-' 
tory  action  through  the  nervous  system  on  the 
tensions  of  their  bodies.  The  child's  nerves  are 
weak  and  soft,  and  susceptible  to  impressions. 
The  mother's  eyes  are  strong  and  matured,  and 
they  are  impressed  on  the  child's ;  it  not  having 
any  will  or  intelligence,  cannot  resist  impres- 
sions. The  influence  around  this  child  is  food 
for  its  nerves.  The  mother  is  the  mirror  that  the 
child  is  constantly  looking  into,  and  the  reflec- 
tion is  impressed  on  the  child,  as  the  child's 
brain  begins  to  mature.  The  mother  is  impart- 
ing the  intelligence  or  influence  of  her  brain  to 
the  child.  If  the  mother's  brain  is  cultivated, 
its  nerves  are  strong,  and  are  impressed  on  the 
child's  brain,  and  it  grows  under  this  influence. 
The  mother's  brain  feeds  the  child's  brain. 

The  child  is  growing  day  by  day  under  these 
influences,  its   brain   and   nervous  system  con- 


72  FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

stantly  absorbiii;^  them,  and  living  and  growing 
under  these  conditions.  It  is  like  cultivating  a 
plant.  The  soil  is  of  the  greatest  importance. 
Sunshine  it  must  have.  These  are  the  elements 
it  lives  on  ;  but  without  care,  cultivation,  and  at- 
tention, it  amounts  to  nothing.  We  mast  love 
this  plant  and  understand  its  nature,  in  order  to 
be  successful  in  its  cultivation  and  maturity.  It 
is  this  knowledge  and  its  influence  that  we  im- 
part to  the  plant,  and  it  absorbs  it  into  its  system 
or  circulation  ;  for  it  is  in  harmony  with  the 
brain  that  is  cultivating  it,  and  it  grows  and  ma- 
tures under  these  conditions  and  influences.  The 
child  from  one  to  two  years  becomes  more  ob- 
servant, takes  more  notice  of  things  around  it. 
The  mother  is  constantly  talking  to  it,  trying  to 
make  it  speak.  The  sound  of  her  voice  is  im- 
pressed on  its  brain,  and  it  tries  to  do  what  she 
does.  She  teaches  it  to  walk,  by  constantly  plac- 
ing it  on  its  feet,  and  holding  it  in  that  position 
until  it  gets  used  to  it.  This  continuous  appli- 
cation or  cultivation  of  this  child  by  its  mother 
is  imparting  her  knowledge  or  intelligence  to  her 
child.  As  it  grows  older,  it  is  taught  other  neces- 
sary things.  Its  brain  is  more  active.  Its  or- 
gans are  becoming  more  developed  and  more 
liable  to  impressions. 

From  two  to  seven  years  of  age,  it  is  continu- 
allv  beinoj  instructed  or  educated.     All  this  teach- 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  i6 

ing  and  instruction  imparted  to  this  child  is  an 
experience  by  its  mother  or  the  instructor.  The 
child  is  absorbing  their  experience  into  its  nerv- 
ous structure,  from  its  eyes  into  its  brain,  and 
through  the  body.  The  child  is  observing,  ask- 
ing questions,  and  receiving  answers,  acquiring 
knowledge  or  experience.  It  is  living,  growing 
and  maturing,  surrounded  by  this  influence  or 
intelligence,  all  imparted  to  it  from  others.  It 
had  none  when  born  ;  but  is  continuall}^  gaining 
and  acquiring  intelligence  or  experience,  which 
makes  impressions  on  its  brain,  recording  tliem 
for  future  use  as  memory  or  mind. 

This  child  from  eight  to  eighteen  is  being  in- 
structed, educated,  or  influenced,  and  whatever 
this  teaching  may  be,  it  will  be  a  fixture  in  its 
nervous  and  muscular  structure.  It  being  no 
more  a  child,  is  now  a  young  man,  receiving  in- 
structions, or  a  college  education,  or  the  expe- 
rience of  an  instructor.  This  educator  is  im- 
parting his  experience  to  this  young  man,  and  he 
is  absorbing  it  and  impressing  it  on  his  mind — 
that  is,  his  brain — for  future  remembrance  or 
memory.  At  this  period  of  life  the  brain  has  to 
do  a  great  deal  of  memorizing,  or  minding.  This 
is  what  develops  the  brain  ;  for  a  thought  is  an 
action  of  the  nerves  of  the  brain  on  the  tension 
within  it,  and  the  tension  is  vibrated,  and  re- 
cords, or  makes  an  impression,  on  the  nerves  of  the 


74  FKOM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

brain  for  future  reference  of  thought,  or,  "Oh,  I  re- 
member," Mind  is  the  tension  of  space  that  the 
brain  sounds  or  vibrates  on.  Every  nerve  of  the 
brain  has  its  range  of  sound  vibrations,  or  key- 
notes. They  do  not  interfere  with  each  other.  They 
are  in  perfect  harmony.  All  the  variations  of 
sounds  have  their  ranges  of  vibrations,  and  these 
act  on  the  different  nerves  of  the  brain  that  they 
are  in  harmony  with.  A  peculiar  sound  that 
the  brain  is  familiar  with  is  impressed  on  certain 
nerves,  and  when  that  sound  is  produced,  it  ex- 
cites this  nerve  through  the  tension,  and  it  vi- 
brates, and  sounds  the  tension,  and  this  acts  on 
the  nerves  that  are  in  harmony  with  it.  This  is 
like  sounding  a  firebell.  All  the  people  in  the 
town  know  the  sound  of  the  bell ;  and  the  num- 
ber of  sounds  indicate  the  location  of  the  fire, 
and  the  people  all  run  in  that  direction.  This 
young  man  is  still  acquiring  knowledge,  or  an 
experience,  through  others'  experiences.  This  is 
all  acquired  intelligence,  or  education,  or  infor- 
mation. All  this  information  is  impressed  on 
the  brain,  and  retained  there  as  intelligence,  or 
knowledge  and  experience;  and  at  the  age  of 
sixty  years  he  has  fully  matured,  but  feels  that 
he  has  not  acquired  much  knowledge  after  all,  it 
being  an  experience  of  others. 

At  the  age  of  seventy-five  years  he  has  still 
been  acquiring  an  experience,  and  imparting  it 


FKOM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  75 

to  others,  as  others  imparted  to  him.  So  it  is 
through  life — one  imparts  bis  experience  to  an- 
other, and  this  is  our  intelligence.  AVe  were  not 
born  with  it.  We  acquire  it  from  others.  This 
old  man  is  now  going  to  die,  and  he  wants  to 
know  if  he  can  take  his  intelligence,  or  acquired 
experience,  with  him.  We  would  ask  him  what 
he  brought  into  the  world  with  him.  He  an- 
swers, he  was  a  bab}^,  without  any  intelligence, 
or  experience,  or  knowledge.  "  All  I  know,  I  have 
learned  since  I  was  born  into  this  world.  I  knew 
nothing  before." 

We  would  say  :  "  All  your  knowledge  and  ex- 
perience has  been  acquired  from  others,  through 
your  nervous  system,  or  body.  It  is  all  artificial. 
It  is  not  of  nature.  It  is  a  product  of  man,  and 
cannot  be  transmitted  beyond  man,  but  your 
body  can  have  the  use  of  it,  as  long  as  it  can 
hold  it  or  utilize  it.  Your  body  has  occupied  a 
portion  of  space.  You  have  come  from  seeds 
and  experience  of  others.  You  have  grown  from 
these  seeds  under  the  laws  of  Nature.  These 
seeds  have  expanded  gradually,  filling  more 
space.  You  have  grown  and  matured,  subsist- 
ing on  the  product  of  the  earth,  expanding  and 
developing  your  body.  You  are  a  product  of 
the  earth,  and  must  remain  on  it.  You  are  part 
and  parcel  of  it,  and  must  go  back  to  it." 
This  old  man  wants  to  know  what  is  the  good 


76  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

of  all  his  experience,  or  intelligence,  if  he  has  to 
leave  it  behind.  We  would  sa}^  that  experience 
of  his  life  was  his  enjoyment,  ambitions,  antici- 
pations, recollections,  associations,  thought  and 
mind,  seeing,  feeling,  eating,  drinking,  tasting, 
and  smelling,  with  all  the  beautiful  things  in 
Nature.  All  these  he  liad  use  of  as  long  as  his 
body  could  maintain  life  to  enjoy  them. 

This  body  is  a  receptacle  for  the  tinsion,  or 
vital  force.  This  is  what  the  nerves  act  on,  and 
vibrate,  and  record  experience  or  intelligence. 
The  nerves  are  matter  acting  on  vital  force 
within  the  body.  As  long  as  the  nerves  can  act 
on  this  force,  disturbing  it,  the  body  can  main- 
tain life ;  but  as  soon  as  the  nerves  cease  to  act  or 
vibrate  on  the  tension,  death  is  the  result.  The 
body  occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and  the  ten- 
sion of  space  is  through  that  body.  The  earth 
pulling  from  the  sun,  the  body  is  in  that  pull, 
and  offers  a  resistance  to  that  pull,  and  heat  is 
produced  in  it.  The  nerves  resist  and  vibrate 
the  tension  in  the  body,  and  produce  the  circu- 
lation of  the  fluids,  keeping  up  life.  As  long  as 
heat  and  a  free  circulation  can  be  maintained  in 
the  body,  life  can  be  prolonged.  The  free  circu- 
lation of  the  pull,  or  tension,  of  space  is  health 
and  happiness.  Anything  retarding  this  action 
causes  sickness  and  disease,  and  all  the  maladies 
that  the  body  is  heir  to. 


FllOM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  i  I 


A   LOOK   INTO    THE    ACTION   OF    COLD 
SPACE. 

WE  procure  an  iron  cylinder,  six  feet  long 
and  six  inches  in  diameter,  and  connect  a 
pipe  to  it.  We  get  two  iron  balls,  twelve  inches, 
say.  We  fit  these  into  the  ends  of  the  cylinder. 
They  must  be  air-tight.  We  connect  the  pipe  to 
a  freezing  machine,  and  make  this  cylinder,  say, 
five  hundred  degrees  below  zero,  and  the  iron 
balls  must  be  kept  hot.  The  cold  in  the  cylinder 
will  pull  the  two  heated  balls  into  the  ends,  hold- 
ing them  as  long  as  they  are  kept  heated.  This 
cold  space  is  pulling  the  heat  into  it,  and  in  so 
doing  pulls  the  tw^o  balls  and  holds  them.  The 
balls  are  being  heated,  and  the  cold  space  is  con- 
tinually absorbing  that  heat.  That  is  the  circu- 
lation of  heat  and  cold.  As  fast  as  the  heat  is 
applied  to  the  balls,  the  cold  space  pulls  it  out, 
and  this  action  keeps  up  the  pull,  or  circulation. 
This  is  similar  to  the  earth's  pull  from  the  sun, 
only  these  bodies  generate  their  own  heat  by 
their  own  pull.  Now  let  us  reverse  the  action  of 
this  cylinder,  and  see  the  result.  The  two  balls 
are  cold,  and  weap])ly  the  heat  through  the  pipe 
in  the  cylinder.     The  result  is,  it  expands  and 


78  FROM  Darkness  to  light. 

forces  the  balls  out ;  it  repels  them  with  great 
force.  The  earth  and  sun  are  like  the  two  balls, 
and  the  space  between  them  is  like  the  cylinder. 
It  is  the  cold  space,  pulling  the  heat  from  the 
two  bodies.  The  air  resists  this  pull,  and  be- 
comes heated  and  expands,  and  this  expands  the 
tension,  and  allows  it  to  stretch.  This  is  the 
breathing  motion  of  the  earth's  pull  from  the 
sun.  This  pull  acts  on  every  living  thing  on  the 
earth,  imparting  that  motion  to  it  of  breathing, 
or  circulation,  interchange  of  heat  and  cold, 
shrinking  and  expanding.  The  air  around  the 
earth  protects  it  from  the  cold  tension  by  resist- 
ing the  pull,  and  producing  heat,  and  holding  it, 
causing  the  air  motion,  or  air  circulation.  This 
equalizes  and  distributes  the  heat  generated  in 
the  air  space,  causing  a  uniform  heat  through  the 
lines  of  pull,  or  tension.  The  tension  is  the 
equalizing  force.  The  pressure  is  uniform  every- 
where ;  nothing  can  divide  it,  everything  can  act 
upon  it  and  utilize  it.  It  is  everything,  finer 
than  the  finest  thought  of  the  finest  brain  that 
ever  existed.  This  space  between  the  earth  and 
sun  is  continuall}^  being  acted  on  by  the  circula- 
tion of  the  heat  generated  by  the  two  bodies. 
This  heat  vibrates  the  air,  and  the  air  vibrates 
the  tension.  These  vibrations  are  continuous, 
passing  from  the  sun  to  the  earth,  and  from  the 
earth  to  the  sun.    This  is  their  circulation.    The 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  79 

same  as  the  circulation  in  our  bodies.  They  im- 
part this  motion  to  us.  We,  being  a  product  of 
them,  must  obey  their  laws  of  motion  in  order  to 
live. 

The  heat  expands  the  cold  tension,  and  the 
earth  moves  or  falls  away  from  the  sun.  This  is 
the  motion  that  keeps  up  the  heat  and  circula- 
tion between  the  two  bodies.  It  is  an  inter- 
change of  action,  or  motion,  on  their  bodies 
through  the  tension  of  space.  The  space  between 
the  two  bodies  is  a  vacuum  of  heat  of  a  million 
degrees.  This  cold  space  pulls  on  the  two  heated 
bodies,  trying  to  fill  its  space  with  this  heat ;  but 
the  two  bodies  will  not  part  with  their  heat. 
They  resist  this  pull,  and  the  cold  space  pulls  on 
their  mass.  The  earth  gives  way  to  this  pull, 
but  the  sun  will  not ;  but  its  atmosphere  ex- 
pands, or  stretches,  to  this  pull,  and  this  pro- 
duces the  great  light  in  it ;  for  its  atmosphere 
must  stretch  or  expand  from  this  pull,  it  having 
many  bodies  pulling  on  it.  They  are  pulling  in 
every  direction,  generating  heat  and  light  in  it. 
This  heat  is  utilized  in  expanding  the  cold  ten- 
sion, allowing  the  earth  to  fall  or  move  a  little 
from  the  sun.  This  is  the  sun  and  earth  breath- 
ing their  circulation,  interchange  of  heat  and 
cold.  If  the  sun  radiated  heat  into  all  space, 
without  having  any  means  of  renewing  the  sup- 
ply of  fuel,  it  would  soon  become  cold  and  dead, 


80  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

but  the  different  bodies  pulling  on  its  atmos- 
phere, stretch  it,  and  vibrate  its  tension,  the 
same  as  the  earth's  atmosphere.  The  earth  is  a 
product  of  the  sun,  and  whatever  aff"ects  one 
affects  the  other,  for  they  are  united  by  the  ten- 
sion of  space.  The  earth  pulling  from  the  sun 
generates  heat  in  its  mass.  The  sun  resists  the 
pull,  and  heat  is  general ed  in  its  atmosphere. 
All  the  other  bodies  pullin^>'  on  it  do  the  same. 
This  is  the  way  the  sun  supplies  its  heat  and 
light.  The  sun's  atmosphere  is  very  dense ;  for 
the  tension  within  it  is  in  a  great  strain  and  vi- 
bration from  the  bodies  pulling  on  it.  This  at- 
mosphere is,  perhaps,  thousands  of  miles  thick. 
This  is  all  luminous  atmosphere,  the  bodies  pull- 
ing on  the  sun  pulls  all  the  heat  and  light  out 
from  the  center,  for  the  pull  is  outward  around 
the  circumference.  This  brings  all  the  heat  and 
light  on  the  outer  part  -of  its  atmosphere,  mak- 
ing it  brilliant.  Each  of  the  bodies  pulling 
on  it  is  doing  work  to  maintain  itself,  and  at 
the  same  time  is  maintaining  the  sun,  gener- 
ating its  heat  and  light.  There  is  no  heat  or 
action  radiated  or  imparted  only  betw^een  the 
bodies  in  action.  These  bodies  are  assisting  each 
other.  There  is  nothing  consumed  or  -wasted. 
It  is  all  vibratory  action  through  their  atmos- 
phere on  the  tension  of  space.  The  pull  vibrates 
the  tension,  producing  heat,  and  the  heat  raises 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  81 

the  cold,  and  the  vibrations  are  continued.  This 
action  continually  disturbs  the  lines  of  tension, 
imparting  motion  and  life  to  these  bodies. 

This  space  between  these  bodies  is  as  solid  as 
if  they  were  united,  and  the  action  between  them 
is  instantaneous.  The  tension  absorbs  no  time 
in  transmitting  its  action  or  circulation,  except 
through  their  atmospheres.  This  is  the  only 
point  of  resistance,  and  the  heat  is  generated  at 
this  point,  not  radiated  from  the  sun  into  space. 
This  pull  between  the  bodies  pulls  all  the  heat 
from  their  centers  to  the  circumference.  This  is 
what  makes  the  great  light  and  heat  in  the  sun's 
atmosphere,  and  causes  the  heat  of  our  earth  to 
be  pulled  out  from  it,  to  do  work  by  expanding 
the  cold  tension,  giving  it  motion,  circulation, 
heat,  light  and  life. 


82  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


HOW   A   SEA-GULL   FLIES. 

LET  us  follow  a  sea-gull  in  its  flight,  or  mode  of 
flying  and  floatingin  the  air.  The  gull  occu- 
pies a  portion  of  space,  and  the  tension  is  in  that 
space — that  is  its  life  force.  This  gull  is  made  of  a 
nervous  matter,  bones,  sinews,  and  feathers.  The 
feathers  protect  it  from  the  cold  and  water,  com- 
pletely inclosing  its  body,  insulating  it  from  the 
outer  air,  thus  protecting  it  from  the  cold,  air, 
and  water.  Tliis  gull  must  procure  food  to  keep 
up  heat,  in  order  to  be  able  to  fly.  The  food  gen- 
erates heat  in  its  body.  This  heat  displaces  the 
cold,  and  allows  the  blood  to  circulate.  This  is 
a  circulation  of  heat  and  cold.  The  blood  re- 
sists this  circulation,  and  is  put  in  motion,  and 
expands  and  vibrates  the  nerves,  and  the  nerves 
resist,  generating  heat  and  vibrating  the  tension, 
and  the  tension  reacts  on  the  whole  structure  of 
the  bod}^,  putting  it  all  in  vibration.  The  ten- 
sion around  the  gull  is  constant!}^  pressing  into 
it,  trying  to  find  its  equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest, 
through  the  body  of  the  gull ,  but  the  bod}^  of 
the  gull — that  is,  all  its  nerves  and  tension — is  in 
vibration,  thus  breaking  the  lines  of  tension 
or  force  of  the  outside.     This  is  the  great  force 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  83 

that  it  acts  on.  All  its  little  nerves  are  acting  on 
a  force  of  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 
square  inch.  All  the  feathers  of  the  gull  are  con- 
nected to  its  body,  and  all  feeling  and  sensation 
are  conducted  through  them.  The  feathers  vi- 
brate on  the  air  and  tension.  The  body  absorbs 
these  vibrations,  keeping  up  its  heat  and  ac- 
tion. Every  feather  of  the  gull  is  constantly 
vibrating  from  the  action  of  the  air.  All  these 
vibrations  are  transmitted  to  the  nerves  of  the 
gull,  generating  heat  and  vibrating  the  tension, 
keeping  up  the  circulation  and  life  action  in  its 
body. 

The  gull  is  like  a  magnet.  The  feathers  are 
like  the  coils,  generating  the  heat  or  current,  to 
keep  up  the  circulation  ;  for  the  feathers  vibrate 
and  disturb  it,  producing  heat,  and  this  expands 
the  cold,  producing  a  pressure  in  its  body.  As 
long  as  this  can  be  maintained  with  a  free  circu- 
lation through  its  body,  so  long  can  life  and  mo- 
tion continue.  The  gull's  feathers  are  smooth 
and  soft,  offering  very  little  resistance  to  the  air, 
when  flying  or  floating  in  it.  The  air  is  as  dense 
under  as  over  the  gull.  It  floats  in  this  air  vi- 
brating its  wings,  so  fine  that  we  cannot  see 
them.  These  vibrations  are  acting  on  the  air  un- 
der and  over  its  body,  thus  cleaving  its  way 
through  it.  The  air  passing  under  its  wings 
raises  it,  and  it  throws  its  body  forward,  pressing 


84  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

against  the  wind,  its  wings  extended  and  curved, 
bracing  its  body  against  the  wind.  This  action 
excites  its  nerves,  and  they  vibrate  the  tension  of 
the  body,  generating  heat,  and  the  heat  generates 
power  or  force,  and  the  gull  keeps  its  flight.  The 
gull  is  floating  in  an  air  pressure  of  say  fifteen 
pounds  to  the  square  inch.  This  is  a  uniform 
pressure.  The  gull  has  this  to  act  on  or  float  in. 
The  gull  extends  its  wings,  and  braces  them  on 
this  pressure.  The  air  is  in  motion,  and  passes 
under  its  wings.  The  gull  elevates  its  wings  a 
little,  and  the  air  passes  under  them,  forcing  it 
upward,  without  any  exertion  of  the  gull ;  it, 
bracing  and  curving  its  wings,  can  move  and  float 
in  any  direction  on  the  air.  Thus,  we  find  that 
the  gull  can  generate  heat  and  power  when  in 
motion. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  85 


A    LOOK    INTO    THE    WATER— A    FISH, 
AND    ITS    ACTIONS    AND    LIFE. 

THE  fish  is  a  product  of  the  male  and  female, 
a  spawn,  a  starchy,  nervous  mass.  This 
spawn  occupies  a  portion  of  space  in  the  water. 
The  tension  of  space  is  in  the  water  and  spawn. 
These  little  eggs  exclude  the  water,  they  being 
like  fine  glass  beads,  inclosing  the  tension  within 
them.  Each  individual  egg  offers  a  resistance  to 
the  lines  of  tension,  vibrating  it,  producing  heat. 
The  heat  circulates  through  it,  displacing  the 
cold.  This  allows  the  eggs  to  grow  and  expand, 
filling  more  space,  acting  on  more  tension  or 
force. 

These  eggs  develop  into  little  fish  under  this 
influence  or  condition.  As  they  increase  in  size 
they  become  more  active,  feeding  on  other  small 
fish  and  insects  in  the  water,  generating  heat  to 
keep  out  the  cold  and  keep  up  the  circulation. 
This  fish  has  grown  from  the  spawn,  gradually 
pressing  itself  into  space,  forcing  its  way  into  the 
water,  and  maturing  and  growing  under  these 
conditions.  It  is  now  a  mass  of  nerves,  fibre, 
bone,  and  blood,  all  off'ering  a  resistance  to  the 
lines  of  tension,  thus  generating  heat  to  keep  up 


86  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

life.  The  circulation  of  the  fluids  in  the  fish  act 
on  and  disturb  the  lines  of  tension,  disturbing  the 
inner  from  the  outer,  generating  heat  and  vibra- 
ing  its  whole  body.  This  vibrating  body  is  act- 
ing against  the  constant  pressure  of  the  water  and 
the  tension  of  space.  The  fish  is  acting  on  this 
force  within  its  body.  Its  circulation  is  the  same 
as  the  magnet.  The  fluids  resist,  producing  heat 
and  life. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  87 


WHAT  IS   LIGHTNING,  AND   HOW   PRO- 
DUCED. 

IF  the  sun  holds  the  earth  in  space,  that  space 
is  under  strain  or  tension,  the  lines  of  pull  ex- 
tending from  the  sun  to  the  earth.  These  lines 
are  the  same  as  the  lines  or  pull  between  two 
magnets,  the  tension  of  space  being  constant  and 
unvarying.  It  is  hard  to  break  these  lines.  They 
sustain  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  per  square 
inch  of  surface  of  the  earth.  Now,  the  natural 
condition  of  space  being  cold,  there  can  be  no 
heat,  except  produced  by  the  sun.  Now,  heat  ex- 
pands, and  cold  contracts ;  therefore,  heat  repels, 
and  cold  attracts.  These  are  the  active  elements 
in  space,  constantly  battling  for  place  or  rest,  but 
cannot  find  it.  Now,  the  sun  being  a  magnet, 
and  the  earth  a  magnet,  they  are  constantly  pull- 
ing on  each  other.  This  is  the  tension  of  space. 
Tlie  air  offers  a  resistance  to  these  lines  of  pull, 
and  becomes  heated,  expands,  vibrates,  and  vi- 
brates the  tension,  and  the  tension  vibrates  the 
air,  and  motion  is  produced.  Now,  the  air  being 
put  in  motion,  is  constantly  crossing  the  lines  of 
tension  and  vibrating  it,  and  heat  is  generated. 
The  heated  air  rises  and  presses  up  against  the 


88  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

cold  strata  of  air,  and  there  is  a  pressure  between 
the  two  bodies.  The  cold  presses  down,  and  the 
warm  presses  up.  This  makes  the  air  very  dense, 
and  offers  a  greater  resistance  to  the  tension  lines, 
and  more  heat  is  produced  between  them.  This 
may  be  sufficient  to  form  a  steam,  and  there  is 
an  explosion,  thunder  and  lightning.  The  ex- 
plosion breaks  the  equilibrium  of  the  lines  of 
tension,  and  the  expansion,  or  explosion,  of  air 
produces  a  vacuum,  and  the  air  rushes  into  the 
vacuum,  and  produces  the  rumbling  thunders. 
There  are  many  ways  of  producing  thunder  and 
lightning.  Again,  a  large  body  of  hot  air  may 
be  moving  from  the  south,  and  a  cold  body  mov- 
ing from  the  north.  The  two  masses  meet  each 
other,  like  two  ships  under  full  headway.  They 
crash  into  each  other.  There  must  be  friction 
and  heat,  generated  by  the  concussion.  Now, 
this  heat  is  at  the  point  of  contact — that  is,  in 
the  center  of  the  two  bodies.  This  pressure  pro- 
duces steam,  or  heated  air,  sufficient  to  explode, 
and  the  same  phenomenon  is  produced. 

This  is  the  way  Nature  finds  her  equilibrium. 
The  hot  and  cold  air  coming  together  produce 
a  pressure.  The  cold  air  becomes  heated  and  ex- 
pands, and  vibrates  the  tension,  and  the  tension 
vibrates  the  air,  and  the  heat  and  cold  try  to  be- 
come equalized.  Their  molecules  rush  into  each 
other.      This   action   strains   the  tension.      The 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  89 

earth  pulling  from  the  sun,  and  the  two  bodies  of 
air  crossing  these  lines,  break  the  equilibrium  of 
the  tension,  and  the  heated  air  forms  a  steam, 
and  explodes.  This  breaks  the  lines  of  tension, 
and  lightning  is  produced.  The  two  bodies  of 
air  meeting  may  be  at  different  elevations,  but 
moving  in  opposite  directions; -one  crushes  up 
and  the  other  down.  These  bodies  may  be  many 
miles  in  diameter,  and  moving  at  perhaps  a  mile 
a  minute,  and  by  the  time  they  come  to  rest  they 
have  compressed  the  air  to,  say,  one  thousand 
pounds  to  the  cubic  foot.  This  heats  the  air  and 
causes  the  explosion,  producing  thunder  and 
lightning.  The  explosion  breaks  the  lines  of 
tension,  and  lightning  is  produced.  Every  mole- 
cule of  air  incloses  the  lines  of  tension,  and  the 
pressure  heats  them. 


90  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


THE  HUMAN  EYE,  ITS  USE  AND  ACTION. 

NOW,  knowing  the  tension  in  space,  eveiy- 
thing  living  on  the  earth  is  moving,  float- 
ing, and  existing  under  that  influence ;  that  is 
its  life.  That  tension  is  the  force  tliat  it  acts 
on.  It  is  the  great  force  of  Nature.  Now,  the 
human  body  being  filled  with  this  tension,  the 
nerves  act  on  it  the  same  as  a  wire  acts  as  a  con- 
ductor of  electricity.  Every  little  nerve  has  its 
work  to  perform.  Now,  these  nerves  could  not 
act,  or  do  any  work  on  themselves.  They  must 
have  something  to  work  on.  This  is  the  resist- 
ing force.  It  is  the  equalizer  and  distributor  of 
all  nerve  action.  The  nerves  are  incased  in  this 
tension,  under  its  influence,  and  must  obey  it. 
How  could  a  human  body  be  built  up  of  a  mass 
of  inert  matter,  having  nothing  to  give  it  life  or 
action  but  water  and  air?  Both  are  inert  and 
dormant  in  themselves.  It  is  the  tension  that 
gives  these  actions ;  they  are  its  subjects,  and 
must  obey  its  laws.  Can  we  realize,  or  under- 
stand, or  comprehend  the  great  pressure  that  we 
are  living  in,  and  that  pressure  is  our  life,  and 
the  life  of  everything  on  the  earth — more  than 
ten  thousand  tons  per  square  inch.     Yet  we  live 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  91 

in  an  air  pressure  of  fifteen  pounds  to  the  square 
inch,  and  do  not  comprehend  it.  The  eye  is  a 
ball  of  nerves,  and  little  mirrors  or  lenses.  They 
are  floating  in  the  tension,  and  these  little  nerves 
are  vibrating  on  that  tension,  and  communicate 
with  the  brain.  When  we  look  at  some  person, 
and  our  eyes  meet,  there  is  a  circuit  formed.  Our 
eyes  are  the  same  as  the  poles  of  a  magnet.  The 
space  between  us  is  filled  with  the  tension,  and 
our  eyes  are  acting  and  vibrating  on  it,  forming 
the  circuit. 

The  sensation  felt  sometimes  by  a  look  or  stare 
is  very  trying  on  the  nerves.  If  there  was  noth- 
ing between  us  as  a  conductor,  how  could  we  feel 
any  sensation?  Air  alone  could  not  conduct; 
for  it  is  always  in  motion  in  open  space.  The 
tension  never  varies.  It  is  constant  and  reliable. 
A  thought  is  capable  of  acting  on  it;  for  a 
thought  is  an  action  of  the  nerves  of  the  brain  on 
the  tension  within  it.  Now,  this  action  of  the 
brain  has  acted  on  the  tension,  and  disturbed  its 
equilibrium,  the  same  as  if  we  drop  a  pebble  in 
a  lake — the  ripples,  or  waves,  must  move  over  the 
whole  surface  of  the  lake  to  find  its  equilibrium 
at  the  shore.  When  we  read,  the  space  between 
us  and  the  object  is  filled  with  tension,  and  the 
eyes  are  acting  and  vibrating  on  it.  Each  little 
nerve  is  doing  its  work,  the  same  as  the  Atlantic 
cable.     The  cable  may  have  many  wires  within 


92  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

it,  and  each  wire  carries  its  message  to  the  other 
shore.  Now,  the  eyes  are  the  conductors  of  all 
sensation  to  the  brain,  by  millions  of  little  nerves, 
rolled  up  in  a  ball.  These  nerves  are  very  deli- 
cate and  sensitive,  finer  than  a  spider's  web. 
How  could  these  delicate  fibres  act  on  them- 
selves ?  They  must  have  something  more  sensi- 
tive, more  elastic,  something  more  durable,  some- 
thing that  cannot  wear  out,  and  something  that 
will  not  produce  friction.  These  are  the  ele- 
ments of  the  tension  to  things  that  are  in  har- 
mony with  it.  When  we  think,  all  the  nerves  of 
the  body  are  concentrated  in  the  brain.  These 
nerves  are  acting  on  the  tension  within  it,  and 
this  action  continued  brings  all  the  nerves  of  the 
brain  into  action  or  thought.  How  could  the 
brain  think  without  some  force  to  act  on  ? 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  93 


WHAT   IS   POLARITY— THE  CAUSE  AND 
EFFECT  ? 

THE  earth  pulling  from  the  sun  produces  heat 
in  the  air  space  of  the  earth.  The  cold  ten- 
sion that  holds  the  earth  to  the  sun  is  the  con- 
ducting medium  of  all  vibratory  action  and 
heat.  Anything  in  these  lines  offers  a  resistance 
to  them,  and  become  polarized.  The  earth  is  one 
pole,  and  the  sun  the  other.  The  lines  pass 
down  through  the  earth.  If  we  put  a  piece  of 
iron  or  steel  in  these  lines,  standing  it  up- 
right on  the  earth,  and  let  the  sun's  rays  pass 
throagh  it,  it  will  become  polarized.  The 
sun's  rays  are  the  tension  lines.  The  metal  of- 
fers a  resistance  to  these  lines,  and  they  become 
heated.  This  causes  the  tension  to  circulate 
through  the  metal.  The  sun  pulls  the  heat  up, 
and  the  earth  supplies  the  cold  to  fill  the  vacuum. 
This  is  the  circuit  lines  of  the  tension  acting 
through  the  metal.  As  fast  as  the  heat  is  pulled 
up  through  the  metal,  the  cold  is  drawn  in  at  the 
end  on  the  earth.  If  there  were  no  heat  pro- 
duced in  the  metal,  there  could  be  no  circulation 
or  action  ;  and  if  there  were  no  tension  in  the 
njetal,  there  could  be  no  circulation.     The  metal 


94  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

cannot  act  on  itself,  nor  can  the  tension.  They 
are  both  inert  and  dead  ;  but,  when  in  union  and 
vibrated,  tliey  resist  each  other  and  produce  heat. 
The  metal  holds  the  tension  at  rest.  It  is  the 
reservoir  of  universal  force  on  tap,  ready  to  be 
acted  on ;  and  when  w^e  can  vibrate  them  rap- 
idly enough,  we  can  have  light  and  power. 

Now,  if  we  change  the  poles  of  the  metal,  put- 
ting the  end  that  was  toward  the  sun  to  the  earth, 
it  would  repel  the  earth,  because  it  is  in  the  sun's 
pole.  The  sun  has  pulled  the  heat  through  it, 
and  the  sun  cannot  act  on  the  earth's  pole. 
Now,  the  earth  cannot  act  on  the  sun's  pole ;  for 
they  are  in  opposition  and  not  in  circuit.  Now, 
if  we  bend  the  metal  in  the  form  of  a  horseshoe, 
we  will  have  a  magnet  polarized.  The  sun's 
lines  have  pulled  through  it,  producing  the  cir- 
cuit. If  we  place  a  piece  of  iron  aoross  the  poles, 
this  forms  a  circuit  of  the  magnet,  and  if  we 
make  and  break  this  circuit,  we  are  acting  on  the 
tension  or  pull  of  the  earth  and  sun  through  the 
magnet.  The  benuing  of  the  metal  into  a  horse- 
shoe shape  brings  the  earth's  poles  and  the  sun's 
poles  together,  so  that  they  can  be  utilized  or 
acted  on. 

Now,  the  earth's  pole  is  the  inlet  for  the  cold 
tension  of  space,  and  the  sun's  pole  is  the  outlet 
for  the  heat  generated  in  the  magnet.  This  is 
the  circuit  through  the  magnet  of  heat  and  cold. 


'7BIVBIISITT] 

FROM    DARKlTiinTJ   TCTlSlGHT.  95 

The  magnet  is  cold  in  nature,  inert  and  dead. 
When  we  act  on  it,  we  produce  heat.  This  heat 
must  have  an  outlet.  The  cold  tension  of  space 
pulls  this  heat  up  as  fast  as  generated.  This  is 
the  great  tension  pull  of  space. 

The  magnet  is  the  medium  for  the  circulation 
of  heat  and  cold  applied  to  it.  The  tension  is 
the  conducting  medium  for  transmitting  or  ab- 
sorbing the  heat.  The  action  on  the  magnet  vi- 
brates it,  and  makes  heat  in  it,  and  the  vibra- 
tions act  on  the  tension,  and  cause  the  circula- 
tion or  flow,  and  the  circuit  is  produced.  The 
tension  on  the  outside  presses  around  the  magnet 
and  into  the  poles.  The  tension  inside,  being  in 
vibration,  gives  away  to  the  pressure  of  the  ten- 
sion outside,  and  the  circulation  takes  place 
through  the  poles  of  the  magnet. 

Now;,  the  magnet  must  be  able  to  transmit  the 
vibrations,  or  heat,  as  fast  as  produced ;  for  every 
vibration  is  a  quantit}''  of  heat.  The  atoms  of 
the  magnet  resist  the  vibrations,  and  become 
heated.  This  heat  must  be  absorbed  as  fast  as 
generated,  in  order  to  keep  up  a  free  circulation. 
The  heat  expands  the  atoms  of  the  magnet  and 
clogs  the  circulation.  If  the  magnet  is  kept  cold, 
its  atoms  are  then  shrunk  and  in  harmony  with 
the  tension,  and  leaves  a  free  action.  The  mag- 
net, and  its  actions,  are  only  an  interchange  of 
heat  and  cold.     The  cold  is  the  great  weight,  or 


96  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

pressure,  that  the  heat  has  to  overcome  or  dis- 
place. When  we  produce  heat,  we  expand  the 
cold  tension,  and  put  it  in  vibration,  and  these 
vibrations  are  instantly  transmitted  to  the  cold 
space  between  the  earth  and  sun,  this  being  the 
receptacle  for  all  heat  generated  between  the  two 
bodies.  The  air  resists  the  passage  of  this  heat 
through  the  tension,  and  it  becomes  heated  and 
expands,  and  is  put  in  motion  and  vibrated,  and 
vibrates  the  tension,  and  this  interchange  of  ac- 
tion keeps  up  the  heat  in  the  air. 

To  illustrate  the  action  of  the  magnet,  we  will 
take  a  piece  of  bar  iron,  any  suitable  size  for  a 
magnet,. and  drill  several  holes  through  its  cen- 
ter, making  it  tubular.  We  then  bend  it  into 
the  magnet  form,  and  wind  it  as  a  resistance  coil. 
Now,  if  we  can  lay  it  flat  in  the  bottom  of  a  bar- 
rel, carrying  the  conductors  to  the  top  of  the  bar- 
rel, and  then  fill  the  barrel  with  water,  and  ap- 
ply the  current  to  the  magnet  until  it  becomes 
heated,  the  result  will  be  the  water  will  circu- 
late through  it.  The  cold  will  enter  at  one  pole., 
and  the  hot  discharge  at  the  other,  thus  forming 
a  circuit.  The  current  heats  the  magnet,  and  the 
magnet  heats  the  water.  This  vibrates  the  water 
and  gives  it  motion.  The  cold  water  constantly 
presses  all  around  the  magnet,  trying  to  find  an 
entrance  or  an  opening.  The  water  in  the  mag- 
net becomes  heated  and  expands,  and  is  forced 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO      LIGHT.  97 

out  through  one  pole,  and  the  cold  presses  in  at 
the  other  pole. 

The  cold  displaces  the  heat,  and  the  heat  dis- 
places the  cold,  and  so  the  circulation  is  con- 
tinued. The  cold  water  absorbs  the  heat;  it 
pulls  it  up  through  the  lines  of  tension.  The 
water,  resisting,  becomes  heated.  We  must  have 
heat  and  cold  to  produce  motion.  The  cold  ab- 
sorbs the  heat,  and  the  heat  displaces  the  cold. 
They  are  seeking  an  equilibrium  or  a  point  of 
rest.  The  pressure  of  cold  water  around  the 
magnet  is  the  same  as  the  cold  around  a  com- 
mon magnet.  Once  there  is  heat  enough  pro- 
duced to  form  a  circulation,  the  cold  presses  into 
the  pole  and  out  of  the  other  one.  Once  the  ten- 
sion in  the  magnet  is  vibrated,  it  gives  way  to 
the  tension  around  it,  and  the  circuit  is  con- 
tinued. 


yS  FROM   DAKKNESS   TO   UGHT. 


HOW    CAN    AVE    BREAK    THE    TENSION 

LINES    OF    SPACE    AND    KEEP 

THEM     OPEN? 

WHEN  we  can  do  this,  then  we  have  tapped 
the  fountain  of  life  and  force.  This  holds 
the  earth  in  space.  Now,  the  earth  being  sus- 
pended from  the  sun,  the  space  between  them 
must  be  in  great  strain.  If  this  space  was  filled 
with  a  solid  rod  of  steel,  it  could  not  sustain  the 
great  pull  or  weight.  What  bar  of  steel  could 
sustain  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch? 
Yet  the  tension,  or  pull,  does  it,  and  we  do  not 
comprehend  it.  The  tension  being  elastic,  like  a 
rubber  band,  can  shrink,  and  expand,  and 
stretch,  but  cannot  be  broken,  yet  may  be  acted 
upon  and  vibrated.  The  most  delicate  vibra- 
tion acts  on  it,  producing  waves  like  the  waves 
of  the  ocean,  only  they  travel  faster,  there  being 
no  resistance  offered  to  them.  When  we  can  pro- 
duce vibrations  rapidly  enough  to  pass  through  a 
conductor  so  that  the  waves  of  the  vibration  will 
roll  over  each  other  and  prevent  the  tension  rest- 
ing— that  is,  keep  the  space  around  the  con- 
ductor in  motion  or  vibration — this  would  dis- 
turb the  lines  sufficiently  to  break  their  equilib- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  99 

rium  and  thus  produce  luminosity — light,  the 
same  as  daylight  or  sunlight.  These  vibrations 
must  be  very  fine  and  rapid  to  act  on  the  ten- 
sion— say,  fifty  million  magnetic  vibrations  per 
second.  These  vibrations  must  be  produced  in- 
stantaneously, and  must  be  continuous,  no  vari- 
ation or  cessation.  It  must  be  constant.  There 
is  no  rotary  motion  at  the  present  day  that  can 
accomplish  this.  We  must  look  for  some  other 
motion  to  do  it;  yet  Nature  is  doing  this  continu- 
ally, without  fuel,  steam  or  engines.  Why  can 
not  man  do  the  same,  he  being  an  instrument  of 
Nature,  and  Nature  working  through  him  ?  But 
men  do  not  live  in  harmony  with  Nature's  laws. 
If  they  did,  they  would  understand  them  better. 
Man's  laws  and  Nature's  laws  do  not  harmonize. 
There  are  no  secrets  in  Nature's  laws;  everything 
is  open  for  investigation.  If  we  are  ignorant  of 
these  laws,  it  is  not  Nature's  fault. 


100  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


WHAT   IS   THE  TENSION  OR  PULL? 

LET  us  suspend  a  rubber  ball  by  a  rubber 
band.  Say  the  ball  weighs  ten  pounds. 
This  will  represent  the  earth  suspended  from  the 
sun.  The  band  would  be  about  the  one-hun- 
dredth of  a  square  inch  in  diameter.  Raise  the 
ball,  and  attach  the  band  to  the  ceiling.  It  will 
stretch  the  band  to  its  utmost,  almost  breaking 
it.  The  band  is  now  in  the  tension,  pull  or 
strain.  If  we  touch  it,  or  force  the  air  across  its 
lines,  it  will  vibrate,  and  the  vibrations  will  cause 
the  ball  to  rise  and  fall  a  little.  The  longer  the 
band  the  more  sensitive  it  is.  Now,  if  this  band 
was  ninety-three  millions  of  miles  long,  how 
easy  it  would  be  to  vibrate  its  lines;  how  sensi- 
tive it  would  be!  It  would  be  impossible  to  keep 
it  still. 

When  we  touch  this  band,  we  act  on  a  force 
of  ten  pounds.  But  suppose  this  bund  sustained 
one  hundred  tons,  as  it  does  in  space;  then  it 
would  be  acting  on  a  great  force  or  pull.  If  we 
apply  a  piece  of  ice  to  the  center  of  the  band,  it 
will  shrink  a  little.  This  will  cause  the  ball  to 
rise  a  little.  Remove  the  ice,  and  the  ball  will 
foil   again.     This  motion  produces   heat  in  the 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  101 

band,  and  it  acts  on  the  air,  vibrating  it.  The 
air,  offering  a  resistance  to  the  shrinking  and  ex- 
panding, becomes  heated. 

The  ball,  rising  and  falling,  produces  heat  in 
the  band,  and  the  heat  rises  and  vibrates  the  air, 
and  the  air  vibrates  the  band.  This  produces  a 
kind  of  pulsation,  or  breathing  motion.  Now, 
imagine  all  space  between  the  earth  and  sun  filled 
with  these  lines  or  bands — invisible  lines.  This 
is  the  great  tension  of  space.  The  space  between 
the  earth  and  sun  is  filled  with  cold.  The  air 
around  the  earth  resists  or  insulates  it,  and  pro- 
tects it,  by  retaining  the  heat  imparted  to  it  by 
the  sun's  pull. 

The  earth  pulling  from  the  sun,  the  air  offers 
a  resistance  to  this  pull,  and  it  becomes  heated 
and  expands,  and  expands  the  lines  of  pull. 
This  allows  the  earth  to  drop  or  fall  a  little,  and 
the  cold  space  pulls  up  the  heat  generated  by  the 
fall ;  and,  in  pulling  the  heat,  it  pulls  the  earth. 
The  heat  in  rising  vibrates  the  lines  of  pull  or 
tension.  These  vibrations  heat  the  air,  and  the 
air  heats  the  tension,  and  the  earth  falls  again. 
This  is  a  shrinking  and  expanding  motion.  The 
cold  shrinks,  and  the  heat  expands.  As  soon  as 
the  cold  has  pulled  up  the  heat,  the  heated  space 
is  filled  with  cold.  This  pulling  and  falling, 
shrinking  and  expanding,  keep  the  air  heated, 
and   put  it  in  motion,  and  vibrate  the  tension, 


102  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

and  the  tension  vibrates  the  air,  and  this  keeps 
up  action,  motion,  heat  and  life.  This  motion  is 
imparted  to  every  thing  on  the  earth ;  for  its 
lines  pass  through  them,  and  they  resist,  and 
heat  is  generated,  producing  the  circulation  or 
breathing  motion.  This  is  the  circuit  of  the  sun 
and  earth,  their  life  action,  and  circulation  of 
heat  and  cold,  all  vibratory  action  on  the  cold 
tension  of  space. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  103 


A    PLANT'S    GROWTH. 

WHAT  is  the  cause'of  a"plant's growth?  Wa- 
ter, earth,  heat,  air,  and  tension.  We  plant 
a  seed  in  the  earth.  It  contains  water,  vegetable 
matter,  and  tension.  The  moisture  of  the  earth 
expands  the  seed.  The  sun  acts  on  the  tension 
and  vibrates  it,  and  the  seed  offers  a  slight  re- 
sistance, and  heat  is  generated  in  it.  Now,  the 
lines  of  tension  from  the  sun,  passing  into  the 
earth,  pass  through  the  seed,  and  keep  it  in  con- 
stant strain  and  vibration.  These  vibrations 
are  pulling  on  the  tension.  The  earth  pulls 
from  the  sun.  The  earth  pulls  the  roots  into  it, 
and  the  sun  pulls  the  bud  or  leaves  towards  it. 
The  pull  being  equal,  the  plant  grows  toward  the 
sun  and  the  roots  grow  into  the  earth.  Now,  the 
the  branches  and  leaves  grow  up  on  the  tension 
lines.  These  are  the  guiding  lines  toward  the 
sun.  The  roots  follow  the  tension  into  the  earth, 
to  seek  for  food. 

Now,  the  earth  feeds  the  roots,  and  the  sun  and 
air  feed  the  branches  and  leaves,  by  evapora- 
tion. One  assists  the  other,  and  harmony  pre- 
vails. The  different  gases  are  deposited  in  the 
fibres  or  tissues,  as  they  are  pulled  upward,  build- 


104  FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT. 

ing  up  its  trunk  and  branches,  and  passing  out 
into  the  leaves,  there  to  be  evaporated.  The 
tension  lines  pass  from  the  sun  into  the  earth^ 
These  linos  pass  througli  everything,  regardless 
of  material.  Anything  offering  a  resistance  to 
these  lines  produces  heat  or  vibration  in  it.  The 
finest  leaf  offers  a  resistance  ;  therefore,  heat  and 
vibrations  are  produced  in  it.  This  is  the  life 
action.  These  delicate  vibrations  act  on  the 
fibre  of  the  leaf,  passing  through  the  branches 
and  down  into  the  trunk,  into  the  earth  and  roots. 
This  is  a  continuous  pulsation  and  circulation, 
keeping  up  the  flow  of  sap.  All  the  sap  in  the 
plant  or  tree  is  in  vibration.  It  becomes  heated, 
expands,  and  forms  a  pressure  internally  and 
externally,  and  gradually  expands  the  branches 
and  leaves,  keeping  up  the  growth  or  life  action. 
All  the  little  cells  and  fibres  of  the  plant  contain 
sap,  or  water.  This  is  in  a  vapor  form.  It 
presses  outward,  and  expands  the  branches  and 
leaves.  This  vibrates  the  tension,  and  the  ten- 
sion vibrates  the  sap.  This  keeps  the  whole 
plant  or  tree  in  vibratory  strain.  The  same 
action  is  down  through  the  roots.  The  sap  is 
pulled  up  by  the  vibratory  strain,  or  tension. 
The  heat  generated  by  the  resistance  of  the 
nerves  or  fibres  of  the  plant  keeps  up  the 
flow  of  sap,  and  life  goes  on  smoothly,  and  har- 
mony prevails. 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  105 

The  lines  of  tension  are  through  the  tree  to 
the  pressure  of  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to 
the  square  inch.  Its  circulation  is  vibrating  on 
this  force.  The  inside  of  the  tree  is  all  in  vibra- 
tion, and  the  tension  outside  is  constantly  pressing 
around  the  tree,  trying  to  disturb  the  lines  on 
the  inside,  causing  an  external  pressure.  This 
keeps  the  trees  in  great  strain,  or  under  pressure 
forcing  the  sap  upwards,  expanding  its  branches 
and  leaves.  Thus  we  find  a  pressure  inside  and 
outside,  and  the  sun  pulling  on  the  branches, 
and  the  earth  pulling  the  roots,  extending  them 
in  all  directions,  to  seek  light  and  food,  to  main- 
tain life. 

The  trunk  and  branches  of  the  trees  are  held 
in  form  by  the  pressure  inside  and  outside.  The 
inside  is  heated  and  in  vibration,  expanding  the 
sap  and  fibre,  producing  a  pressure.  This  would 
burst  the  tree,  if  it  had  nothing  to  resist  this 
pressure ;  but  the  tension  and  air  is  resisting  this 
internal  pressure,  keeping  the  trunk  and  branches 
in  form,  making  them  tough  and  solid.  The 
leaves  grow^  out  on  the  branches  on  the  lines  of 
tension.  These  are  the  guiding  lines  tow^ard  the 
sun.  The  different-colored  leaves  are  caused  by 
the  different  ranges  of  vibrations.  These  colored 
leaves  are  like  a  shadow  in.  this  tension.  The 
leaves  offer  a  resistance  to  the  lines  of  tension. 
This  resistance  produces  a  certain  quantity  of 


106  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

vibrations,  and  this  produces  the  various  colors. 
The  leaves  hold  the  tension  in  them.  They  can- 
not get  out  of  this  tension ;  for  it  is  solid  every- 
where, and  the  leaves  are  an  impression  in  it, 
and  it  reflects  the  colors  through  them.  These 
leaves  have  a  circulation  through  them  like  our 
body.  They  have  thousands  of  little  veins  dis- 
tributed all  through  them.  This  circulation  is 
heat  and  cold.  The  heat  vibrates  the  tension  in 
the  leaf,  and  the  fibre  resists  these  vibrations, 
and  heat  is  generated.  This  expands  the  sap, 
and  causes  circulation,  and  the  tension  and  air 
around  the  leaves  are  pressing  against  the  heat. 
They  are  seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  a  point  of 
rest ;  but  the  heat  will  not  let  them  rest.  This  is 
what  keeps  up  the  heat  and  circulation,  and  the 
battle  goes  on,  and  life  is  continued. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  107 


ACTION  BETWEEN  THE  EARTH  AND  SUN 

HOW  could  there  be  any  action  between  the 
earth  and  the  sun  if  there  was  no  conductor? 
All  space  being  cold,  how  could  heat  pass  through 
it — ninety-three  million  miles  of  intense  cold — 
before  it  reached  the  earth  ?  Heat  could  not 
pass  through  the  cold  and  produce  heat  in  open 
space.  It  is  at  least  a  million  of  degrees  below 
zero,  between  the  earth  and  the  sun.  This  cold 
shrinks  and  pulls  the  heat  into  it,  for  cold  ab- 
sorbs heat.  Now  this  cold  space  would  be  con- 
tinually absorbing,  or  pulling,  the  heat  from  the 
earth  and  sun.  This  action  would  keep  up  the 
tension  between  the  two  bodies.  The  earth  pull- 
ing from  the  sun  would  produce  heat  at  either 
pole.  The  air  space  of  the  earth  offers  a  resist- 
ance to  the  lines  of  pull  or  tension,  and  becomes 
heated,  and  expands,  and  vibrates.  This  action 
allows  the  tension  to  expand,  or  stretch.  This 
produces  heat,  which  is  absorbed  by  the  cold 
space.  All  this  action  is  doing  good  work.  There 
is  nothing  wasted.  The  air  vibrates  the  tension 
as  the  heat  rises,  and  all  the  space  to  the  sun  is 
acted  on  and  vibrated.  The  more  the  cold 
shrinks  and  pulls  the  greater  the  heat  and  work 


108  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

done.  The  greater  the  cold,  the  greater  the  pull. 
These  actions  are  continuous. 

If  there  were  no  space  for  heat  there  could  be 
no  action  or  motion.  Now,  heat  being  a  pro- 
duct, it  acts  on  the  tension  of  the  air  space,  and 
sets  the  air  in  vibration,  and  it  vibrates  the  ten- 
sion, and  transmits  these  vibrations  back  to  the 
sun:  The  heat  being  absorbed  in  the  cold  space, 
the  heat  does  vibrator}^  w^ork  to  the  point  of  ab- 
sorption, or  till  it  is  lost  in  cold  space. 

The  sun  and  earth  pulling  from  each  other 
produce  the  heat  in  the  atmosphere.  It  expands, 
and  the  earth  drops  or  falls  a  little  from  the  sun. 
This  acts  on  the  tension  or  lines  of  pull,  and  the 
cold  space  pulls  the  earth  back  again.  This 
action  is  like  the  piston  in  an  engine  cylinder. 
It  is  like  our  breathing.  It  is  the  breathing  of 
the  earth  and  sun ;  for  the  same  effect  is  pro- 
duced in  the  sun's  atmosphere.  When  the  earth 
falls,  it  pulls  on  the  air  space  of  the  sun  and  ex- 
pands it,  and  produces  heat  and  friction.  The 
sun  having  so  many  bodies  pulling  on  it,  extends 
its  atmosphere,  and  makes  it  very  dense.  All 
the  heat  in  the  sun's  atmosphere  produced  by  the 
earth's  pulling  does  vibrating  work,  through  the 
tension  to  the  earth,  and  is  then  absorbed  or 
pulled  into  the  cold  space.  This  cold  space  is  a 
receptacle  for  all  heat  generated  by  the  two 
bodies. 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  109 

The  cold  space  is  the  great  pulling  force.  It 
will  not  let  the  two  bodies  separate  ;  for  they  are 
heat-producing,  and  it  is  heat-absorbing.  As 
fast  as  the  heat  is  generated,  it  pulls  it ;  and  in 
pulling  it  pulls  the  two  bodies  together,  and  holds 
them  at  proper  distance.  This  distance  is  de- 
pending on  the  amount  of  heat  they  generate 
and  the  amount  of  heat  the  cold  space  can  ab- 
sorb, or  take  up.  It  has  been  many  times  asked 
what  becomes  of  all  the  heat  given  out  by  the 
sun  and  earth.  They  do  not  radiate  heat.  It  is 
absorbed  between  the  bodies  pulling  from  each 
other.  There  is  no  action  only  on  the  lines  of 
pull,  and  that  is  within  the  lines  of  the  atmos- 
pheres. All  other  space  is  inert  and  dead.  The 
interchange  of  heat  and  cold  are  the  active  princi- 
ples of  all  life  and  action. 

The  sun  and  earth  breathing  produce  heat, 
and  all  animal  life  does  the  same.  The  breath- 
ing is  a  vibratory  action  on  the  tension  of  the 
nervous  system.  The  nerves  are  vibrated,  and 
vibrate  the  tension,  and  the  nerves  resist,  and 
they  produce  heat,  and  the  heat  displaces  the 
cold,  and  the  cold  absorbs  the  heat,  and  this 
keeps  the  circulation,  or  pulsation,  in  action. 
Thus  we  find  all  action  or  motion  is  the  result  of 
shrinking  and  expanding.  This  is  the  secret  of 
electricity — magnetism.  It  is  the  molecular  mo- 
tion.    The  heated  molecules  repel  the  cold  mole- 


110  FROM   DARKNESS    TO   LIGHT. 

cules,  and  the  cold  molecules  attract  and  absorb 
the  heat,  and  this  expands  the  cold  molecules 
and  this  produces  motion,  action,  and  life. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  Ill 


EFFECT  OF  THE   AIR  ON  THE   EARTH. 

NOW,  if  there  was  no  air  around  the  earth, 
there  could  be  no  heat,  light,  or  life.  The  air 
molecules  are  continually  in  motion,  and  pro- 
duce heat  and  hold  it.  This  heat  has  to  fight  the 
cold.  The  cold  devours  the  heat,  it  being  more 
powerful;  for  all  space  is  filled  with  it.  This  cold 
must  be  a  great  pressure.  If  we  freeze  a  block  of 
ice,  and  reduce  the  temperature  around  it,  say  a 
thousand  degrees  below  zero,  the  ice  would  dis- 
appear in  vapor.  It  would  be  crushed  as  if  a 
hundred-ton  trip-hammer  had  fallen  on  it.  That 
is  the  great  pull  or  tension  pressing  around  the 
earth.  It  would  crush  it  like  the  ice,  only  for  the 
air  shielding  it.  The  air  is  elastic  and  retains 
the  heat ;  so  it  is  a  ball  of  heat  rolling  in  a  space 
of  cold.  The  cold  lines  pass  down  through  the 
earth,  the  air  being  the  insulator.  This  pres- 
sure holds  it  together,  like  a  ball  suspended  in 
water  ;  the  pressure  is  all  around  it.  How  could 
the  earth  revolve  in  space  without  something  to 
hold  it  together  ?  This  cold  pressure,  or  tension, 
offers  no  resistance  to  the  motion  of  the  earth — 
it  not  being  a  substance — only  a  shrinkage  or 
pull.     This  pressure  presses   everything  to  the 


112  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

earth.  This  is  what  we  call  gravity  or  attraction. 
If  we  take  a  piece  of  metal  and  throw  it  upward, 
the  pressure  resists  it,  and  it  is  pressed  back  to 
the  earth,  the  point  of  rest.  Was  it  the  earth 
that  attracted  the  metal,  or  the  pressure  against 
it  ?  If  the  air  was  all  heated,  it  would  not  press 
against  the  earth ;  it  would  ascend.  But  as  the 
heated  air  ascends,  the  heat  is  absorbed  by  the 
cold  space,  and  then  pressed  back  to  the  earth. 
This  is  the  heating  and  cooling  process  of  pro- 
ducing air  motion.  The  heated  air  in  ascend- 
ing carries  the  moisture  from  the  earth,  and  it  is 
condensed  against  the  cold  air  and  pressed  back 
to  the  earth,  to  be  repeated. 

The  space  we  are  living  and  moving  in,  if 
there  was  no  air  in  it,  would  be  very  cold — say, 
one  thousand  degrees  below  zero.  This  great 
cold  would  shrink  and  shrivel  all  animal  and 
vegetable  life.  Imagine  ourselves  in  this  cold  for 
a  few  moments  without  air.  The  flesh  would 
shrink,  and  become  dry,  and  flat,  like  a  sheet  of 
paper.  The  blood  would  crumble  into  powder. 
The  sinews  would  harden  like  glass,  and  the 
bones  would  crumble  into  dust,  and  all  the 
moisture  of  the  body  would  look  like  fine  snow. 
All  the  nerves  would  be  dried  up  like  threads. 

This  is  the  great  enemy  that  we  have  to  fight 
every  day  we  live.  It  is  the  great  tension  that  fills 
all  space,  and  our  bodies  are  floating  in  it.     Now, 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  113 

the  air  can  circulate  and  move  through  this  ten- 
sion and  become  heated,  and  expand,  and  vi- 
brate. This  acts  on  the  nerves,  and  sets  them  in 
motion,  and  they  on  the  fluids  of  the  body,  and 
this  produces  heat.  The  heat  acts  on  the  ten- 
sion and  vibrates  it,  and  the  tension  on  the 
nerves,  and  the  nerves  on  the  heart,  and  the 
heart  on  the  blood,  and  the  blood  on  the  lungs, 
and  vice  versa.  This  is  all — vibratory  action  of 
heat  and  cold  shrinks  and  expands.  The  heat  is 
in  motion,  rushing  around  through  the  circula- 
tion, trying  to  displace  the  cold,  and  the  cold  is 
pulling  the  heat  out  through  every  pore  of  the 
body.  Now,  the  heat  has  to  be  active  to  keep 
the  cold  out,  for  if  it  got  in,  it  would  be  death. 
Heat  is  life  and  cold  is  death,  so  it  is  a  battle  for 
life  and  death.  We  inhale  cold  air,  it  meets  the 
blood  in  the  cells  of  the  lungs,  and  causes  them 
to  shrink  and  expand.  This  action  is  like  a  bel- 
lows ;  it  is  vibratory,  and  keeps  up  circulation. 
This  heat  is  trying  to  keep  out  the  cold.  These 
two  actions  act  on  the  tension  and  keep  it  in  vi- 
bration, and  the  vibrations  act  on  the  nerves, 
and  keep  up  heat  and  life.  While  all  this  bat- 
tling is  going  on  in  our  bodies,  the  air  around  us 
is  in  motion.  This  is  heating  the  space  around 
us,  protecting  us  from  the  cold. 

The  molecules   of  air   rub  and  grind  against 
each  other,  and  their  friction  produces  heat  and 


114  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

motion.     The  heated  molecules  are  attracted  by 
the  cold  and  shrink.     This  action  is  constantly 
going  on  around  and  in  our  bodies.     The  air 
molecules  become  heated  and  expand,  and  are  set 
in  motion.     The  cold  catches  these  molecules  and 
sli rinks  them ;  this  causes  each  one  to  vibrate, 
and  it  vibrates  the  tension.     This  puts  them  in 
motion,  and  motion  is  life.    If  we  observe,  a  very 
cold  night,  skating   on   a   pond,  or  lake,  if  we 
strike  the  ice  with  a  stick,  the  sound  will  travel 
to  the  extremity  of  the  pond  or  lake.     It  is  then 
in  tension,  being  shrunk  and  pressed  from  the- 
cold  pressing  through  and  around  it. 

Again,  if  we  notice,  an  ice  boat  can  travel 
faster  than  the  wind.  The  ice  offers  no  resist- 
ance to  motion.  The  boat  gains  momentum,  and 
goes  before  the  wind;  but  if  the  ice  is  thawing,  it 
offers  a  great  resistance,  and  will  produce  no  sound. 

Again,  of  a  cold,  clear  night,  a  steam  whistle 
can  be  heard  for  ten  or  more  miles.  The  air  is- 
in  tension ;  the  moisture  is  squeezed  or  pressed 
out,  and  it  is  dry.  Sound  travels  like  the  ice 
boat.  The  cold,  dry  air  offers  no  resistance  to 
the  momentum  of  the  vibration.  They  slide- 
through  the  air  on  the  tension,  like  the  ice  boat ; 
but  if  the  atmosphere  is  heavy  and  moist,  sound 
cannot  penetrate  it  far.  The  moisture  or  fog  in- 
sulates and  separates  sound.  Every  molecule  of 
moisture  offers  a  resistance  to  its  motion. 


FROM    DAllKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  115 


WHAT    IS    HUNGER    AND    THIRST,    AP- 
PETITE ? 

THE  body  is  a  mass  of  nerves,  sinews,  bones, 
and  moisture.  All  the  nerves  are  in  action, 
and  fighting  the  cold.  Every  little  nerve  has  to 
continually  fight  against  this  cold  to  keep  it  out 
of  the  body.  This  fighting  and  struggling  wears 
out  the  nerves,  and  they  become  weakened  or 
hungry.  All  the  nerves  depend  on  the  stomach 
for  food.  They  are  continually  drawing  sup- 
plies from  it,  and  if  it  becomes  exhausted,  the 
nerves  cr\^  out  for  more,  and  the  stomach  must 
supply  them.  This  is  the  sensation  of  hunger. 
It  shrinks  the  stomach  and  all  the  nervous  sys- 
tem. This  allows  the  cold  to  press  in.  Then 
comes  the  great  battle  for  life.  The  nerves  want 
food  to  fight  the  cold.  The  blood  begins  to  get 
cold.  The  circulation  grows  slower ;  the  nerves 
and  stomach  are  under  great  strain.  They  exert 
all  their  force  to  keep  up  action.  They  are  using 
the  fat  of  the  body,  the  stomach  being  exhausted. 
The  cold  is  gradually  gaining  on  the  heat.  It  is 
being  reduced  by  the  nerves  feeding  on  the  body. 
The  blood  becomes  thin.  They  all  cry  out  for 
food  through   the  stomach.     The  brain  becomes 


116  FROM   DAKKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

dazed,  for  its  nerves  are  weakened,  as  it  receives 
no  food.  The  nerves  of  the  body  exhaust  it  all. 
The  moisture  becomes  reduced,  for  the  heat  is 
being  extracted,  and  it  carries  the  moisture  with 
it.  The  nerves  and  circulation  seek  the  stomach 
for  water  to  quench  their  thirst.  The  nerves  be- 
come feverish  ;  the  blood  becomes  hot,  and  the 
brain  almost  burns.  This  is  the  last  struggle. 
The  nerves  are  devouring  or  consuming  them- 
selves. They  try  to  force  out  the  cold,  but  it  is 
constant.  It  makes  no  struggle.  It  is  slow,  but 
sure.  It  lets  the  heat  do  all  the  fighting  until 
it  becomes  exhausted ;  then  it  takes  possession, 
and  quiet  prevails.  The  body  is  a  product  of 
heat.  It  has  encroached  on  the  cold,  for  it  is 
occupying  its  space;  for  all  space  is  cold,  and 
anything  occupying  any  portion  of  that  space 
must  fight  for  it. 

Now,  everything  living  must  be  prepared  to  re- 
sist the  cold.  It  must,  therefore,  be  able  to  make 
heat.  It  must  be  of  a  nervous  nature,  able  to 
vibrate  through  its  own  structure.  These  vibra- 
tions act  on  the  tension  in  themselves,  and  re- 
act on  the  nerves,  and  the  nerves  resist,  and  heat 
is  produced.  Now,  the  cold  presses  against  the 
surface  of  the  body,  and  the  heat  inside  the 
body  expands,  and  the  cold  shrinks,  and  this 
produces  motion  or  circulation.  The  cold  pulls 
the  heat  out  of  the  body,  and  cold  passes  into  the 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  117 

body,  and  expands,  and  becomes  heated.  This 
interchange  of  heat  and  cold  keeps  the  nerves  in 
vibration,  and  keeps  up  the  heat  and  life  as  long 
as  the  two  are  mutual.  They  produce  harmony 
in  the  body.  The  cold  is  constantly  absorbing 
the  boat,  and  it  must  be  replaced  as  fast  as  ex- 
hausted. Food  feeds  the  stomach,  and  it  feeds 
the  blood  and  nerves.  They  vibrate  the  tension 
within  it,  and  it  vibrates  all  the  nervous  system, 
and  this  keeps  up  action,  circulation,  and  life. 
The  heart  is  the  bell  to  sound  the  alarm  to  all 
the  arteries  and  veins  to  open  their  gates  for  the 
circulation  of  the  blood.  The  beating  of  the 
heart  is  vibratory.  It  vibrates  all  the  nervous 
system,  acting  on  the  tension  in  the  body.  Every 
beat  of  the  heart  produces  heat  by  vibrating  the 
nerves,  and  the  nerves  vibrate  the  tension.  The 
body  is  a  circuit  inclosed  from  the  outer  air  and 
tension.  The  skin  incloses  the  circulation  and 
protects  it.  Inclosing  the  circulation  of  the 
fluids  of  the  body,  these  fluids  are  governed  by 
the  action  of  heat  and  cold.  As  soon  as  the  air 
is  taken  into  the  lungs  it  becomes  heated,  and 
expands,  and  heats  the  fluids,  and  they  are  put 
in  motion.  The  breathing  acts  on  the  tension, 
and  the  tension  on  the  nerves  and  fluids,  and 
this  keeps  up  the  heat  in  the  body. 

Now,  all  space  being  filled  with  tension  or  cold, 
the  body  must  be  able  to  act  on  it.     The  body  is 


118  FllOM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

a  product  of  heat.  Tliis  heat  must  fight  the 
cold ;  so  life  is  a  battle  between  heat  and  cold. 
This  body  must  have  some  way  of  generating 
heat  to  resist  the  cold.  The  body  occupies  the 
space  belonging  to  the  cold.  This  cold  is  con- 
stantly fighting  the  heat  of  the  body.  As  fast  as 
heat  is  generated,  it  is  extracted  by  the  cold,  and 
this  keeps  up  a  flow,  or  circulation,  of  heat  in- 
dependent of  the  fluids  of  the  body.  The  cold 
presses  into  the  body,  and  becomes  heated  and 
expands,  and  forces  the  cold  out  by  heating  it. 
All  the  nerves  are  vibrated,  and  they  vibrate  the 
tension,  and  the  tension  the  whole  nervous  sys- 
tem. The  nerves  are  the  resistance  coils  of  the 
body.  They  resist  the  vibrations  and  retain  the 
heat.  AH  the  action  in  the  body  is  vibratory. 
The  circulation  of  the  fluids  is  a  circulation  of 
heat  and  cold.  The  body  takes  in  cold  and  gives 
out  heat."  If  the  body  could  not  generate  heat 
as  fast  as  extracted,  death  w^ould  ensue ;  and  if 
the  heat  generated  by  the  body  could  not  be  car- 
ried off  as  fast  as  produced,  it  would  consume  it. 
One  is  necessary  to  the  other  to  produce  action 
or  life.  The  cold  is  inert  and  dead;  no  motion, 
no  action,  dead  and  rigid  as  a  block  of  ice.  Now, 
anything  that  can  vibrate  this  cold  tension  will 
make  heat — for  it  acts  on  a  great  force,  or 
pressure. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  119 


A    LOOK    INTO    A    SUNBEAM. 

IF  we  allow  the  sun's  rays  to  pass  through  a 
small  opening  in  the  window,  what  can  we 
see  ?  All  kinds  of  dust,  particles  of  everything 
in  the  room,  floating  in  the  air.  All  in  motion, 
not  two  have  the  same  movement,  all  going  in 
different  directions.  What  is  the  cause  of  this? 
The  air  is  not  in  motion.  There  is  no  circula- 
tion in  the  room.  Every  particle  floating  in  the 
sunbeam  is  of  a  different  size  and  form.  Every 
particle  offers  some  resistance  to  the  sun's  rays 
or  lines.  They  contain  some  matter,  and  this 
matter  holds  some  of  the  tension  in  it,  and  this 
is  vibrated,  and  the  vibrations  produce  heat,  and 
the  heat  produces  motion. 

Now,  every  particle,  being  of  a  different  size 
and  form,  has  a  different  motion.  The  sun- 
beam produces  heat,  and  sets  the  air  in  motion. 
The  heated  molecules  ascend,  and  the  cold  mole- 
cules rise  and  absorb  the  heated  molecules.  The 
heated  molecules  repel  them.  Then  comes  the 
battle  between  the  two.  The  heat  repels  and  the 
cold  attracts ;  the  heat  expanding,  and  the  cold 
contracting,  acts  on  the  tension,  and  it  vibrates 
the   air,  and  the  air  expands  and  vibrates  the 


120  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

tension.  The  cold  air  circulates  through  the 
hot,  and  this  produces  shrinking  and  expansion. 
This  acts  on  the  tension  and  the  air,  and  motion 
and  heat  is  produced. 

A  molecule  of  heat  and  a  molecule  of  cold  air 
coming  in  contact,  the  cold  being  a  vacuum  of 
Iieat,  it  will  pull  or  shrink  the  heat  into  it.  The 
heat  repels  the  cold  when  they  meet.  Heat  ex- 
pands the  cold  and  the  cold  shrinks  it.  This 
causes  a  collision  or  commotion,  or  a  kind  of  ex- 
plosion, when  they  meet.  The  cold  molecule 
expands  when  it  has  absorbed  the  heated  mole- 
cule. This  mingling  and  interchange  of  heat 
and  cold,  shrinking  and  expanding,  colliding 
and  exploding,  repelling  and  attracting  of  the 
molecules,  or  atoms,  produces  motion,  action, and 
life. 

This  action  is  throughout  everything  on  the 
earth,  from  the  smallest  molecule  to  the  largest 
animal,  and  from  the  smallest  plant  to  the  largest 
tree.  That  is  the  commotion  that  keeps  up  their 
circulation  and  life.  All  life  must  have  circula- 
tion— for  we  see  every  particle  in  the  sunbeam  in 
motion;  the  air  is  in  circulation  through  the  sun- 
beam. It  rolls  around,  as  if  in  a  cylinder.  It 
projects  all  particles  toward  the  lower  end  of  the 
beam.  Now,  this  sunbeam  gives  life  to  all  the 
particles  within  its  rays.  These  rays  are  like  the 
tension  lines  that  penetrate  everything  on  the 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  121 

earth.  These  lines  are  through  everything,  and 
at  rest  until  vibrated,  and  then  they  are  put  in 
iijotion,  and  heat  is  generated  by  this  motion — 
for  the  air  resists  all  motion,  and  it  is  heated.  If 
we  could  look  into  a  piece  of  iron  under  the  sun's 
rays,  we  would  see  a  circulation  through  it  like  the 
sunbeam.  The  tension  in  the  iron  would  be  vi- 
brated, and  the  tension  on  the  outside  would 
press  into  the  iron  and  keep  up  the  circulation  of 
heat  and  cold. 


122  FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


A    FIRE-FLY  — WHAT     IS    THE    CAUSE 
OF    ITS    LIGHT? 

WE  observe  a  fire-fly  giving  light  at  inter- 
vals as  it  flies  through  the  air.  This  light 
is  produced  without  heat.  The  fly  is  made  of  a 
very  fine  nervous  structure.  The  nerves  are  so 
fine  that  they  act  on,  and  are  in  harmony  with, 
the  tension  in  and  around  them.  In  breathinof 
they  concentrate  their  whole  nervous  system  on 
the  tension,  vibrating  it.  This  nervous  force  is 
exploded  against  the  air,  and  light  is  produced. 
This  action  is  the  same  as  we  breathe.  We  in- 
hale cold  air,  and  exhale  warm.  The  fly  at  the 
time  of  the  discharge  is  in  a  great  nervous  con- 
dition. All  the  nerves  are  concentrated  and 
strained,  and  vibrating  on  the  tension.  These 
vibrations  are  so  fine  and  rapid  that  they  catch 
the  tension  and  produce  light,  the  same  as  sun- 
light. That  is,  the  fly  has  so  many  nerves  in  its 
body,  and  they  are  so  fine,  that  they  can  generate 
heat  enough  to  make  light. 

The  light  is  generated  by  the  fine  nerves  in  its 
body.  It  concentrates  all  its  energy  into  its 
nerves,  and  then  explodes,  or  opens  a  valve,  and 
discharges   against  the  air.     Now,  the  fly  occu- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  123 

pies  a  portion  of  space.  Its  body  incloses  a  por- 
tion of  that  space,  and  it  is  acting  on  the  tension 
in  that  space.  That  tension  is  more  than  teil 
thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch.  The  fly  vi- 
brates its  nerves  against  that  force.  That  force 
is  in  the  fly  and  around  it — the  pressure  is  equal 
ever3^where;  but  the  vibrating  of  the  nerves  of 
the  fly  separate  it  from  the  outside  pressure. 
This  action  causes  the  outer  pressure  to  press 
into  the  fly,  and  causes  the  discharge,  or  flash  of 
light.  The  vibrating  of  the  fly's  nerves  makes 
and  breaks  the  lines  of  tension. 

The  glow-worm  is  like  the  fire-fly.  It  is  a  mass 
of  fine  nerves  that  are  constantly  vibrating  on 
tlie  tension.  These  vibrations  are  so  fine  and 
rapid  that  they  act  on  the  tension  and  vibrate  it, 
and  it  vibrates  on  the  nerves,  and  this  produces 
the  glow-light.  These  lines  of  tension  pass 
through  the  worm,  and  the  vibrating  nerves  dis- 
turb these  lines,  continually  agitating  them. 

The  worm  is  like  a  coil  of  fine  wire  wound 
spirally.  It  has  millions  of  fine  nerves.  These 
nerves  are  of  a  spiral  form,  the  circuit  running 
around  the  worm.  When  it  moves,  it  acts  on 
the  tension  and  disturbs  its  lines,  and  produces 
the  glow,  or  light,  or  luminosity.  The  worm 
occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and  the  tension  is  in 
that  space.  The  worm  offers  a  resistance  to  these 
lines,  and  there  is  heat  produced   in  it,  and  its 


X24  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT; 

nervous  structure  is  vibrated,  and  these  vibra- 
tions are  imparted  to  it.  The  tension  around 
the  worm  is  constantly  pressing  into  it.  This 
action  disturbing  the  lines  in  the  worm  from 
the  lines  on  the  outside  of  the  worm,  and  the 
glow,  or  light,  is  produced  ;  there  is  no  com- 
bustion or  liberation  of  heat  in  this  worm.  It  is 
simply  an  excitation  of  its  nervous  system 
through  the  tension  in  its  body.  The  tension  in 
the  worm  is  in  vibration,  and  is  heated,  and  the 
tension  around  the  worm  is  cold,  and  constantly 
pressing  around  it,  trying  to  crush  out  its  heat. 
This  action  keeps  up  the  heat  and  light,  and  the 
vibrations  are  continued,  and  life  goes  on. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  125 


THE    LEYDEN    JAR,    AND    ITS    ACTION. 

THE  jar,  or  bottle,  incloses  a  portion  of  space, 
and  the  tension  is  in  that  space.  The  tin 
foil  insulates  this  tension  from  the  glass,  and  the 
tin  foil  on  the  outside  insulates  the  outer  ten- 
sion, thus  separating  the  jar  completely,  or  in- 
sulating the  glass  from  the  tension  and  air.  The 
glass,  being  a  non-conductor,  divides  the  lines  of 
tension.  This  prevents  the  inner  tension  con- 
necting with  the  outer.  The  tin  foil  is  non- 
vibratory —  that  is,  will  not  sound,  or  conduct 
sound.  It  divides  the  vibration  ;  therefore,  it  is 
a  good  insulator. 

Now,  the  inside  of  the  jar  being  separated  from 
the  outside,  they  cannot  communicate  with  each 
other.  Now,  let  us  charge  the  jar.  The  current 
is  applied  and  it  is  charged.  It  contained  air 
and  tension  before  charging,  and  what  does  it 
contain  after  charging?  The  tension  and  air  in 
the  jar  has  been  vibrated  and  strained.  The  air 
molecules  have  been  heated  and  expanded.  This 
makes  a  pressure  in  the  jar,  and  the  current  has 
compressed  or  condensed  the  tension — that  is, 
the  jar  was  full  of  the  same  force  that  we  charged 
it  with,  and   the  charge  put  the  tension  in  the 


126  FROM  Darkness  to  light. 

jar  under   strain,  or   pressure.     The  tension   is 
,the   medium  through  which   light  is  produced. 
The  tension  being  under  strain,  this  charges  the 
molecules  of  air,  and  they  are  compressed. 

Now,  let  us  discharge  the  jar.  The  jar  is  un- 
der pressure,  and  explodes,  or  presses  out.  The 
molecules  of  air  were  under  pressure.  As  soon 
as  liberated,  they  expand.  Each  molecule  of  air 
inclosed  some  of  the  tension,  and  when  they  ex- 
panded, in  being  relieved  of  the  pressure,  they 
disturbed  the  lines  of  tension  and  produced 
light.  The  pressure  stored  in  the  jar  in  dis- 
charging forms  a  partial  vacuum,  and  the  air 
flows  back  into  it,  and  causes  excitations,  until  it 
finds  its  equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest.  The  air 
molecules,  being  liberated,  rush  or  press  towards 
the  opening.  They  all,  moving  instantaneously, 
vibrated  the  tension,  and  the  tension  vibrate(J 
the  air,  for  one  acts  on  the  other,  they  all  being 
under  strain  at  the  instant  of  discharge,  and  the 
outer  air  and  tension  insulated,  or  separated, 
from  the  inner.  The  whole  discharge  was  break- 
ing the  tension  lines  of  the  inside  of  the  jar  at 
the  instant  of  discharge. 

The  space  in  the  jar  is  the  tension,  and  it  has 
been  vibrated,  and  the  vibrations  break  these 
lines.  This  throws  all  the  molecules  of  air  out 
of  equilibrium,  and  they  are  in  vibration,  and 
they  vibrate  on  the  tension.     The  jar,  being  in- 


FROM   DARKXESS   TO    LIGHT.  127 

sulated,  confines  this  action  to  the  inside,  the 
outside  constant!}^  pressing  in.  The  glass  and 
tinfoil  insulates  these  lines ;  but  the  pressure  is 
constant. 

Now,  the  jar  being  insulated  inside  and  out- 
side, the  space  inside  is  all  in  motion  and  under 
pressure  from  the  charge  applied  to  it.  When  it 
is  discharged,  the  pressure  on  the  outside  presses 
in,  and  oscillations  occur,  and  light  is  produced. 
Each  molecule  of  air  is  inclosed  in  the  tension 
under  strain,  and  the  jar  is  discharged.  The  air 
molecules  break  the  lines  of  tension  and  produce 
the  light. 


niSri7BRSIT7i 


128  FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


ELECTRICITY  AND  THE  HUMAN   BODY, 
OR  ANIMAL  LIFE. 

THE  body  is  a  mass  of  nerves  floating  in  the 
tension  of  space.     It  is  like  a  sponge  float- 
ing  in  water.     All  these   little   nerves  are  con- 
ductors.    They  are  like  millions  of   fine  wires 
coiled  up  to  build  a  form  or  body.     All  the  fluids 
of  the   body  are  of  a  nervous   matter,  and  are 
floating  in  the  tension.     The  nerves  are  the  re- 
sistance  coils.     They  retain  the  heat  of  the  vi- 
brations of  the  tensions  within  them.     When  we 
look   in  the   mirror  we  see  our  bodies  reflected. 
Now,  this  reflection  is  like  our  bodies,  only  it  has 
no  substance,  no  matter,  no   nerves,  and  no  life. 
As  we   move,  it  moves.     It  moves  through  the 
space  without  resistance,  like  a  shadow.     Now, 
this  is  the  true  reflection.     It  is  as  if  the  matter 
of  the  body  had  stepped  out  and  left  its  impres- 
sion in  the  tension.     This  tension  ignores  matter. 
It  reflects  matter,  and  all  matter  is  incased  in  it 
and  reflected  through  it. 

Now,  if  we  should  apply  a  current  of  elec- 
tricity to  the  body  so  as  to  act  on  the  tension 
and  make  it  incandescent — that  is,  to  have  the 
tension  luminous — the  form  of  the  bodv  would 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  129 

be  visible  only.  The  matter  would  be  invisible. 
There  would  be  no  shadow  lines,  for  there  is  no 
space  that  it  does  not  occupy.  Think  of  a  body 
luminous  without  heat.  Can  it  be  done  ?  It  is 
not  impossible.  Twelve  hundred  to  fifteen  hun- 
dred volts  kill  a  body,  but  do  not  make  it 
luminous.  How  can  we  increase  this  force  and 
not  kill  the  body  ?  This  force  as  applied  is  too 
slow.  All  the  nerves  resist  this  slow  current. 
It  must  be  rapid,  to  catch  the  tension  of  the  body 
and  not  the  nerves.  When  we  can  produce  vi- 
brations rapidly  enough  and  fine  enough  to  act  on 
and  vibrate  the  tension,  then  we  can  illuminate, 
not  only  the  body,  but  all  matter  and  bodies. 

These  vibrations  must  be  rapid  and  contin- 
uous. No  rotary  motion  can  accomplish  this.  It 
must  be  done  as  Nature  does  it. 

Now,  if  we  should  illuminate  a  rock,  and  make 
it  incandescent,  the  material  of  the  rock  would 
be  invisible ;  and  if  we  should  keep  increasing 
the  vibrations,  the  rock  would  crumble  into  dust. 
The  tension  in  the  rock  would  be  vibrated  so 
rapidly  that  it  would  be  separated  from  the  ten- 
sion outside.  This  would  divide  all  the  atoms  of 
the  rock  into  invisible  particles,  and  they  would 
dissolve  and  fall  in  dust  to  the  ground  ;  and  if  we 
should  gather  up  all  this  dust  and  combine  it 
with  water,  and  put  it  under  a  great  pressure,  it 
would  become  a  rock  again.     This  pressure  forces 


130  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

all  air  and  gases  out  of  it,  combining  its  atoms. 
This  binds  the  tension  in  the  rock,  and  the  pres- 
sure applied  to  the  rock  has  compressed  it  into  a 
smaller  space  than  it  occupied  before  the  pres- 
sure. This  causes  the  tension  to  press  all  around 
the  rock,  keeping  it  in  its  present  form.  The 
tension  in  the  rock  and  the  tension  outside  the 
rock  are  united — that  is,  the  pull  is  uniform 
through  the  rock,  and  it  is  pressed  together, 
holding  or  keeping  its  form.  The  rock  cannot 
get  out  of  this  pressure.  Once  formed,  the  pres- 
sure is  equal  everywhere. 


FEOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  131 


WHAT  IS  ATTRACTION  AND  COHESION? 

ALL  space  is  filled  with  cold  tension,  pressing 
around  the  earth,  pressing  everything  to  it. 
This  tension  holds  the  earth  in  its  present  form. 
The  earth  is  the  receptacle  for  all  condensed 
matter.  All  the  heat  and  moisture  arising  from 
the  earth  are  pulled  up  into  the  cold  space  of 
air,  and  condensed  and  pressed  back  by  the  cold 
tension  after  the  heat  has  been  extracted.  Now, 
the  cold  tension  of  space  pulls  all  the  heat  up 
from  the  earth,  and  presses  the  cold  down  to  fill 
its  place.  This  cold  space  pulls  all  heat  gener- 
ated by  the  earth.  This  pull  holds  the  earth  to 
the  sun.  This  pull  is  not  attraction  or  cohesion. 
It  is  the  pull  for  life.  The  cold  tries  to  pull  the 
heat  from  the  earth,  and  the  earth  fights,  and  re- 
sists, and  struggles,  to  keep  up  her  heat  as  fast  as 
the  cold  absorbs  it.  This  is  the  struggle  for  life 
between  heat  and  cold.  Heat  is  life,  and  cold  is 
death.  The  cold  presses  everything  to  the  earth, 
and  the  heat  is  pulled  up  from  the  earth.  This 
allows  the  cold  to  press  close  to  the  earth.  As 
the  heat  is  pulled  up  from  the  earth,  the  cold  is 
pressed  to  the  earth ;  this  is  the  circulation  of 
the  earth,  and  its  life,  action,  and  motion. 


162  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

Now,  if  we  throw  something  upwards,  it  is 
pressed  back  again  to  the  earth,  it  being  the 
point  of  rest.  The  cold  pressure  around  the 
earth  resists  all  heat.  The  heat  resists  the  pres- 
sure of  cold  through  the  lines  of  tension,  and 
transmits  it  into  the  cold  space ;  so  it  is  a  con- 
tinual interchange  of  heat  and  cold,  shrinking 
and  expanding,  to  keep  up  motion  and  life. 

Any  matter  that  we  may  throw  from  the  earth 
has  been  condensed  by  the  cold  tension  of  space. 
This  cold  holds  this  matter  in  its  solid  form,  and 
gives  it  weight  in  proportion  to  its  solidit}^  or 
fineness  of  its  atoms  or  molecules.  All  matter 
on  the  earth  is  a  condensation  of  the  cold  ;  it 
holds  it  at  rest.  Now,  let  us  apply  heat  to  this 
condensed  matter.  This  heat  raises  the  cold 
pressure  from  around  it,  and  allows  it  to  vapor- 
ize. This  vapor  is  heat,  and  this  heat  is  pulled 
up  to  the  cold  space  and  condensed,  and  pressed 
back  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest.  Now,  this 
heat  is  not  weight.  It  has  lifted  the  weight  from 
the  condensed  matter,  and  it  became  a  vapor,  or 
gas.  This  gas  will  condense  against  the  cold-air 
space,  and  be  pressed  back  to  the  earth  after  all 
the  heat  has  been  extracted  from  it.  Now,  this 
condensed  gas  will  become  weight  again — for  the 
heat  has  been  extracted  from  it,  and  the  cold 
took  its  place,  compressing  it  into  a  smaller 
space.     Holding  it  in  this  form,  it  cannot  get  out 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  133 

of  this  pressure  until  the  heat  liberates  it  again 
and  gives  it  motion.  Is  this  attraction,  gravity, 
or  cohesion,  or  pressure? 


134  FKOM  DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


COHESION    OF    MATTER. 

THE  cold  tension  of  space  presses  all  around 
and  through  the  earth,  and  everything  on 
it.  Let  us  take  a  common  piece  of  iron,  and  file 
it  into  dust.  The  particles  of  this  dust  have  no 
attraction,  or  cohesion,  or  affinity  for  each  other ; 
they  are  individual  atoms.  The  same  pressure 
is  around  each  atom.  They  being  separate,  the 
tension  is  in  and  around  each  atom,  thus  separ- 
ating them  completely.  We  place  these  filings 
in  a  crucible,  and  melt,  or  combine,  these  atoms 
in  a  furnace.  Let  us  see  what  takes  place  in  the 
furnace.  We  apply  heat.  This  heat  has  to  dis- 
place the  cold  sufficiently  to  allow  the  atoms  of 
iron  to  become  fluid — that  is  all ;  the  cold  must 
be  expelled.  This  leaves  the  heat  space  a 
vacuum  of  cold — that  is,  the  heat  has  made  a 
hole  in  space,  for  the  furnace  occupies  space. 
Now,  this  must  be  a  great  heat  to  be  able  to  dis- 
place this  great  weight  of  cold.  One  is  equal  to 
the  other.  The  heat  removes  or  raises  the  pres- 
sure of  the  cold  from  the  atoms  of  iron,  and  al- 
lows them  to  flow  or  unite,  thus  giving  them  free 
motion  in  a  fluid  form.  This  fluid  has  ex- 
panded, filling  more  space  than  when  cold.     As 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  135 

long  as  this  heat  is  maintained,  the  metal  will 
remain  fluid. 

Let  us  watch  the  cooling  process.  The  cold 
is  constantly  pressing  into  the  heat,  trying  to 
displace  it  and  drive  it  out.  The  cold  gradu- 
ally presses  all  around  the  fluid,  it  being  now 
one  mass,  all  united  by  the  heat.-  The  cold  gains 
on  the  heat,  and  is  pressing  it  into  a  smaller 
space,  compressing  its  molecules,  or  atoms,  to- 
gether. This  is  the  pressure  of  the  tension  of 
space.  As  fast  as  the  heat  is  removed,  the  cold 
presses  in  and  around  the  metal,  and  makes  it 
solid.  The  heat  now  all  removed,  the  cold  has 
conquered  and  taken  possession  of  the  iron,  and 
there  is  no  more  action. 

Is  this  attraction,  cohesion,  or  pressure?  The 
cold  squeezes  the  metal  into  its  own  embrace — 
that  is,  it  presses  everything  that  resists  it  into  as 
small  a  space  as  possible. 

The  heat  produced  in  the  furnace  must  be 
equal  to  the  cold  displaced.  The  heat  raised  the 
pressure  of  cold  from  the  metal,  and  it  became  a 
fluid.  One  pressure  expels  the  other.  This  is 
simply  an  action  of  heat  and  cold.  The  cold  is 
solid  everywhere  around  the  earth.  The  air 
offers  a  resistance  to  the  circuit  of  the  heat  and 
cold  through  the  tension.  The  air  retains  a  por- 
tion of  this  heat,  and  is  put  in  motion  and 
pulled  up  and  condensed  in  the  cold-air  space 


136  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

after  all  the  heat  has  been  extracted  from  it. 
For  ever\^  degree  of  heat  we  produce,  we  have 
to  raise  a  degree  of  cold.  The  cold  is  the  dead 
pressure,  a  weight  that  nothing  but  heat  can 
raise.  This  dead  weight  or  pressure  is  in  and 
around  everything  on  the  earth,  and  in  to  the 
center  of  the  earth.  Its  lines  are  solidly  con- 
nected around  and  through  the  earth,  and  the 
heat  in  the  earth  raises  that  amount  of  cold  and 
allows  it  to  become  a  fluid,  or  molten.  The 
metal,  when  in  a  fluid  condition,  is  in  life,  and, 
when  cold,  is  in  death. 


FROM.   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  137 


WHAT     IS    COMBUSTION,    OR    LIGHT- 
CANDLE    LIGHT    OR    OIL    LIGHT? 

LET  us  see  what  is  in  a  common  tallow  candle. 
The  grease  is  a  product  of  heat.  The  candle 
occupies  a  portion  of  space.  The  wick  is  a  cot- 
ton fibre,  a  product  of  heat.  The  candle  is  cold 
and  dead.  The  cold  tension  presses  around  and 
through  the  candle.  Now,  we  will  light  the 
candle.  The  heat  must  displace  the  cold  space 
of  the  flame.  The  wick  is  a  fibrous  texture.  The 
tension  and  air  is  assimilated  all  through  it. 
The  heat  applied  to  it  expands  the  air  and  sets 
it  in  vibration,  and  vibrates  the  tension.  The 
cold  air  resists  the  heat,  and  the  heat  resists  the 
cold,  and  so  the  battle  begins.  The  cold  tries  to 
freeze  out  the  heat,  and  the  heat  expands  and 
presses  against  the  cold.  This  puts  the  flame 
space  in  commotion  or  strain.  It  is  in  a  vibra- 
tory condition.  The  tension  is  so  hot  that  it 
shines,  or  gives  light,  the  same  as  a  piece  of  glass 
taken  out  of  a  furnace.  The  glass  would  be  in- 
candescent, like  the  tension  of  the  space  the 
flame  occupies.  The  heat  vibrates  the  grease  of 
the  candle,  and  separates  its  molecules,  vapor- 
izing them,  and  they  combine  with  the  air  and 


138  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

circulate.    This  keeps  up  sufficient  heat  to  expel 
the  cold,  and  allows  the  tension  to  shine.     The 
more  heat  produced,  the  more  cold  displaced, 
and  the  more  surface  of  the  tension  is  offered  to 
the  action  of  the  combatants.     The  intense  heat 
and  the  intense  cold  of  the  flame  are  continu- 
ally changing  places.      The  heat  is  pulled  up, 
and  the  cold  rushes  in  at  the  lower  part  of  the 
flame,  to  be  heated  and  pulled  up  again.     The 
air  outside   the  flame  is  cold — say,  seventy-five 
degrees  Fahr.,  and  it  rushes  into  the  center  of 
the  flame,  where  ..the  temperature  is  about  one 
thousand   degrees.     This   causes  the  air  mole- 
cules to  explode ;  and  so  it  is  a  continuous  ex- 
ploding of  the  molecules  of  air.     This  explod- 
ing continually  disturbs  the  lines  of  tension  and 
produces  light.    The  heat  puts  the  cold  in  motion 
and  produces  the  circulation,  and  the  circulation 
makes  and  breaks  the  lines  of  tension.     The  air 
is  the  medium  for   combining   the  particles  of 
grease  and  expanding  them,  and  for  producing 
the  circulation  of  the  air,  causing  the  interchange 
of  heat   and  cold,  shrinking  and   expanding  of 
the  air  molecules.     The  tension  is  the  medium 
of  luminosity,  or  light.     When  a  sufficient  quan- 
tity  of  vibrations   are   produced   to   disturb  its 
lines,  it  gives  light — that  is,  it  becomes  luminous 
and  shines. 

Other  oil  lights  are  produced  in  a  similar  way. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO      LIGHT.  139 

The  air  is  heated  and  vibrated,  and  combines 
with  the  oil,  and  it  expands  and  produces  heat, 
and  the  heat  displaces  the  cold,  and  the  com- 
bining of  the  air  and  oil  expand  and  explode. 
Each  molecule  of  air  absorbs  a  molecule  of  oil, 
and  they  ascend  and  explode  at  the  point  of 
greatest  resistance.  This  is  a  constant  bombard- 
ing of  the  molecules  against  the  lines  of  tension. 
This  action  continually  disturbs  and  agitates 
these  lines,  throwing  them  out  of  equilibrium. 
This  prevents  the  tension  from  connecting  its 
lines.  The  cold  constantly  presses  around  the 
heat,  trying  to  crush  it  out,  and  the  heat  keeps 
up  the  struggle,  trying  to  force  out  the  cold. 
This  is  a  battle  for  life  between  the  two  giants, 
and  their  struggle  produces  light  and  heat. 


140  FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


WHAT  IS  THE  CAUSE  OF  AN  ELECTRIC 

CURRENT,  AND   WHY   DOES  IT 

KILL  A  BODY? 

THE  body  is  built  up  of  a  nervous  matter, 
bones,  blood,  and  flesh.  This  body  is  in- 
cased in  the  tension — that  is,  it  has  grown  up 
in  it,  and  is  a  part  of  it.  This  body  offers  a  re- 
sistance to  the  lines  of  tension,  and  it  becomes 
heated.  The  tension  in  the  body  is  vibrated  by 
this  heat,  and  the  nerves  and  fluids  resist  these 
vibrations,  and  retain  the  heat,  and  this  puts  the 
fluids  in  motion,  or  circulation.  This  causes  the 
tension  to  be  continually  agitated  and  vibrated, 
putting  the  whole  nervous  system  in  motion  or 
action.  The  tension  on  the  outside  of  the  body 
constantly  presses  all  around  it,  trying  to  find  an 
entrance,  the  skin  of  the  body  being  the  divid- 
ing line,  the  inside  of  the  body  being  in  vibra- 
tion against  the  constant  pressure  outside.  The 
inside  is  disturbed,  or  separated,  from  the  out- 
side. This  causes  a  greater  pressure  on  the  out- 
side than  if  there  were  no  action  or  circulation 
inside.  This  is  the  action  that  keeps  up  the  cir- 
culation. This  circulation  is  constantly  dis- 
turbing the  lines  of  tension  in  the  body,  disturb- 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  141 

ing  them  from  the  lines  outside  the  body.  This 
action  makes  heat  in  the  body,  and  the  heat  ex- 
pands the  fluids,  and  they  are  put  in  motion  or 
circulation,  and  this  action  keeps  up  life. 

Now,  if  we  apply  a  weak  electric  current  to 
this  body,  it  will  heat  it — for  it  will  offer  a  re- 
sistance to  it.  The  nerves  and  fluids  are  the 
resisting  medium.  The  tension  of  the  body  is  too 
fine  for  this  current  to  act  on.  The  vibrations 
are  too  coarse  and  slow  to  catch  the  lines  of  ten- 
sion. 

Let  us  apply  a  current  sufficient  to  kill  this 
body — say,  fifteen  hundred  volts.  This  current 
does  not  act  on  the  tension  of  the  body ;  it  acts 
on  the  matter  of  the  body.  This  matter  offers  a 
resistance  to  the  circuit,  and  all  the  fluids  and 
structure  of  the  body  become  heated.  The  vibra- 
tions of  the  current  are  like  a  hammer  pound- 
ing on  this  body.  Every  vibration  crushes  a 
portion  of  the  structure  of  this  body.  So  this 
current  is  a  continuous  pounding  on  the  struc- 
ture of  the  body,  producing  heat  in  it.  This 
heat  is  sufficient  to  destroy  the  nervous  structure 
of  the  body,  producing  death.  Now,  the  nerves 
of  the  body  being  crushed  by  this  current,  they 
cannot  act  on  the  tension  within  it.  They  can- 
not vibrate  it.  The  blood  cannot  circulate ;  the 
body  begins  to  get  cold.  The  tension  outside 
gradually  presses  in.      The  heat  is  being  ab- 


142  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

sorbed  by  the  cold  ;  the  nerves  cease  to  act,  and 
the  circulation  is  at  rest.  The  tension  in  the 
body,  and  the  tension  outside  the  body,  have 
united  through  the  body,  and  it  is  rigid  and  at 
rest.  As  soon  as  the  vibrations  in  the  body 
cease,  the  space  it  occupies  cannot  resist  the  pres- 
sure of  the  tension  on  the  outside,  and  it  presses 
in,  displacing  all  the  heat,  and  the  body  is  at 
rest ;  the  cold  having  taken  possession  of  the 
heat,  there  can  be  no  more  action  or  life.  The 
body  is  in  equilibrium,  and  we  apply  the  cur- 
rent to  the  body.  This  destroys  its  equilibrium, 
making  it  rigid.  It  arrests  all  action  and  circu- 
lation. This  current  that  we  apply,  over  sup- 
plies this  body  with  its  life  force.  This  body  was 
full  and  could  hold  no  more,  but  the  current 
acted  like  a  compresser,  stuffing  this  body,  arrest- 
ing all  action,  circulation,  and  life.  This  may 
occur  without  injuring  any  of  the  tissues  of  this 
body. 

Now,  let  us  apply  a  current  that  w^ll  act  on 
the  tension  of  the  body  and  not  on  the  nerves. 
This  must  be  very  rapid  and  fine — say,  fifty 
million  magnetic  vibrations  per  second.  Now, 
the  body  is  occupying  a  space  where  the  tension, 
or  pressure,  is  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to 
the  square  inch.  We  must  produce  vibrations 
that  will  harmonize  with  this  tension — that  is, 
they  must  travel  on  their  own  lines.     This  will 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  143 

not  effect  the  nerves ;  it  will  act  on  the  tension  of 
the  body,  and  it  will  become  incandescent,  or 
luminous.  The  matter  of  the  body  would  be  in- 
visible, the  tension  being  luminous.  These 
vibrations  may  be  regulated  so  as  to  produce 
various  effects  or  results.  If  we  increase  these 
vibrations  sufficiently  in  this  body,  it  would  dis- 
appear in  vapor.  The  increased  vibrations  would 
separate  every  atom,  or  molecule,  of  matter  of 
the  body.  They  would  float  off  in  the  air,  like 
dust  in  the  water.  This  tension  holds  all  matter 
together.  When  we  can  break  its  lines,  then  we 
can  liberate  all  matter. 

All  matter  is  incased  in  this  tension,  and  it 
holds  it  at  rest.  When  we  vibrate  it  we  give  it 
life — for  vibrations  make  heat,  and  heat  displaces 
the  cold,  and  life  is  continued. 

When  we  can  produce  vibrations  rapidly 
enough  to  act  on  the  tension,  then  we  can  have 
the  conducting  wire  luminous,  or  incandescent, 
without  heat.  These  vibrations  will  be  so  fine 
and  rapid  that  they  will  roll  in  waves  over  each 
other.  The  conductor  being  rigid,  these  vibra- 
tions will  range  from  one  million  to  hundreds  of 
millions  per  second.  These  vibrations  will  be  as 
continual  as  the  motion  of  the  earth.  They  will 
act  directly  on  the  tension  lines,  making  and 
breaking  them  at  every  vibration.  They  will  be 
in  harmony    with   Nature   and   Nature's  laws. 


144  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

They  will  keep  the  space  around  the  conductor 
open — that  is,  the  tension  around  the  conductor 
will  be  so  disturbed  that  it  cannot  find  its  equi- 
librium, or  point  of  rest.  This  is  keeping  space 
open.  This  is  the  way  to  tap  the  ^reat  universal 
force  of  Nature.  This  is  the  pull  of  the  earth 
from  the  sun,  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 
square  inch.  This  is  our  magnetism,  electricity, 
attraction,  gravity,  and  cohesion,  all  combined  in 
one,  ready  for  man's  use.  Now,  when  we  tap  one 
square  inch  of  this  force,  we  will  have  more  than 
ten  thousand  tons  at  our  command.  Think  of 
the  possibilities  with  this  great  force.  Will  there 
be  anything  impossible  to  us?  We  will  have 
light,  heat,  and  power  for  a  mere  trifle  of  ex- 
pense. Every  man  can  be  his  own  boss  ;  he  can 
have  his  heat,  light,  and  power,  doing  his  own 
work,  and  selling  his  own  product.  It  will  not 
cost  him  much  for  food.  It  will  put  him  on  an 
equality  with  his  fellow-man.  Is  man  prepared 
for  this  great  change,  soon  to  take  place?  Can 
he  grasp  it,  or  comprehend  its  vastness  ? 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  145 


THE     TELEPHONE— ITS    USE, 

THE  telephone  is  a  reproduction  of  sound  by 
vibrations  on  the  di'aphragm  or  receiver. 
The  diaphragm  resists  the  vibrations,  holding  or 
concentrating  them.  The  wire  conductor  makes 
a  hole  in  space,  and  the  vibrations  are  a  dis- 
placement through  the  conductor  of  these  vibra- 
tions. When  we  speak  into  the  telephone,  this 
space  is  filled  with  the  tension  of  space,  the  dia- 
phragm reflects  these  words  the  same  as  a  mir- 
ror reflects  our  face,  but  the  words  are  reflected 
at  the  end  of  the  conductor — that  is,  the  words 
are  a  reproduction  of  the  sound  vibrations  spoken 
into  the  diaphragm.  It  is  the  mirror  for  reflect- 
ing words,  and  the  conductor  is  the  tube  for  the 
displacement  of  these  vibrations,  or  sound  words. 
The  air  around  the  diaphragm  resists  the  words, 
or  sound,  and  is  vibrated,  and  it  vibrates  the 
tension,  and  the  tension  displaces  these  vibra- 
tions, or  sound,  at  the  end  of  the  conductor. 

Every  vibration  produced  in  the  diaphragm 
displaces  a  vibration  of  the  same  quantity  at  the 
end  of  the  conductor.  These  vibrations  do  not 
travel;  it  is  a  displacement  of  the  quantity  ap- 
plied.    This  wire  tube  is  incased  in  the  tension, 


146  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

and  is  filled  with  it,  pressing  all  around  it,  more 
than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch.  This 
pressure  is  uniform  everywhere.  Now,  think  of 
this  great  pressure  around  this  wire.  How  could 
we  move  it  by  applying  the  same  force  to  it? 
There  is  no  room  for  this  force  that  fills  all  space; 
it  is  already  full,  and  can  hold  no  more.  The 
wire  is  the  hole,  or  tube,  through  space  for  dis- 
placing these  words,  sounds,  or  vibrations. 


FROM  DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  147 


A     TUNING-FORK,    AND    ITS    NATURE. 

IT  is  made  of  fine  steel,  in  order  to  be  very  sen- 
sitive to  sound  and  vibrations.  This  tuning- 
fork  occupies  a  portion  of  space.  The  tension  is 
in,  and  around,  and  through  its  atoms,  making 
it  rigid  and  elastic,  capable  of  bending  without 
breaking.  In  Nature  it  was  atoms,  then  heated 
and  melted,  combining  its  atoms.  The  heat  ex- 
pelled the  cold,  and  it  became  liquid.  The  heat 
then  removed,  and  the  cold  compressed  or  forced 
it  into  a  solid,  and  combined  its  atoms.  The 
cold  tension  is  the  force  that  pressed  around  it 
in  cooling,  shrinking  it  into  a  smaller  space  than 
when  in  a  liquid  form,  thus  making  it  sensitive 
and  in  harmony  with  the  tension  of  space.  The 
fork  is  then  hammered,  and  tempered,  and 
finished,  and  gives  out  sound  by  vibrating  on  the 
air.  The  air  resists  these  vibrations,  and  vibrates 
the  tension  in  the  fork,  and  the  fork  resists  these 
vibrations,  and  transmits  them  to  the  air  and 
tension  around  it,  and  they  transmit  it  into 
space. 

The  tuning-fork  is  inclosed  in  the  tension, 
being  part  and  parcel  of  it,  and  it  can  vibrate 
only  through  the  tension  and  air.     The  tension 


148  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

is  the  medium  for  conducting,  or  producing, 
the  sound.  The  air  resists,  and  is  vibrated  and 
put  in  motion,  and  carries  the  sound  waves  or 
vibrations. 


FROM  DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  149 


THE   COPPER  WIRE   AS   A   CONDUCTOR, 

OR  MAGNETIC   CIRCUIT  OF 

ELECTRICITY. 

THE  wire  makes  a  hole  through  space,  and  the 
quantity  applied  displaces  the  same  quan- 
-tity  at  the  other  pole,  or  end  of  the  wire,  or  con- 
ductor. 

For  every  vibration  produced  by  the  battery, 
it  displaces  a  vibration  of  the  same  quantity  at 
the  other  end  of  the  circuit.  The  tension  of 
space  is  in,  around,  and  through  the  wire,  to  the 
pressure  of  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch. 
The  wire  is  the  dividing  line  of  this  great  force, 
and  is  filled  with  it.  The  vibrations  act  on  the 
pressure  in  the  wire,  and  displace  the  quantity 
applied.  The  tension  is  the  cold  pressure  of 
space,  and  the  wire  is  filled  with  it,  and  the 
vibrations  that  we  apply  are  a  product  of  heat. 
This  quantity  of  heat  displaces  the  same  quan- 
tity of  cold  through  the  conductor. 

When  the  tension  in  the  conductor  is  vibrated, 
it  is  put  in  motion,  and  the  pressure  outside  the 
conductor  presses  into  it,  and  produces  the  cir- 
cuit. When  the  current  is  passing  through  the 
conductor,  the   inside  of  the  conductor  is  all  in 


150  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

vibration,  and  the  pressure  outside  is  more  or 
less  disturbed.  If  the  current  is  of  a  high  pres- 
sure the  vibrations  of  the  current  in  the  wire 
are  imparted  to  the  tension  around  the  wire, 
causing  induction,  or  induced  eddies,  or  vortices, 
or  waste  of  energy  or  force.  The  air  is  the  re- 
sisting medium  of  all  the  phenomena  above. 


FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  151 


THE    BRAIN. 

THE  brain  is  protected  by  the  skull,  Nature 
being  wise  in  all  her  works.  This  brain  is  a 
delicate  ganglion  mass  of  nerves,  coiled  in  re- 
ceptacles, and  protected  from  contact  with  the 
air.  This  brain  is  like  a  central  telegraph  sta- 
tion. These  wires  are  distributed  all  through 
the  city,  conducting  or  carrying  messages.  Every 
wire  is  in  communication  with  some  house,  and 
our  thoughts  are  carried  on  these  wires,  and  our 
wishes  or  desires  granted.  The  person  at  the 
head  of  this  station  is  in  communication  with  all 
these  people  in  these  houses,  and  supplies  their 
wants  through  these  wires.  Now,  the  brain  is 
the  central  station  for  communicating  with  the 
body.  The  nerves  are  the  conductors,  or  wires, 
for  carrying  the  messages  through  all  parts  of 
this  body  ;  and  if  any  of  these  nerves  are  out  of 
order,  it  informs  the  brain,  and  the  brain,  through 
the  muscles  of  the  body,  tries  to  repair  these 
nerves.  Every  nerve  throughout  the  body  is 
connected  with  the  brain,  through  the  spinal 
column.  The  nerves  are  insulated,  or  separated, 
from  each  other  by  a  liquid,  or  lubrication.  A 
needle  applied  to  any  part  of  the  body  could  not 


152  FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

find  a  place  without  a  nerve.  Now,  the  brain 
has  to  guard  and  watch  over  all  these  nerves, 
and  keep  them  in  harmony.  How  could  all 
these  delicate  nerves  act  or  do  any  work  on  them- 
selves? They  being  a  soft  mass  of  matter,  they 
must  be  incased,  or  floating  in  some  great  force, 
finer  and  more  sensitive  than  themselves.  Every 
square  inch  of  this  body  is  acting  on  a  force  of 
more  than  ten  thousand  tons.  This  is  the  tension 
or  pull  between  the  sun  and  earth. 

This  is  the  great  force  that  the  brain  acts  on. 
When  the  brain  thinks,  it  vibrates  some  of  its 
nerves,  and  they  vibrate  the  tension  within  them. 
This  vibrating  nerve  has  acted  on  and  disturbed 
a  force  of  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 
square  inch.  Now,  the  brain  is  continually  act- 
ing on  this  force.  All  the  millions  of  little 
nerves  of  each  organ  of  the  brain  are  floating  in 
this  force.  This  tension  keeps  the  brain  in  equi- 
librium, it  being  an  equalizer  of  force;  it  is  not 
compressible  or  movable.  Vibrations  are  the 
only  actions  that  can  act  on  this  tension.  The 
vibrations  cross  its  lines  and  disturb  it.  These 
vibrations  must  be  very  fine  to  act  on  it.  Tiie 
brain  thinking,  is  working.  The  nerves  are  ex- 
ercised and  produce  heat,  and  the  heat  vibrates 
the  tension,  and  stimulates  the  brain.  A  thought 
is  an  action,  or  work  done  by  the  brain  on  the 
nerves  through   the   tension   throughout  space. 


FROM   DAKg?gLJ.3    ligTClGHT.  lod 

All  these  little  nerves  have  different  quantities 
of  vibrations,  ranging  from  hundreds  to  hun- 
dreds of  millions  per  second.  These  ranges  of 
vibrations  do  not  interfere  with  each  other,  they 
travel  on  their  own  lines  in  perfect  harmon}^ 

Now,  if  two  brains  were  in  perfect  harmony 
with  each  other,  they  could  communicate  with 
each  other  through  their  brains.  Their  thoughts 
would  be  in  harmony  with  the  tension  connect- 
ing them.  They  would  be  like  two  magnets  in 
perfect  circuit.  They  would  be  two  minds  in 
one.  This  tension  is  very  sensitive,  when  a 
thought  can  act  on  it  and  disturb  it. 

Why  should  Nature  make  a  body  and  brain 
all  of  nervous  matter,  if  it  did  not  have  some 
sensitive  force  to  act  on  ?  Nature  never  makes  a 
mistake  in  her  work.  Man  makes  many,  for  he 
does  not  live  in  harmony  with  Nature,  and  he 
must  not  blame  Nature  for  his  mistakes.  We 
find  all  animals  and  insects  of  a  nervous  struc- 
ture. Their  nerves  are  the  resistance  coils. 
They  act  on  the  tension  within  them,  and  vibrate 
it,  and  they  produce  heat  and  cause  the  circula- 
tion. This  circulation  is  like  the  magnet,  with 
the  additional  fluid  or  blood.  Everything  that 
has  life  must  have  a  circulation.  That  is  what 
gives  them  life.  Heat  and  cold  are  the  two  active 
principles  of  force,  life,  and  motion,  and  they  are 
the  medium  for  producing  the  circulation.     The 


154  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

cold   enters  the  body  and   becomes  heated,  ex- 
pands, and  is  pulled  out  by  the  cold.     The  body 
is  continually  making  heat,  and  the  heat  is  con- 
tinually displacing  the  cold.     As  soon  as  the  cold 
enters  the  body,  it  is  heated  and  drawn  off  by 
the  air.      The  heat    and    cold  are   continually 
changing  places,  trying  to  find  their  equilibrium, 
or  point  of  rest,  through  the  body,  and  the  body 
is  continually   resisting   their  efforts,   and  that 
keeps  up  the  circulation  and  life  action.     The  in- 
terchange of  heat  and  cold  through  the  body  is 
like  the  making  and  breaking  of  the  poles  of  a 
magnet.     They  are  disturbing  the  lines  of  force. 
The  fluids  in  circulation  through  the  body  retain 
the  heat,  making  it  uniform  in  the  body.     The 
cold  outside  the  body  is  constantly  pressing  all 
around  it,  trying  to  find  an  entrance,  and  as  fast 
as  the  heat  is  generated  in  the  body  the  cold  ab- 
sorbs it. 


FKOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  155 


THE   PRESENT    DYNAMO— ITS   NATURE. 

THE  MAGNET — SOFT  IRON,  ITS  NATURE. 

IT  occupies  a  certain  form  in  space.  It  may  be 
solid  or  made  of  pieces.  Winding  the  magnet 
incloses  its  limbs,  as  if  in  a  tube  or  cylinder,  the 
coils  being  wound  close  together  in  cases.  The 
iron,  under  stress,  strain,  or  tension,  if  wound 
cold,  and  heat  be  applied  to  the  magnet,  it 
would  expand  and  almost  burst  the  coils.  Now, 
knowing  of  the  tension  in  space,  the  magnet 
being  in  that  tension,  holds  it  at  rest,  or  under 
normal  stress,  the  same  as  air  pressure.  We 
move  through  the  air  and  do  not  feel  it,  yet  it 
permeates  everything  on  the  earth.  Now,  the 
tension  being  uniform  through  space  inside  of 
the  magnet  and  outside,  the  molecules,  or  atoms, 
of  the  magnet  are  pressed  together  to  such  an 
extent  as  to  almost  exclude  the  tension  within  it. 
This  causes  a  great  pressure  around  every  atom 
of  the  magnet  or  iron.  This  strain  is  normal  at 
rest,  but  when  vibrated  the  lines  of  strain  be- 
come separated  and  disturbed.  The  lines  inside 
of  the  magnet  are  in  vibration,  and  the  outer 
lines  are  pressing  against  the  surface  of  the  mag- 


156  FROM   DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

net,  trying  to  find  their  equilibrium  through  it. 
Therefore,  the  inside  of  the  magnet  being  in  a 
vibratory  condition,  the  outside  tension  presses 
into  the  magnet ;  that  is,  in  at  one  pole  and  out 
at  the  other,  thus  forming  a  circuit,  or  equilib- 
rium, or  point  of  rest,  the  armature,  or  coil,  being 
wound  around  the  limbs  of  the  magnet.  The 
tension  or  current  is  applied  to  the  coils,  or  arma- 
ture, of  the  magnet.  This  vibrates  the  tension 
in  the  wire,  and  the  wire  vibrates  the  tension  in 
the  magnet,  and  the  lines  of  tension  are  dis- 
turbed. This  action  continued  makes  and 
breaks  its  equilibrium,  and  the  pressure  on  the 
outside  presses  into  one  pole  and  out  the  other, 
thus  forming  a  circuit,  or  equilibrium.  The 
pressure  outside  being  constant,  pressing  against 
the  surface  of  the  magnet,  the  tension  inside  the 
magnet  being  in  vibration,  gives  way  to  the  ten- 
sion of  the  outside,  and  produces  the  flow,  or 
circuits.  Once  the  coil  around  the  magnet  be- 
comes charged  or  vibratory,  it  imparts  it  to  the 
magnet,  and  sets  it  in  vibration,  and  these  vibra- 
tions are  the  magnetic  pull  or  tension.  When 
the  magnet  vibrates,  it  disturbs  the  lines  of  the 
tension  from  the  outside,  thus  causing  the  flow, 
or  circuit. 

THE   DYNAMO   ARMATURE, 

R-otating  between  the  poles  of  the  magnet,  makes 
and  breaks  the  tensions,  or  magnetic  lines.     The 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  157 

copper  wire  for  winding  the  armature  is  placed 
so  as  to  make  and  break  the  lines  of  tension.  In 
rotating,  the  ends  of  the  wires  pass  into  the  com- 
mutator bars,  connecting  them  with  the  brushes, 
or  conductors,  for  distribution. 

Now,  let  us  see  what  the  dynamo  is.  At  rest, 
it  is  inert.  It  is  simply  a  mass  of  metal — no 
life,  no  action,  no  motion,  and  no  vibrations, 
simply  occupying  a  portion  of  space.  All  the 
space  this  machine  occupies  is  filled  with  the 
pull  or  tension  of  space.  The  lines  pass  down 
through  its  mass,  regardless  of  material.  These 
lines  are  like  sun  lines.  Let  these  sun  lines  pass 
through  an  opening  into  a  dark  room ;  then  ex- 
amine the  fineness  of  these  lines.  Put  a  piece  of 
glass  tlirough  them,  and  try  to  break  them,  and 
you  will  have  an  idea  of  the  lines  of  tension. 
This  tension  passes  through  everything,  as  the 
sun  passes  through  the  glass. 

The  armature  occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and 
the  tension  is  in  that  space  at  rest.  The  wire  in- 
closes the  tension  within  it,  thus  confining  it; 
and,  when  rotated,  these  lines  are  disturbed,  or 
forced  out  into  the  commutator's  bars,  they  being 
the  continuation  of  these  lines.  The  brushes,  or 
conductors,  form  a  broken  circuit  through  the 
commutators.  Now,  this  circuit  of  brushes,  in 
close  relation  to  the  commutator  bars,  disturbs 
and  breaks  the  lines  of  tension  in  the  space.    The 


158  FROM   DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

armature  rotation  between  the  poles  of  the  mag- 
net disturbs  and  agitates  the  circuit  between 
them.  Now,  all  this  space  that  the  armature 
and  commutators  occupy  are  in  rotation,  disturb- 
ing the  tension  inside  and  outside.  All  the 
space  is  thrown  out  of  equilibrium  by  the  mass 
in  motion.  The  tension  in  the  wire  of  the  arma- 
ture is  disturbed,  and  heat  is  generated,  and  cir- 
culation produced.  This  circulation  passes  out 
into  the  commutators,  and  the  commutators,  ro- 
tating between  the  conductors  or  circuit,  disturb 
these  lines,  and  electricity  is  the  result  of  the 
disturbances  or  vibrations — for  all  this  motion  is 
vibratory.  The  molecules  of  air  inclose  the  ten- 
sion within  them,  and  when  they  are  disturbed, 
they  vibrate  the  tension  inside  and  outside. 
This  causes  great  commotion  in  this  space ;  for 
the  molecules  of  air  are  seeking  an  equilibrium, 
or  point  of  rest,  but  the  armature  rotating  will 
not  let  them  rest.  The  conductors  in  circuit  are 
disturbed  by  the  commutators  rotating  between 
them.  This  is  where  space  is  thrown  out  of 
equilibrium,  and  this  action  is  imparted  to  all 
the  space  the  wire  of  the  circuit  occupies. 

The  disturbances  by  the  armature  and  com- 
mutator rotating  between  the  poles  of  the  mag- 
net, are  equalized  through  the  conductors,  or 
brushes.  This  disturbance  is  seeking  an  equi- 
librium, or  point  of  rest,  but  this  it  cannot  find 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  159 

— for  the  rotating  mass  breaks  the  equilibrium 
of  this  space,  producing,  or  causing,  a  partial 
vacuum  on  one  side  and  a  pressure  on  the  other  ; 
and  they  try  to  become  equalized,  and  this  keeps 
up  the  battle,  and  the  struggle  goes  on.  The 
wire  in  circuit  is  a  hole  in  space,  and  these  pres- 
sures seek  an  equilibrium  through  this  hole,  or 
tube;  and  if  we  break  this  circuit,  we  destroy 
the  effect.  But  if  we  connect  this  circuit  to  some 
iron,  or  magnet,  it  will  find  an  equilibrium  in  it. 
That  is,  the  space  that  the  armature's  commu- 
tators occupy  is  disturbed  and  thrown  out  of 
equilibrium,  and  it  tries  to  find  and  equalize 
this  disturbance  through  the  conductors.  This 
is  similar  to  placing  two  barrels  on  a  level,  and 
connecting  them  with  iron  pipes,  filling  one  bar- 
rel with  water.  This  will  become  equalized  in 
the  other ;  and  if  we  still  connect  another  bar- 
rel in  the  same  way,  the  water  will  flow  through 
the  pipes,  and  the  three  barrels  will  contain 
about  the  same  quantity.  They  have  found 
their  equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest;  and  if  we 
continue  supplying  the  first  barrel  with  water, 
it  will  flow  into  the  other  two  until  they  are 
filled.  The  water  travels,  or  moves,  through  the 
pipes ;  but  electricity  does  not  travel.  Every- 
thing is  filled  with  it;  and  when  it  is  disturbed, 
or  vibrated,  in  circuit,  it  finds  its  equilibrium  at 
the  point  of  disturbance.     This  point  is  where 


160  FROM  DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

the  circuit  is  broken  or  open.  "We  will  fill 
two  barrels  with  water,  connecting  them 
with  an  iron  pipe.  In  the  center  of  the 
pipe  we  have  a  union.  The  pipes  are  connected 
to  the  bottoms  of  the  barrels.  We  procure  a  cor- 
rugated hollow  cylinder,  with  bearings  and  pul- 
leys, ready  to  connect  to  the  engine.  We  discon- 
nect the  pipe  in  the  center,  and  fit  them  into  the 
face  of  the  cylinder.  Now,  these  pipes  will  fit 
close  against  the  corrugations,  and  as  the  cylin- 
der moves,  the  recessed  corrugations  will  allow 
the  water  to  flow  out,  and  the  raised  corruga- 
tions will  close,  or  shut  ofi",  the  water,  acting  as  a 
valve. 

Now,  this  cylinder  in  the  center  of  the  circuit 
cuts  it  off,  breaking  it.  We  will  start  the  engine, 
and  put  the  cylinder  in  motion,  and  watch  the 
result.  The  two  barrels  supply  the  pressure, 
through  the  pipes,  to  the  face  of  the  cylinder, 
and  the  cylinder  resists  their  pressure ;  and  as 
the  cylinder  revolves,  it  disturbs  the  circulation, 
or  flow,  of  the  water,  continually  making  and 
breaking  the  flow  through  the  pipes.  The  water 
in  the  barrels  and  pipes,  as  the  cylinder  rotates, 
is  in  motion,  or  momentum,  and  this  momentum 
is  suddenly  arrested.  The  barrels  feel  the  shock, 
and  the  cylinder  feels  the  shock,  and  these  shocks 
are  continuous.  All  the  weight  of  water  in  the 
barrels  is  acting  against  the  cylinder,  and  the 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO   LIGHT.  161 

cylinder  is  disturbing  the  circuit  of  the  water. 
The  water  is  seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  a  point 
of  rest,  but  the  cylinder  will  not  allow  the  water 
to  rest. 

Now,  if  these  barrels  were  separated  for  sev- 
eral miles,  the  pipes  would  contain  a  great  weight 
of  water,  and  if  this  weight  was  arrested  of  its 
momentum  ten  thousand  times  in  a  minute,  it 
would  represent  a  great  force,  or  power.  The 
water  being  arrested  of  its  momentum  suddenly, 
would  be  solid  and  as  rigid  as  steel,  and  would 
pound  against  the  cylinder  and  barrels  with 
great  force ;  but  if  these  pipes  contained  ten 
thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch,  how  could  they 
be  kept  open  or  closed  ?  What  cylinder  could 
resist  the  pressure  ? 

Let  these  barrels  represent  the  earth  and  sun, 
and  the  pipe  one  square  inch  of  space  from  the 
sun  to  the  earth ;  this  would  have  to  sustain  about 
ten  thousand  tons.  Now,  could  our  pipes  hold 
this  pressure,  and  could  our  cylinder  resist,  or 
make  and  break,  this  circuit?  And  if  it  could, 
we  would  be  acting  on  and  disturbing  more  than 
ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch  ;  and  if  we 
disturbed  this  weight  ten  thousand  times  a 
minute,  the  earth,  and  sun,  and  pipe,  would  feel 
the  shock  at  the  same  instant,  for  this  pipe  would 
be  as  rigid  as  steel,  and  anything  that  would 
disturb  the  equilibrium  of  the  pipe,  would  dis- 


162  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

turb  the  equilibrium  of  the  sun  and  earth,  for 
the  pipe  would  be  in  connection  with  the  two 
bodies.     This  is  equal  to  the  tension  of  space. 


FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  163 


POWER  OF   MIND    OVER   MIND,   OR  AN 

ACTIVE  OR  STRONG  BRAIN  OVER 

A  WEAK  BRAIN. 

THE  active  brain  is  vibrating  on  the  tension. 
Its  nerves  are  tough  and  muscular  from  ex- 
ercise by  thought  and  study.  These  nerves  are 
vibrating  on  the  tension  more  than  ten  thousand 
tons  to  the  square  inch,  and  as  these  nerves  are 
weaker  or  stronger,  so  will  they  be  able  to  act  on, 
or  utilize,  this  force.  The  weak  brain's  nerves 
are  soft  and  delicate,  for  the  want  of  exercise,  and 
are  subject  to  impressions ;  it  not  having  confi- 
dence in  itself,  and  not  being  able  to  utilize  this 
force  as  the  stronger  brain  does. 

Now,  these  two  brains  are  acting  on  the  same 
force,  disturbing  it ;  but  the  strong  brain  acts  on 
and  disturbs  this  force  more,  and  oftener,  than 
the  weak  brain.  Now,  the  weak  brain  cannot 
compete  with  the  strong  brain.  It  is  too  power- 
ful for  it,  and  it  must  submit,  or  give  way,  to  the 
stronger  force.  Now,  the  active  brain  has  sub- 
dued the  weaker,  and  has  control  over  it,  and 
can  command  it  at  will  of  mind  to  obey  this 
will,  and  the  weaker  brain  cannot  resist  this  will, 
or  command,  for  it  has  no  will  of  its  own.     The 


164  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

strong  brain  having  conquered  the  weaker,  the 
weaker  becomes  a  slave  to  the  stronger.  This  is 
like  trying  to  make  a  weak  man  do  as  much 
work  as  a  stronger  one.  The  man  that  is  in  the 
habit  of  working  at  muscular  work  will  not  get 
tired,  for  his  muscular  system  is  used  to  it ;  and 
if  a  weak,  delicate  man,  who  is  not  used  to  hard 
work,  is  put  alongside  of  this  strong  man,  he 
will  soon  subdue  him.  Muscles  subdue  muscles, 
and  mind  subdues  mind.  The  strong  man  has 
subdued  the  weak  one,  like  the  strong  brain  con- 
quering the  weaker  one.  Now,  this  strong  brain 
has  control  over  the  weak  one,  and  can  influence 
and  control  its  thoughts,  for  the  two  brains  are 
in  circuit  through  the  tension,  and  their  thoughts 
can  be  imparted  to  each  other.  The  stronger 
having  the  weaker  under  its  influence,  it  can 
know  what  it  is  thinking  of,  and  can  compel  it 
to  think  as  it  does.  This  is  mental  work,  or  ex- 
ercise of  the  nerves  of  the  brain.  The  more  the 
brain  is  used,  the  stronger  and  larger  the  nerves 
become.  This  is  the  same  as  the  muscles  of  the 
body.  If  we  do  not  use  or  exercise  our  muscles, 
they  will  become  soft  and  flabby,  and  the  more 
we  use  them  the  stronger  and  tougher  they  be- 
come, and  the  less  difiicult  it  is  to  do  the  work 
in  their  lines,  once  they  have  become  used  to 
this  work.  But  once  the  strong  brain  gets  the 
weaker  under  its  control,  the  latter  cannot  resist 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  165 

its  influence.  These  two  brains  are  acting  on 
the  same  force.  They  are  united  in  it,  and  can- 
not get  out  of  it,  and  the  strong  brain  wills 
the  weak  one  to  do  or  think  something.  The 
weak  cannot  resist  this  will,  for  the  weaker  has 
no  will  only  as  the  stronger  wills  or  commands 
it.  These  two  brains  and  bodies  have  grown  up 
on  this  tension,  or  force.  They  are  all  a  nervous 
matter  in  this  tension,  and  the  larger  and  more 
active  these  nerves  are  the  more  they  can  act  on 
and  disturb  this  force.  This  disturbance  is 
seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest,  but  the 
strong  brain  will  not  let  it  rest,  and  it  seeks  rest 
in  the  weaker  brain,  for  it  cannot  resist  this  force 
that  is  forced  into  it,  and  it  ^ives  way  to  the 
greater  force.  This  forms  the  circuit  and  equi- 
librium, for  the  weaker  offers  no  resistance  to  the 
stronger. 

This  will  explain  all  the  phenomena  of  mind- 
reading,  hypnotism,  theosophy,  and  all  phe- 
nomena in  regard  to  mind  over  mind,  and  mind 
over  matter.  The  nerves  of  the  brain  are  what 
we  call  matter.  This  matter  is  acting  on  mind. 
This  mind  means  all  the  universe — illimitable 
space  with  all  the  planetary  system  throughout 
that  space.  Mind  is  that  vast,  endless  space,  and 
when  the  brain  thinks  it  disturbs  all  that  space, 
for  all  that  space  is  solid  and  beyond  our  com- 
prehension, and  all  matter  is  a  condensation  in 


166  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

this  solid  tension,  for  we  cannot  find  any  matter 
that  this  solid  tension  cannot  crush  or  vaporize, 
when  sufficient  heat  or  cold  is  applied  to  it. 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  167 


WHAT  IS  MESMERISM  AND  ITS  CAUSE? 
—A  WEAK  AND  A  STRONG  BRAIN. 

THE  strong  brain  wills  the  weaker  one  to  do 
something.  It  must  obey  this  will,  or  com- 
mand, for  it  has  no  will  of  its  own.  Now,  the 
strong  brain  wills  the  weaker  to  close  its  eyes 
and  answer  all  the  questions  that  the  stronger 
brain  may  choose  to  ask.  The  organs  in  the 
weak  brain  have  no  power  or  control  over  them- 
selves. They  are  obeying  the  will  of  the  strong 
brain,  and  they  cannot  resist  this  will. 

The  organs  in  the  strong  brain  are  under  great 
strain,  for  all  their  nerves  are  in  the  tension  and 
vibrating  rapidly,  exerting  great  force.  This 
force  is  equalized  in  the  weak  brain,  subduing  it. 
This  forms  a  circuit,  or  circulation,  between  the 
two  brains,  and  the  force  exerted  in  the  strong 
brain  finds  its  equilibrium  in  the  weaker  brain. 
This  relieves  the  strong  brain  of  its  over- work, 
or  exertion,  and  the  weak  brain  is  a  receptacle 
for  this  over-work,  and  this  is  the  over-work  that 
is  propelling  the  weak  brain,  and  it  must  obey 
this  force. 

Now,  the  body  is  moving  in  a  pressure  of  ten 
thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch,  but  there  is  no 


168  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

resistance  to  the  motion  of  the  body  through  this 
force.      The    body   is    like    a    shadow    moving 
through  the  tension.     The  heat  inside  the  body 
is  about  ninety -six  degrees  above  zero,  and  the 
temperature   around   the  body   is   about   sixty. 
These  two  conditions  are  pressing  against  each 
other.     Tliey  are  trying  to  become  equalized. 
They  are  seeking  a  point  of  rest,  but  the  heat  in 
the   body  will   not   let   the   cold  around  it  rest. 
TMs  is  what  keeps  up  the  circulation  of  heat  and 
cold  through  the  body.     This  keeps  the  tension 
in  the  body  in  vibration,  and  the  matter  resists 
these  vibrations,  and  heat  is  generated.     This 
heat  expands  all  the  fluids,  keeping  up  the  cir- 
culation of  the  blood.     The  circulation   of   the 
blood  is  like  the  circulation  of  the  magnet.     It 
is  an  interchange  of  heat  and  cold  through  the 
tension.     This  body  is  standing  in  a  force  of  ten 
thousand   tons   to   the  square   inch.     This  is  a 
uniform  pressure  through  this  body,  but  the  in- 
side of  the  body  is  all  in  vibration,  disturbing 
the  equilibrium  of  this  space,  and  the  pressure 
on  the  outside  is  constantly  pressing  against  this 
vibrating  body,  keeping  up  the  life  of  this  body. 
This  will  apply  to  everything  that  has  life  or 
form,  for  everything  that  has  form  must  have 
heat,  and  heat  gives  life  to  everything.     As  long 
as  the  body  can  maintain  this  heat,  it  can  con- 
tinue life,  for  this  heat    keeps   the   tension   in 


FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  169 

vibration,  disturbing  the  space  within  this  body, 
imparting  life  to  it ;  but  when  the  vibrations 
cease,  death  ensues.  The  body  ceases  to  breathe, 
and  the  cold  tension  around  the  body  takes  pos- 
session of  it,  and  it  is  rigid  and  at  rest.  The 
cold  has  found  its  equilibrium  and  point  of  rest 
in  the  body,  and  there  is  no  more  action,  circula- 
tion, or  life. 

Now,  this  body  came  from  seeds,  and  these  seeds 
combined,  and  a  body  grew  from  them.  These 
seeds  gradually  expanded,  occupying  more  space, 
maturing  and  developing  into  a  body.  This  was 
Nature's  way  of  building  up  a  body.  Every- 
thing must  grow  up  in  the  tension.  Nothing 
can  get  into  this  tension  only  by  growing  up  in 
it.  This  growth  does  not  add  anything  to  the 
earth  mass.  It  is  only  a  condensed  matter  of 
the  gases  that  are  now  on  the  earth.  These  gases 
cannot  be  added  to  or  diminished.  They  are  in- 
destructible, and  circulate  through  the  earth  and 
air,  and  all  bodies  grow  from  these  gases  by  con- 
densation. This  is  the  earth's  circulation.  Now, 
these  gases  feed  all  animal  and  vegetable  life. 
They  grow  up  and  decay,  forming  a  gas.  This 
gas  mixes  with  the  air,  and  all  other  gases,  and 
is  condensed  into  rain,  and  falls  on  the  earth  to 
build  up  more  bodies.  This  is  Nature's  simple 
circulation.  This  body,  in  the  process  of  growth 
and  maturity,  filled  no  space  in  this  tension.     It 


170  FROM   DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

was  only  a  condensation  of  gases.  All  these 
gases  are  divided  into  atoms.  So  the  body  is 
built  up  of  atoms.  Now,  these  atoms  are  inde- 
structible and  everlasting,  and  this  body  grew  up 
in  this  tension,  imprisoned  in  it,  and  it  cannot 
get  out  of  it  as  long  as  it  has  form  or  action  ;  but 
as  soon  as  the  body  ceases  action  the  change  be- 
gins. The  body  now  offers  a  resistance  to  the 
circulation  of  the  tension,  and  heat  is  generated 
in  its  mass,  for  the  body  is  now  one  mass  of  inert 
matter.  All  this  matter  is  the  atoms.  These 
atoms  cannot  liberate  themselves  in  this  cold 
condition,  but  the  matter  begins  to  ferment. 
This  is  heat,  and  this  heat  liberates  all  the  atoms, 
forming  a  gas.  Now,  the  body,  or  atoms,  has  got 
out  of  the  tension  through  the  gas,  but  the  form 
remains  where  the  body  was.  They  are  now 
separated  from  the  tension. 

Now,  the  body  grew  up  from  atoms,  or  gas. 
These  atoms  consolidated  and  formed  the  body. 
All  these  atoms  have  life  and  circulation,  and 
are  condensed  into  the  body,  and  the  body  can 
separate  these  atoms,  or  get  out  of  the  ten- 
sion, only  by  going  back  into  the  condition  it 
came  from  into  atoms.  The  tension  in  the  body 
can  be  made  larger  or  smaller  only  by  heat  or 
cold;  but  as  the  gases  are  liberated  by  the  heat 
generated  by  the  fermentation,  they  mix  with 
the  air,  and   are  carried  up   into   the   cold-air 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  171 

space  and  condensed  into  the  rain  to  fertilize  the 
soil  of  the  earth.  The  gases  that  have  evapor- 
ated from  this  body  have  not  disturbed  or  de 
stroyed  the  tension  that  the  body  occupied.  The 
gases  left  the  tension  intact.  It  cannot  be  moved 
only  by  the  body  that  occupies  and  that  has  the 
use  of  it  as  long  as  it  can  act  on  or  utilize  it. 
Now,  all  these  atoms  that  formed  this  body  were 
in  the  tension,  part  and  parcel  of  it,  but  having 
a  form.  These  atoms  were  of  different  families, 
that  is,  different  gases;  and  these  gases  com- 
bined to  build  a  body.  These  atoms  were  not 
made,  they  have  always  existed,  and  they  con- 
dense into  other  bodies,  but  not  in  a  mass.  They 
are  separated  by  the  air,  and  circulate  through 
it,  and  are  deposited  on  the  earth  and  produce 
vegetation,  and  the  animal  feeds  on  this  vegeta- 
tion, maintaining  life  and  motion.  Now,  thia 
vegetation  is  the  atoms,  or  gases  condensed  into 
them,  and  the  animal  feeding  on  this  vegetation, 
or  gases,  condenses  them  into  the  animal,  and 
the  bodies  grow  up  and  mature  on  them.  Now, 
the  body  is  composed  of  atoms  and  the  tension. 
The  atoms  are  heat,  and  the  tension  is  the  one 
and  only  force  filling  all  space  and  matter.  So 
the  matter  of  the  body  is  heat,  and  the  tension  is 
cold.  These  two  giants  are  continually  fighting 
for  the  place,  and  this  fighting  is  what  gives  life 
to  all  bodies.     This  is  a  mutual  fight  to  produce 


172  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

life.  It  is  not  as  man  may  fight.  It  is  Nature's 
fight  to  maintain  life.  We  find  the  body  is  heat. 
This  heat  has  to  resist,  or  fight,  the  cold  ten- 
sion of  space.  This  action,  continued,  maintains 
life  in  all  matter,  for  all  matter  has  heat  and  life 
in  it. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  173 


WHAT  TAKES  PLACE  IN  A  BODY  AFTER 
DEATH? 

THIS  body  is  what  we  call  matter.  This  mat- 
ter is  condensed  gases,  or  atoms.  These 
atoms,  or  gases,  can  separate  and  dissolve  out  of 
this  body,  or  the  space  it  occupied.  The  tension 
is  in  this  body  at  rest.  This  is  the  space  the 
body  occupied.  This  body  gradually  dissolves 
into  gas,  going  back  into  what  it  came  from. 
This  dissolution  does  not  disturb  the  tension  of 
this  body,  for  it  grew  up  in  it,  and  can  get 
out  of  it  only  by  evaporation,  or  separation  of 
the  gases,  or  atoms. 

Now,  the  matter  of  this  body  does  not  rot  or 
decay,  going  into  nothing.  This  decay  is  a  puri- 
fication by  fermentation,  liberating  all  the  gases, 
giving  them  freedom  to  go  off  and  condense  into 
some  other  body  or  matter.  All  these  gases  mix 
with  the  air,  and  become  purified  and  condensed 
into  rain,  and  fall  on  the  earth,  to  build  up  more 
matter  and  bodies.  These  gases  cannot  be  de- 
stroyed, or  burned  up.  They  are  indestructible, 
like  all  other  matter  or  gases. 

Now,  these  gases  consolidated,  and  a  body 
grew  from  them.     This  body  had  life  and  mo- 


174  FROM   DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

tion,  for  these  gases  formed  a  body,  and  this 
body  was  the  tension,  part  and  parcel  of  it,  giv- 
ing it  life  and  motion,  but  the  gases  condensed 
into  this  body,  giving  it  form.     This  form  held 
the  tension  within  it,  and  the  form  resisted  the 
circulation  of  this  tension,  and  life  is  produced 
in  it.     Now,   we  cannot  understand   how  this 
body  was  made,  for  we  find  that  all  the  matter 
or  material   that  this  body  is  composed  of  has 
existed,  and  there  is  nothing  made,  or  nothing 
destroyed.     This  is  Nature's  simple  circulation. 
All  the  resources  for  building  up  bodies,  or  mat- 
ter, are  here  existing,  and  everything  must  grow 
up  from  this  by  condensation.     This  condensa- 
tion is  a  slow  work  of   Nature,  and  is  accom- 
plished by  depositing  atom  by  atom,  to  build  up 
the    body,  or   matter,    in   process    of    growth. 
Nature  is  never  in  a  hurry.     She  can  afford  to 
take  her  time,  for  she  does  her  work  well  and 
never  makes  a  mistake.     Can  Man  say  as  much  ? 
Now,  we  find  that  a  body  cannot  be  made,  or 
formed,  only  by  condensation  of  the  gases  of  the 
earth,   and  these  gases  are  indestructible  and 
everlasting,  as  the  tension  that  fills  all  space  and 
matter ;  and  we  find  that  nothing  can  be  made, 
generated,  or  produced,  for  ever^^thing  is  finished, 
and  cannot  be  destroyed.     We  simply  act  on  or 
utilize  the  conditions.     We  did  not  make,  gen- 
erate, or  produce.     Nature  left  none  of  her  work 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  175 

unfinished,  and  she  did  this  work  well,  with  wis- 
dom, intelligence,  and  reason.  Man  is  the  only 
being  that  criticises  this  work  of  Nature. 


'^^   Of  TH3     ^>^ 

:UiriVBR3ITr 


176  FROM  DARKNESS   TO  LIGHT, 


THE    SUN'S    HEAT. 

WE  say  that  the  sun  rises  in  the  east  and  sets 
in  the  west;  but  we  know  it  does  not  rise  or 
set.  Its  light  is  permanent;  but  the  earth,  revolv- 
ing in  space,  is  continually  offering  a  different  por- 
tion of  its  surface  to  the  sun.  This  surface  is  in 
direct  line  with  the  sun,  and  is  the  part  acted  on 
through  the  lines  of  tension.  These  lines  must 
be  vertical  to  cause  light  and  heat,  for  we  see  in 
summer  the  sun  directly  over  our  heads.  This 
is  the  time  we  are  directly  in  these  lines,  and 
offer  a  resistance  to  them,  and  we  feel  the  great 
heat,  and  say  it  comes  from  the  sun.  The  earth 
is  pulling  from  the  sun,  and  we  are  in  that  pull, 
offering  a  resistance  to  it,  and  heat  is  the  result, 
and  all  the  air  around  us  offers  a  resistance  to 
that  pull  and  is  heated,  and  it  heats  the  tension 
and  sets  it  in  vibration.  Now,  this  tension  is  all 
around  us,  and  is  a  pressure  of  more  than  ten 
thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch,  and  this  is  all 
disturbed  and  thrown  out  of  equilibrium  by  this 
heat,  and  this  space  is  trying  to  find  its  equilib- 
rium ;  but  the  vibrating  tension  caused  by  the 
heat  will  not  let  this  disturbed  space  rest,  and  we 
are  in  this  disturbed  space,  offering  a  resistance 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  177 

to  it,  and  its  free  action  and  circulation,  and  we 
feel  the  heat,  but  this  heat  is  from  the  disturbed 
space  around  us,  not  from  the  sun  ;  and  we  see 
the  heat  ascending  from  the  earth,  not  descend- 
ing from  the  sun.  Now,  if  the  heat  came  from 
the  sun,  it  would  press  down  against  the  earth 
with  great  force,  and  the  heat  of  the  earth  could 
not  ascend.  It  would  be  forced  back  against  the 
earth,  and  would  consume  it,  for  heat  expands 
and  presses  everything  from  it.  This  is  what  we 
call  repulsion.  This  would  repel  the  earth, 
forcing  it  away  from  the  sun.  Now,  two  heated 
bodies  could  not  pull  each  other  together  and 
maintain  their  heat.  There  could  be  no  circu- 
lation through  these  bodies  of  heat  and  cold. 
They  would  soon  become  exhausted,  and  lose 
their  heat,  form,  and  life,  and  disappear  in  space. 
Nature  does  her  work  well  and  intelligently,  with 
reason  and  wisdom,  and  never  makes  a  mistake. 
It  matters  not  how  we  may  interpret  her  work — 
it  does  not  alter  it.  Now,  every  atom  has  intel- 
ligence, wisdom,  and  reason  beyond  man's  con- 
ception, and  how  could  the  sun  and  earth,  built 
up  of  these  intelligent  atoms,  do  an  unintelli- 
gent or  unreasonable  thing,  or  break  a  universal 
and  intelligent  law  that  gives  them  life  ?  Now, 
we  find  all  bodies,  from  the  atom  to  the  earth, 
maintaining  their  own  heat  within  their  own 
bodies,  for  all  these  bodies  are  moving  and  float- 


178  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

ing  in  this  universal  mind  and  tension,  supply- 
ing all  these  bodies  with  all  the  necessaries  to 
maintain  their  life  and  motion. 

This  mind  that  these  bodies  are  moving  in  is 
all  the  universe,  illimitable  space,  with  all  the 
planetary  s^^^stem  throughout  that  endless  space. 
This  is  all  wisdom,  reason,  and  intelligence  com- 
t)ined  in  mind  and  force,  or  force  in  mind  ;  and 
how  could  this  wise  law  that  rules  all  this  vast 
universe,  keeping  everything  in  harmony  and 
imparting  life  to  it,  make  a  law  to  destroy 
itself  or  any  of  its  families?  It  is  not  reason- 
able to  assume  this,  and  all  Nature's  laws  and 
phenomena  are  reasonable,  and  comprehensible, 
and  easily  understood,  and  no  secrets  or  myste- 
ries in  them  ? 

The  secrets  and  mysteries  are  in  man,  not  in 
the  matter  composing  man,  not  in  the  law  that 
gives  him  life  and  motion.  These  mysteries  of 
man  are  for  his  own  selfish  purpose  of  gain,  or 
control  of  the  weak  and  ignorant,  making  slaves 
of  them.  Now,  if  the  heat  came  from  the  sun^ 
it  would  cover  the  whole  earth.  It  would  be 
forced  all  around  it,  and  there  would  be  no  cold 
places  in  it,  and  there  would  be  no  cold  places  on 
the  earth,  for  this  heat  would  press  into  every 
recess  in  the  earth,  from  the  north  to  the  south 
pole,  for  this  heat  coming  from  the  sun  would  be 
constant,  and  as  the  earth  would  revolve  towards 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  179 

the  east,  the  western  portion  of  the  earth  and 
air  would  be  masses  of  intense  heat,  for  this  heat 
forced  against  the  earth  would  seek  an  equilib- 
rium all  over  the  earth,  for  the  air  would  form 
this  equilibrium.  Our  nights  would  be  nights 
of  intense  heat,  for  the  heat  forced  from  the  sun 
on  to  the  earth  would  press  around  and  upon 
the  night  side  of  the  earth,  keeping  the  earth  in 
perpetual  heat.  This  would  be  a  very 'uncom- 
fortable condition  for  the  inhabitants,  or  the 
matter  composing  the  earth.  This  would  not  be 
a  wise  law;  but  it  is  not  Nature's  law — it  is 
man's.  Let  us  look  at  ^Nature's  way  of  causing 
heat.  The  earth  pulls  from  the  sun,  the  matter 
resists  this  pull,  and  heat  is  the  result.  This 
heat  is  only  in  the  lines  of  pull,  and  only  in  the 
air  so  acted  on.  This  heat  is  pulled  from  the 
earth,  for  the  earth  resists  the  circulation  of  the 
tension,  and  heat  and  light  are  the  result,  and 
there  is  nothing  consumed  to  cause  this  heat  and 
light.  As  this  heat  is  pulled  up  it  expands  the 
air  and  vibrates  the  tension,  and  the  tension 
vibrates  the  air.  One  resists  the  other,  and  heat, 
light,  and  circulation  is  the  result.  This  circula- 
tion is  what  causes  the  heat  and  light;  but  this 
is  not  made,  generated,  or  produced.  It  is  simply 
disturbed  by  the  circulation  of  the  air,  causing 
heat  and  light,  and  as  this  heat  ascends  it  car- 
ries the   moisture  and  gases  from   the  earth  up 


180  FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

into  the  clouds,  and  condenses  them  into  rain,  to 
fall  back  on  the  earth  again.  This  is  the  earth's 
circulation,  and  the  life  of  everything  on  it. 
Now,  if  the  heat  came  from  the  sun,  the  heat  of 
the  earth  could  not  ascend  against  an  intense 
heat.  One  would  repel  the  other,  and  there  could 
be  no  circulation  or  life  on  the  earth ;  but  now 
the  heat  caused  on  the  earth  ascends,  and  the 
cold  air  comes  down  to  fill  its  place,  thus  form- 
ing a  circulation  and  interchange  of  heat  and 
cold,  vibrating  the  tension  and  causing  heat  and 
light.  This  is  all  harmonious  and  reciprocal, 
consuming,  destroying,  or  wasting  nothing. 

Now,  it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that  the  same 
action  is  taking  place  in  the  sun,  with  its  vast 
atmosphere,  making  it  brilliant  with  light  and 
heat,  consuming,  or  wasting,  nothing. 

This  heat  in  the  sun  is  caused  the  same  as  our 
earth,  and  is  not  radiated  or  wasted  into  space. 
All  bodies,  or  matter,  hold  the  tension  within 
them,  and  when  this  tension  is  vibrated  it  causes 
heat  in  this  matter,  for  this  matter  is  a  continu- 
ation of  the  whole  universe,  and  is  connected 
with  it,  and  part  of  it,  and  nothing  can  have 
form  without  heat,  for  all  matter  is  condensed 
heat.  The  cold  condensed  this  heat  into  its 
present  form,  holding  it  in  this  condition  until 
it  is  liberated  again,  and  if  we  vibrate  this  con- 
densed matter  rapidly  enough  it  will  cause  heat 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  181 

again,  for  the  vibrations  disturb  the  equilibrium 
of  the  tension  that  holds  this  matter  in  its  solid 
form,  and  the  matter  resists  these  vibrations,  and 
he^it  is  the  result;  and  if  we  continue  these  vi- 
brations this  matter  will  become  vapor  or  gas, 
for  this  matter  was  occupying  the  space  belong- 
ing to  the  cold  tension  of  space.  The  vibrations 
separated  all  the  atoms  of  the  matter,  for  they 
could  not  hold  together  in  this  vibrating  ten- 
sion. The  pressure  in  the  disturbed  space  is 
more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square  inch, 
and  all  these  atoms  are  condensed  into  this  pres- 
sure, and  they  were  quiet  and  at  rest,  and  the 
pressure  was  uniform  all  around  and  through 
these  atoms,  holding  them  together ;  but  the 
vibrations  disturbed  this  pressure,  throwing  it 
out  of  equilibrium.  This  caused  the  pressure  on 
the  outside  of  this  matter  to  press  in  against  the 
vibrating  space,  crushing  and  vaporizing  this 
matter.  The  matter  was  the  resisting  medium. 
It  resisted  the  vibrating  tension,  and  was  sep- 
arated into  atoms,  or  gas.  This  gas  was  the 
original  form  of  this  matter.  This  pressure  does 
not  consume  or  destroy  any  of  these  atoms. 
They  are  simply  set  free  to  condense  into  some 
other  bodies,  or  matter. 

And  we  find  that  all  heat,  light,  and  its  phe- 
nomena, are  the  result  of  the  tension  of  space  in 
combination  with  matter.     When   this   tension 


182  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

that  incases  this  matter  is  disturbed,  heat  is  the 
result.  The  matter  resists  these  vibrations,  caus- 
ing heat,  and  when  these  vibrations  are  continu- 
ous enough  light  is  the  result;  but  the  conditions 
for  causing  heat  and  light  are  ever^^where.  We 
do  not  make  these  conditions,  they  are  the  vital- 
ity and  life  of  the  whole  universe,  and  ever}^- 
thing  is  filled  with  them,  and  acting  on,  and 
utilizing  them.  This  is  the  life  of  the  earth  and 
all  the  planetary  systems,  for  they  are  all  con- 
densed gases  into  this  solid  tension,  and  their 
matter  resists  the  circulation  of  this  tension, 
causing  heat.  This  heat  gives  them  form  and 
life,  and  is  equalized  through  their  systems  in 
circuit,  and  everything  in  these  circuits  offers  a 
resistance  to  its  free  actions,  causing  heat  in  these 
resisting  things,  and  any  matter  coming  within 
the  earth's  circulation,  or  circuit,  resists  it,  and  is 
pressed  against  or  into  it,  the  earth  being  the 
point  of  rest ;  but  the  circulation  is  constant,  and 
does  not  rest,  but  the  matter  rests,  for  it  cannot 
go  any  further;  as  the  earth  resists  it.  This  is 
w^hy  everything  falls  on  the  earth ;  but  it  does 
not  fall — it  is  forced  on  to  the  earth  by  its  re- 
sistance. 

Now,  the  earth  resists  the  circulation  of  the 
sun's  system  in  circuit,  and  is  forced  to  revolve, 
or  rotate,  around  the  sun,  and  the  sun's  system  is 
like  the  earth.     It  resists  in   proportion   to   its 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  183 

density  or  mass,  and  moves  in  accordance  to  this 
density,  or  mass.  This  is  its  mode  of  motion,  or 
equilibrium.  It  is  seeking  a  point  of  rest.  The 
heat  caused  within  it  by  its  resistance  will  not 
allow  it  to  rest,  and  it  continues  in  motion.  The 
earth  pulls  from  the  sun,  trying  to  get  loose,  but 
the  sun  holds  on  to  the  earth,  and  swings  it  around 
in  its  circuit,  causing  heat  and  light  by  its  re- 
sistance to  this  pull.  This  is  the  sun's  circula- 
tion through  the  earth,  causing  its  heat,  light, 
and  life.  We  say  this  tension  is  solid,  because  it 
cannot  be  divided.  It  divides  all  matter,  and  no 
matter  can  divide  it,  for  we  find  that  all  matter 
can  be  divided  into  atoms  or  gas.  This  is  the 
tension  that  divides  this  matter  into  this  gas,  for 
this  matter  was  gas  condensed  into  this  tension, 
holding  it  in  this  form  at  rest.  Nothing  can 
exist  in  a  solid  form  but  the  universal  tension — 
mind  and  force  combined  in  one.  We  can  call 
this  either  mind  or  force,  and  if  we  could  pro- 
duce a  piece  of  steel  six  feet  square,  and  if  this 
steel  could  be  brought  into  this  universe  from 
some  other  universe,  this  steel  would  be  encroach- 
ing on  the  space  belonging  to  this  universe,  and 
there  would  be  no  room  for  it,  and  it  would  have 
to  resist  more  than  ten  thousand  tons  to  the  square 
inch  of  its  surface.  This  pressure  would  press 
all  around  this  steel,  crushing  it  into  heat.  This 
would  be  vapor,  or  gas.     The  tension  would  con- 


184  FKOM   DARKNESS    TO   LIGHT. 

centrate  its  lines  through  every  atom,  dividing 
them.  These  atoms  are  the  only  form  that  can 
exist  in  this  universe,  for  this  form  gives  them 
freedom  and  motion,  and  allows  them  to  con- 
dense into  this  solid  tension,  without  filling  any 
of  its  space.  The  tension  rests  on  itself,  and 
cannot  rest  on  matter,  for  no  matter  can  op- 
pose it. 

Now,  this  tension  is  mind,  and  the  brain  is 
floating  in  this  mind,  acting  and  vibrating  on  it ; 
but  this  brain  is  only  condensed  gases,  filling  no 
space,  and  ofi'ering  very  little  resistance  to  the 
circulation  of  this  tension,  for  this  tension  circu- 
lates through  everything  when  disturbed  or  vi- 
brated. This  causes  heat,  and  the  heat  causes 
the  tension  to  circulate,  and  this  keeps  up  the 
action  and  life  in  the  brain. 

Now,  this  tension  is  uniform  in  this  brain,  and 
all  the  little  nerves  are  of  different  sizes  and 
density,  and  are  acting  on  and  vibrating  this 
mind  in  accordance  with  their  density  and  size, 
structure  and  form.  All  these  nerves  are  doing 
their  own  work,  and  assisting  each  other.  Now, 
if  the  force  that  this  brain  is  acting  on  was  vari- 
able, or  irregular,  in  its  actions  or  pressure,  how 
could  the  brain  act,  or  think,  on  unreliable  force 
or  mind,  and  how  could  the  brain  think,  or  act, 
on  nothing?  Where  there  would  be  nothing, 
there  would  be  no  resistance,  action,  motion,  or 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  185 

life.  We  cannot  think  of  or  on  nothing.  It  is 
not  a  thing.  It  must  be  something,  for  there  is 
something  everywhere,  and  that  something  is 
the  tension,  force,  or  mind,  filling  all  space  and 
matter  in  a  uniform  pressure,  and  in  equilib- 
rium, for  it  equalizes  all  actions  and  pressures, 
causing  harmony  throughout  the  universe. 

The  storms,  cyclones,  thunder  and  lightning, 
and  all  air  disturbances,  are  caused  by  this  ten- 
sion, for  all  this  disturbance  causes  heat,  and  the 
heat  vibrates  this  tension,  and  the  air  resists, 
causing  heat.  This  heat  is  seeking  an  equilib- 
rium, or  a  point  of  rest,  but  the  heat  will  not  let 
the  air  rest,  and  it  keeps  in  motion.  These  dis- 
turbances are  not  fighting  or  quarreling  in  them- 
selves ;  they  are  trying  to  equalize  the  different 
conditions  of  heat  caused  by  these  disturbances, 
and  trying  to  keep  harmony  between  these  ele- 
ments in  motion. 

The  air  is  the  great  equalizing  medium  in 
motion,  moving  through  the  tension,  causing 
heat,  and  carrying  this  heat  with  it,  distributing 
it  where  it  is  most  needed.  This  motion  of  the 
air  is  causing  light,  heat,  circulation,  and  motion, 
thus  performing  many  kinds  of  w^ork  to  keep  up 
the  life  of  the  earlh.  All  actions  in  the  phe- 
nomena of  Nature  are  reciprocal  and  harmo- 
nious, and  are  necessary  to  its  w^elfare. 

Nature  is  w^orking  and  taking  care  of  the  earth 


186  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

as  a  whole,  carinoj  nothing  for  individuals  or 
things,  for  these  things  are  a  growth  from  the 
mass  of  the  earth,  and  are  living  and  subsisting 
on  its  products,  for  these  things  produce  nothing. 
The  earth  and  the  air  are  the  producers.  The 
materials  for  producing  everything  are  here. 
AVe  simply  utilize  these  materials. 

Now,  we  see  the  heat  ascend  from  the  earth, 
and  if  all  the  surface  of  the  earth  was  heated  to 
a  vapor,  or  gas,  it  would  all  ascend  and  fall 
asunder,  and  disappear  in  vapor.  This  heat 
around  the  earth  would  raise  the  cold  pressure 
that  holds  it  in  form.  This  cold  pressure,  once 
lifted  from  the  surface  of  the  earth,  the  heat  in- 
side would  have  nothing  to  press  against  it  and 
confine  it,  thus  giving  it  freedom  to  expand. 
This  expansion  would  have  no  resistance  to  hold 
it  in  form,  and  it  would  all  go  off  in  vapor,  gas, 
and  heat.  It  would  have  found  its  equilibrium 
and  point  of  rest  in  its  atoms,  and  the  earth 
would  have  no  form  or  existence,  for  all  its  mat- 
ter would  be  dissolved  into  atoms,  or  gas.  This 
would  cause  all  the  air  space  to  extend  and  ex- 
pand thousand  of  miles  out  into  space,  and  as 
this  heat  would  subside,  the  cold  tension  of  space 
would  gradually  concentrate  its  lines  around  this 
mass  and  press  it  into  matter  and  form  again. 
This  would  be  a  slow  process  of  Nature,  but 
Nature   never  hurries.     She  has  plenty  of  time 


FHOM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  187 

to  do  her  work  well.  Now,  all  the  metallic  gases 
that  this  heat  around  the  earth  would  cause 
would  seek  their  own  families,  being  of  the  same 
densities  and  ranges  of  vibrations.  They  would 
concentrate  themselves  together  to  form  a  solid 
again  ;  and  as  these  atoms  of  these  gases  would 
condense  together,  they  would  unite  and  em- 
brace each  other,  and  cling  together,  for  they 
would  be  of  the  same  range  of  vibrations,  and 
united  by  the  tension  of  space,  and  in  all  this 
change  from  a  solid  to  a  gas,  and  from  a  gas  to  a 
solid,  there  would  be  nothing  lost  or  consumed. 
It  would  all  comeback  to  build  up  another  earth 
by  condensation  of  these  gases.  Now,  the  mat- 
ter composing  the  earth  is  gases  compressed  into 
the  tension,  to  make  what  we  call  a  solid,  but 
this  solid  is  divisible,  and  fills  no  space  in  this 
tension,  and  divides  or  separates  none  of  its 
lines,  and  when  this  solid  tension  with  this  con- 
centrated gas  matter  is  vibrated  rapidly  enough, 
heat  is  caused.  This  heat  is  the  gas  resisting 
the  vibrations  in  this  tension.  This  separates 
these  gases,  for  they  cannot  hold  together,  and  if 
these  gases  were  not  in  this  space  there  would  be 
no  resistance,  and  there  could  be  no  heat.  Now, 
all  gases  and  matter  are  condensed  heat,  and  this 
heat  resists  the  cold,  and  the  cold  resists  the 
heat.  This  is  the  battle  for  life  and  place  to 
maintain  life. 


183  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


WHAT     IS     ENERGY?— COAL,    WATER, 
STEAM,    TENSION. 

THE  coal  occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and  the 
tension  is  in  that  space  at  rest.  This  coal  is 
condensed  or  concentrated  gas  into  this  solid 
tension.  We  will  place  this  coal  in  a  furnace, 
in  combination  with  a  steam  boiler.  This  boiler 
contains  water,  and  this  coal,  water,  boiler,  and 
furnace  are  in  equilibrium  and  at  rest,  and  we 
apply  a  flame  to  this  coal  and  ignite  it.  Now, 
this  flame  was  caused  by  the  friction  or  vibra- 
tions in  the  match.  This  disturbed  the  tension 
in  this  match,  causing  heat,  and  the  heat  vi- 
brated the  tension,  and  the  match  resisted  these 
vibrations,  causing  heat  and  light.  This  threw 
this  space  that  the  match  occupied  out  of  equi- 
librium, and  it  became  equalized  in  contact  with 
the  coal,  and  as  the  heat  increases  the  vibrations 
increase,  and  the  matter  composing  the  coal  re- 
sists, and  heat  and  light  are  the  result  of  this  dis- 
turbance in  this  coal,  for  the  tension  in  this  coal 
is  the  light  and  heat  from  the  resistance  of  this 
gas  composing  this  coal.  The  vibrations  are  so 
rapid  that  the  tension  becomes  luminous,  and 
shines,  and  all  the  atoms  of  gas  hold  the  tension 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  189 

within  them.  The  air  circulates  through  this 
gas  and  flame,  dividing  and  mixing  with  them. 
This  causes  a  rapid  expansion  and  circulation, 
disturbing  all  this  space  in  this  furnace,  and  this 
disturbance  seeks  its  equilibrium  in  the  boiler, 
and  the  water  resists  the  vibrations  imparted 
from  the  coal,  causing  heat,  and  the  vibrations 
increase,  and  the  water  is  vaporized.  The  fur- 
nace and  boiler  are  in  circuit,  and  the  disturb- 
ance is  equalized  between  them.  The  matter  of 
the  coal  resisted  the  vibrations  of  the  tension, 
causing  heat,  and  they  have  found  their  equilib- 
rium in  their  union ;  and  all  this  space  that  this 
furnace  and  boiler  occupy  is  thrown  out  of 
equilibrium,  for  the  tension  in  this  space  is  all 
in  vibration,  and  cannot  rest,  and  this  disturbed 
space  finds  its  equilibrium  in  the  cylinder  of  the 
engine  in  the  form  of  steam.  The  piston  and 
head  resist  each  other,  the  steam  expands,  and 
the  head  resists  and  will  not  move ;  but  the 
piston  is  less  resistant,  and  gives  away  to  the 
heat,  expansion,  or  disturbed  tension,  or  energy. 
Now,  every  molecule  of  water  or  steam  holds  its 
tension  within  it,  and  this  is  under  strain  from 
the  heat  and  expansion.  This  wants  to  become 
equalized,  but  the  cylinder  confines  and  holds 
this  exertion,  expansion,  or  energy,  and  will  not 
allow  it  to  become  equalized  until  it  overcomes 
the  resistance,  and  causes  motion  ;  then  it  finds 


190  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

its  equilibrium  and  point  of  rest  in  condensation 
into  its  original  form  of  water.  The  coal,  boiler, 
water,  and  engine  were  in  circuit,  and  found 
their  equilibrium  in  themselves  through  the 
tension  that  unites  and  holds  them  in  form  and 
place. 

Now,  all  the  space  that  this  coal,  water,  boiler, 
and  cylinder  occupied  was  the  tension  of  space, 
and  this  matter  composing  this  mass  was  only 
condensed  gases  in  this  solid  tension,  and  when 
they  were  disturbed  they  found  their  equilib- 
rium in  each  other  in  circuit  or  contact.  This 
was  only  the  matter  resisting  the  tension  in  this 
disturbed  space.  It  matters  not  how  this  ten- 
sion may  be  disturbed,  heat  will  be  the  result, 
and  this  heat  is  expansion  or  energy.  It  has 
overcome  the  inertia  of  the  cold  tension  of  space, 
disturbing  its  rest  and  giving  motion  or  move- 
ment to  matter. 

Now,  the  energ}^  or  force  exerted  by  the  steam 
was  the  tension  thrown  out  of  equilibrium  by  the 
heat ;  and  as  this  heat  is  continued,  the  energy 
is  exerted,  and  is  equalized  in  the  work  done. 
The  water  resisted  the  action  and  vibrations  of 
the  tension,  and  was  crushed  into  heat  or  vapor. 
This  is  expansion,  causing  motion,  overcoming 
the  resistance  or  inertia.  The  atoms  of  the  coal 
expanded,  from  the  pressure  of  the  vibrating 
tension.     These  expanding  atoms  were  trying  to 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  191 

fill  more  space  in  this  tension,  and  it  resisted 
them,  and  force  was  exerted,  and  the  atoms  or 
matter  were  crushed  into  heat  or  gas,  and  this 
was  absorbed  or  equalized  in  the  water  of  the 
boiler,  causing  the  same  effect  in  it.  These  pres- 
sures seek  their  equilibrium,  and  find  it  in  the 
cylinder  of  the  engine,  in  the  form  of  steam. 
This  steam  is  the  crushed  and  vaporized  water. 
All  the  space  in  this  cylinder  is  the  tension  ;  and 
it  is  all  in  intense  vibration  from  the  heat,  and 
these  vibrations  divide  and  separate  the  water 
into  vapor  or  gas.  The  steam,  or  water,  wants  to 
rest,  but  the  vibrations  crush  this  steam  into 
heat,  and  will  not  let  it  rest,  and  the  energy  or 
force  is  continued  and  exerted  between  the  two 
opposing  actions,  heat  and  cold. 

Now,  we  find  that  energy  or  force  is  the  dis- 
turbed cold  tension  of  space.  The  force  is  the 
inert  cold  tension  resisting  the  heat.  This  re- 
sistance between  heat  and  cold  crushes  the  op- 
posing matter  into  gas,  expanding  it,  filling  more 
space,  exerting  energy  or  force,  and  everything 
that  has  form,  has  matter  and  heat  in  it;  for  all 
matter  is  condensed  heat  into  this  solid  tension, 
and  when  this  tension  in  this  matter  is  vibrated, 
the  matter  resists,  and  heat  is  the  result.  This 
heat  expands  this  matter,  trying  to  fill  more 
space ;  but  all  space  is  full,  and  there  is  no  more 
room  for  any  more  matter,  and  this  expanding 


192  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

matter  is  pressing  against  more  than  ten  thou- 
sand tons  to  the  square  inch  of  this  space.  This 
is  what  crushes  this  matter  into  heat  or  vapor. 
This  vapor  is  heat,  and  seeks  an  equilibrium  or 
a  point  of  rest,  and  ascends  into  the  clouds,  and 
condenses  into  rain  or  snow,  and  finds  its  equi- 
librium. The  heat  vaporized  the  matter,  and 
the  cold  condensed  it.  The  heat  raises  the  mat- 
ter into  the  clouds,  and  the  cold  presses  this  con- 
densed heat  back  again  to  the  earth,  the  point  of 
rest.  This  is  the  earth's  circulation,  or  circuit  of 
heat  and  cold.  The  heat  ascends,  and  the  cold 
descends,  thus  forming  a  circulation  and  equi- 
librium. The  heat  raised  or  lifted  the  weight  of 
cold,  by  liberating  its  gases,  forcing  them  up  into 
the  cold  space,  and  they  become  weight  again. 
They  now  resist  the  circulation  of  the  earth,  and 
are  pressed  on  to  it,  the  earth  being  the  point  of 
rest,  but  the  earth's  circulation  still  continues 
through  all  matter. 


-FEOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  193 


WHAT  IS  THE  STORAGE  BATTERY,  AND 
WHAT  DO  WE  STORE? 

THE  battery  occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and 
the  tension  is  in  that  space,  in  equilibrium 
and  at  rest.  The  d^^namo  occupies  a  portion  of 
space,  and  the  tension  is  in  that  space,  at  rest. 
There  is  no  energy  in  either  dynamo  or  battery. 
They  are  quiet  and  at  rest.  The  battery  is  con- 
nected to  the  dynamo,  and  we  start  the  engine 
and  dynamo.  The  energy  of  the  engine  is  im- 
parted to  the  dynamo,  and  is  put  in  motion. 
The  armature  is  rotating  in  space  between  mag- 
nets. This  rotating  mass  disturbs  the  equilib- 
rium in  this  space,  and  this  disturbed  space  seeks 
its  equilibrium  in  the  battery,  through  the  wires 
or  conductors  from  the  commutator  into  the 
brushes.  The  battery  is  in  the  circuit,  and  the 
armature  and  commutators,  rotating  between  the 
brushes,  disturb  this  circuit,  and  this  disturb- 
ance w-ants  to  become  equalized,  and  the  con- 
ductors are  the  tubes  for  equalizing  this  disturb- 
ance.    This  is  similar  to  a  balance. 

Nature's  force  seeks  a  balance  through  all  mat- 
ter and  bodies.  The  armature  is  rotating  and 
disturbing  this  space  of  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 


194  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

square  inch,  and  the  faster  it  revolves  the  more 
it  disturbs  and  acts  on  this  force,  the  more  force 
it  exerts,  and  this  exerted  force  is  equalized 
in  the  battery.  We  say  this  is  stored.  This  is 
the  energy  of  the  coal  imparted  to  the  water  into 
steam  and  through  the  dynamo  into  the  battery. 
This  is  all  the  energy  of  the  heat,  or  expansion, 
stored  in  the  battery.  This  can  cause  more  ex- 
pansion, or  heat,  when  liberated. 

The  more  surface  this  battery  contains,  the 
more  energy  it  can  store,  or  hold.  This  energy 
has  not  been  forced  or  pressed  into  this  battery. 
It  has  been  equalized  through  the  dynamos. 
Nature's  force  seeks  an  equilibrium  through  all 
matter.  Now,  the  heat  of  the  coal  imparted  to 
the  water  caused  steam.  The  steam  propelled 
the  engine  and  dynamo.  This  was  all  equalized 
in  the  battery,  for  they  were  all  in  circuit,  and 
seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  a  point  of  rest ;  but  the 
heat  would  not  let  all  this  mass  in  motion  rest. 
If  we  place  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  five  steam 
boilers  in  series,  or  circuit,  connecting  them  all 
with  pipes,  the  pressure  will  be  equal  in  all  the 
boilers,  no  matter  what  their  size  may  be.  This 
is  the  equalization  of  the  pressure,  or  conditions, 
in  the  boilers.  They  seek  an  equilibrium,  or  a 
point  of  rest,  and  they  all  rest  against  each  other, 
and  the  one  that  has  the  largest  surface  will  con- 
tain the  most  steam,  or  stored  energy.     This  is 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  195 

similar  to  the  storage  battery.  Every  square 
inch  of  surface  in  the  batiery  retains  an  equal 
proportion  of  the  disturbed  space  in  the  dynamo. 
For  every  inch  of  disturbance  in  the  dynamo, 
an  inch  is  disturbed  to  the  same  extent  in  the 
storage  battery.  This  disturbance  is  heat,  and  is 
imparted  to  the  plates  in  the  battery  as  energy, 
or  the  equalization  of  the  force  exerted  by  the 
dynamo ;  for  the  battery  is  in  the  circuit,  and 
offers  a  resistance  to  the  free  circulation,  and 
heat  is  the  result  of  this  resistance,  and  any  mat- 
ter, or  material,  that  we  may  place  in  this  circuit 
will  resist,  and  heat  will  be  the  result.  This 
heat  is  not  made,  generated,  or  produced ;  the 
conditions  for  causing  heat  are  everywhere. 
When  we  disturb  the  equilibrium  of  any  matter 
or  body,  we  cause  heat;  for  then  we  disturb  the 
tension  of  space.  The  universal  force  fills  all 
space  and  matter,  and  anything  that  can  disturb 
this  will  cause  heat  in  this  disturbed  place ;  and 
if  this  disturbed  place  had  a  circuit  around  the 
world,  it  would  be  all  disturbed  to  the  same  ex- 
tent. And  if  this  circuit  encircled  the  great 
universe,  it  w^ould  be  disturbed;  for  what  dis- 
turbs one  disturbs  all  when  they  are  in  circuit, 
and  so  they  are  all  in  circuit,  solidly  connected, 
no  space  between  all  this  vast  universe.  They 
find  their  equilibrium  in  each  other.  The  energy 
exerted  in  the  sun  is  equalized  through  its  system 


196  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

of  worlds,  or  planets.  They  are  all  in  circuit, 
and  equilibrium,  but  not  at  rest ;  and  we  find 
the  energy  exerted  by  the  dynamo  equalized  in 
the  storage  battery,  and  so  it  is  throughout  the 
universe.  This  is  Nature's  great  regulator  of 
force,  pressure,  and  mind,  keeping  everything 
balanced.  What  an  intelligent  and  simple  law, 
and  how  difficult  of  interpretation  ! 

Now,  the  sun  is  a  great  reservoir  of  energy, 
causing  its  own  heat  and  light,  and  the  bodies 
pulling  on  it  are  assisting  it  and  maintaining 
themselves.  This  is  equalized  from  the  sun  into 
its  family  of  worlds,  and  from  its  family  back 
into  the  sun.  This  is  the  sun's  circulation  and 
circuit  of  its  system.  This  system  is  disturbing 
the  space  they  occupy.  This  disturbed  space 
seeks  its  equilibrium  in  its  circuit,  and  all  the 
sun's  system  is  in  circuit,  and  the  matter  of  this 
system  resists  this  circuit,  or  circulation,  and  heat 
is  the  result.  This  "heat  is  equally  distributed 
through  the  circuit  of  worlds,  maintaining  their 
life  and  motion.  This  is  similar  to  the  steam 
boilers.  The  boilers  are  receptacles  for  the 
steam,  or  heat.  They  resist  the  steam,  holding 
the  heat  within  them,  and  this  heat  is  equalized 
through  this  system  of  boilers,  the  same  as  the 
heat  is  equalized  through  the  whole  planetary 
system.  The  shell  of  these  boilers  is  like  the 
cold  tension  of  space,  preventing  the  heat  from 


6t 


FROM   DARKNEr 


escaping,  and  resisting  the  pressure,  confining 
the  steam  within  them.  The  worlds  are  revolv- 
ing in  the  cold  tension  of  space.  This  cold 
presses  in  against  the  matter,  holding  it  in  form, 
preventing  the  heat  from  escaping;  and  the  heat 
presses  out  against  the  cold,  forming  an  equilib- 
rium and  balance.  This  holds  this  matter  in 
form,  and  it  cannot  get  out  of  this  pressure  ;  and 
this  matter  resists  the  circulation  of  the  tension, 
and  heat  is  the  result,  and  this  heat  is  equalized 
through  the  systems,  giving  them  life  and  motion. 
This  motion  is  reciprocal  and  harmonious.  These 
systems. have  intelligence  and  reason,  for  they 
are  moving  in  an  intelligent  force,  governed  by 
an  intelligent  and  wise,  universal  mind.  How 
could  any  of  these  worlds  be  lost,  or  destroyed, 
or  how  could  they  consume  each  other,  or  come 
in  contact,  all  moving  in  their  own  circuit  in 
perfect  harmony?  This  is  more  than  man  can 
say  for  himself.  If  the  human  race  w^as  as  har- 
monious and  as  reasonable  as  these  worlds,  or 
systems,  there  would  be  no  discontentment,  quar- 
reling, and  fighting  between  them.  These  worlds, 
or  systems,  are  not  jealous  if  one  has  more  sur- 
face and  heat  than  another.  They  do  not  try  to 
take  this  surplus  away  from  this  larger  world. 
They  are  all  satisfied  and  contented  with  what 
the}^  have  got,  for  they  are  obeying  a  wise  law, 
and  are  satisfied  with  what  this  law  allows  them; 


193  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

for  they  know  this  law  is  the  supreme  and  uni- 
versal law,  governing  and  ruling  the  universe. 
Now,  these  planets,  worlds,  and  systems  are  roll- 
ing and  moving  through  an  intensely  cold  space, 
and  they  are  condensed  gases  in  this  solid  cold 
space.  These  gases  are  heat,  for  they  resist  this 
cold  space  by  occupying  its  place,  or  space. 
This  cold  tries  to  press,  or  force  out,  this  gas  or 
matter,  and  the  gases  concentrate  their  mass  to- 
gether, to  form  a  solid,  so  that  they  can  resist  the 
pressure  of  the  cold.  Then  the  cold  presses 
against  the  heat,  and  the  heat  presses  against  the 
cold,  and  they  brace  themselves  togetjier,  like 
two  giants,  exerting  all  their  force,  and  the  mat- 
ter resists  this  exerted  force,  and  heat  is  the  re- 
sult of  this  battle  between  heat  and  cold.  This 
action  expands  the  tension  in  the  gases,  or  mat- 
ter, causing  heat.  This  heat  vibrates  the  ten- 
sion, and  the  matter  resists,  and  heat  is  the  re- 
sult. This  is  a  continuous  action  through  all 
the  planetary  systems,  keeping  up  life  and  motion 
in  them. 

Now,  everything  in  space  must  have  heat,  in 
order  to  have  form.  The  cold  is  the  only  thing 
in  the  universe  without  form,  but  this  cold  gives 
form  to  everything. 

This  cold  tension  fills  all  space,  without  form 
or  limit,  and  nothing  can  get  into  this  cold  but 
heat,  and  this  heat  must  have  form  to  force  its 


FFvOM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  199 

way  into  this  cold  tension.  This  heat  must  be 
able  to  expand  and  press  against  this  cold.  This 
is  what  gives  form  to  this  heat,  or  matter,  for 
this  cold  crushes  against  this  heat,  condensing  it 
into  matter  and  form,  and  the  more  this  matter 
is  crushed,  the  more  heat  is  caused.  This  is  why 
all  atoms  and  planets  are  spherical.  This  is  the 
only  form  that  can  resist  the  pressure  of  the  cold 
tension.  The  pressure  is  equal  all  around  these 
spheres,  holding  them  in  this  form.  They  are  all 
molded,  or  impressed,  into  this  cold  tension,  and 
cannot  get  out  of  it,  or  change  their  form ;  but 
can  consolidate  into  masses,  and  unite,  and  form 
what  we  call  a  solid.  These  masses  must  be  of 
the  same  families,  in  order  to  harmonize  and 
combine  to  build  up  this  solid.  These  atoms 
composing  this  solid  have  not  been  made,  gener- 
ated, or  produced.  They  are  one  of  the  con- 
stituent parts  of  this  universe,  and  are  inde- 
structible and  everlasting,  and  are  a  continua- 
tion of  one,  and  all,  and  part  of  the  whole. 

Now,  an  atom  is  an  individual  world,  having 
all  the  properties  for  building  all  matter  and  all 
worlds,  and  these  little  atoms  are  the  only  things 
that  can  resist  the  great  pressure  of  the  cold  ten- 
sion of  space.  They  are  moulded  into  this,  the 
same  as  we  mould  a  piece  of  iron  or  metal  into 
the  sand  or  clay.  The  sand  or  clay  is  like  the 
cold  tension ;  it  holds  the  fluid  metal,  imparting 


200  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

form  to  it.  The  metal  cannot  get  out  of  the 
mould  until  it  gets  its  form.  Now,  it  was  the 
cold  sand  that  imparted  form  and  shape  to  this 
metal,  and  without  this  mould  we  could  not  give 
the  desired  form  to  this  metal.  We  see  the  sand 
around  the  moulded  metal,  but  we  cannot  see  the 
cold  tension  of  space  that  holds  this  metal  in  its 
solid  form,  giving  and  holding  everything  in  its 
present  form.  This  is  the  great  universal  moulder 
of  all  bodies  and  forms,  and  man  is  moulded  in 
this  mould,  and  he  moulds  forms  to  please  him- 
self;  but  all  these  forms  are  held  in  form  by  the 
one  universal  mould.  And  how  can  these  forms 
be  changed  without  a  new  mould  ?  Man  may 
make  moulds  and  forms,  but  cannot  impart  life 
or  motion  to  them.  All  living  forms  have  been 
moulded,  and  have  their  form  and  mould,  and 
these  cannot  be  changed  into  some  other  forms 
and  mould.  The  form  once  moulded  into  this 
universal  mould  is  a  fixture  in  it,  and  it  is  part 
and  parcel  of  it,  and  is  a  continuation  of  the 
whole  universe,  without  beginning  or  end. 

How  could  any  new  form  get  into  this  universe 
that  is  not  in  it?  Where  w^ould  it  come  from? 
All  forms  may  be  changed  by  cultivation  and 
intermixing  ;  but  these  are  not  new  forms.  They 
are  a  mixture  of  the  forms  that  have  been 
moulded  in  Nature's  mould.  Now,  there  has  to 
be  a  mould  and  a  form  to  produce  a  form.    The 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO      LIGHT.  201 

female  is  the  mould,  and  the  male  is  the  form. 
The  male  is  an  impression  of  its  form,  impressed 
into  the  female,  and  is  moulded  in  this  mould,  it 
bein^  part  and  parcel  of  these  two  forms  in 
Nature's  mould,  and  they  impart  this,  their  form, 
to  build  up  another  form  through  Nature's 
mould.  This  is  a  continuation  of  the  mould 
and  form  through  Nature's  mould. 

Now,  everything  must  be  moulded  in  this  way ; 
for  there  must  be  a  mould  if  there  is  a  form,  and 
all  forms  are  moulded  into  the  cold  tension  of 
space.  This  gives  form  to  all  matter  and  bodies. 
All  the  worlds  and  planets  are  moulded  and  im- 
pressed into  this  great  universal  mould,  and  they 
cannot  get  out  of  it ;  for  they  are  part  and  par- 
cel of  it,  and  are  incased  in  it,  and  move 
through  it. 

Now,  all  the  gases  have  their  forms  and 
moulds,  and  these  gases  can  condense  and  mix 
together,  causing  an  admixture  of  forms.  This 
is  when  these  gases  are  free  to  act  for  themselves. 
This  admixture  of  gases  may  cause  many  varie- 
ties and  variations  in  their  combination  or  con- 
densations; but  the  gases  composing  these  varie- 
ties are  not  made,  generated,  or  produced.  They 
are  one  of  the  constituent  parts  of  this  universe, 
and  cannot  be  destroyed.  Now,  everything 
grows  from  the  gases  condensed  into  this  tension 
of  space.    And  how  could  this  thing  be  consumed 


202  FKOM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

or  destroyed  ?     This  thing  is  indestructible ;  but 
the  gases  composing  this  thing  can  be  liberated 
and   set   free,  and    condensed    into   some   other 
thing.     This  is  Nature's  continuous  circulation 
and  interchange  of  place,  keeping  up  the  life  of 
these  gases.     Now,  if  these  gases  remained  inert, 
without  motion  or  circulation,  there  could  be  no 
more  life  in  these  gases  ;  and  everything  is  built 
up  from  these  gases,  depending  on  them  for  life 
and  motion.     Nature's  law  is  wisdom  and  reason. 
Now,  all  bodies  grow  up  from  these  gases  by 
condensation,   or    concentration,   and   combina- 
tion.    These  condensed  gases  deposit  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth,  and  are  absorbed  into  it  by  its 
circulation  of  heat  and  cold.     The  different  gases 
are  retained  in  the  soil  where  this  particular  gas 
is  needed,  this  place  being  a  vacuum  of  this  gas. 
This   equalizes  the  gases,  and   if  this  place   is 
charged,  or  has  an  equal  portion,  there  will  be  no 
more  deposited  until  all  the  surrounding  soil  is 
supplied   uniformly ;  for  these  gases  have  their 
own  families  and  ranges  of  vibrations,  and  travel 
on  their  own  lines,  and  deposit  themselves  where 
they  are  needed.    But  sometimes  there  are  large 
masses    of    decaying   vegetable   matter   concen- 
trated, and  these  masses,  in  the  process  of  decay, 
deposit,  or  condense,  large  quantities  of  a  par- 
ticular gas.     This  will  cause  a  particular  growth 
where  it  is  deposited.     This  will  be  peculiar  to 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  203 

this  gas,  and  the  more  this  is  mixed  with  other 
gases  the  more  difficult  it  will  be  to  identify  it. 
The  growths  of  these  gases  are  the  lowest  form 
of  vegetable  life,  forming  the  fungi  and  mosses. 
This  is  the  beginning  of  the  fern  into  the  tree 
and  all  the  vegetable  kingdom.  The  more  these 
gases  of  a  kind  associate,  the  more  they  become 
individualized  in  their  products.  These  products 
are  the  gases  in  a  concentrated  form,  and  this 
form  is  moulded  into  the  universal  mould,  and 
becomes  a  species  of  a  distinct  form,  and  this 
new  species  can  cause  species  of  its  kind  by  re- 
production. This  is  Nature's  universal  circula- 
tion of  concentrating  and  liberating  her  gases. 
Now,  it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that  animal  life 
began  the  same  as  the  vegetable  life,  for  there  is 
but  one  law. 


204  rnoM  darkness  to  light. 


WHAT  IS  THE  AURORA  BOREALIS,  AND 
ITS  CAUSE? 

LET  us  take  our  minds  into  the  North  Pole, 
and  see  what  the  condition  is  in  the  air, 
land,  and  water.  We  find  it  is  very  cold,  say- 
twenty  degrees  below  zero,  and  getting  colder  as 
we  go  further  north.  The  air  is  intensely  dry 
and  piercing,  the  cold  penetrating  our  bodies 
like  needles,  and  we  find  everything  is  frozen 
rigidly.  The  ice,  air,  and  land  appear  to  be 
solidly  connected  by  this  cold  place ;  and  as  the 
air  moves,  from  some  disturbance,  it  gives  out 
great  sound,  for  we  can  hear  our  voices  for  miles 
apart.  The  air  is  dry  and  in  tension,  and  ofiers 
little  resistance  to  sound.  Now,  all  the  land, 
water,  and  ice  are  solidly  connected  by  this  cold 
tension  that  fills  all  space,  and  there  is  no  heat 
here  to  insulate,  or  separate,  tliis  union.  This  is 
in  great  strain,  from  this  cold,  shrinking  action ; 
and  we  find  the  ice  and  snow  reflect  their  light 
upwards  in  waves,  and  these  waves  of  light  are 
disturbed  by  the  moving  air,  increasing  the 
luminosity,  or  light.  This  air  is  dry  and  gritty, 
and  grinds  together  in  motion ;  for  there  is  no 
moisture  to  lubricate  it.     This  grinding  of  the 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  205 

air  vibrates  the  tension,  and  causes  the  light,  and 
this  light  reflects  on  to  the  ice  and  snow,  and  is 
reflected  into  space.  Every  molecule  of  air  is 
incased  in  the  tension,  and,  when  put  in  motion, 
the  molecules  rub  and  grind  against  each  other, 
and  vibrate  and  disturb  this  tension,  causing 
luminosity,  and  these  molecules  reflect  their 
light  on  to  each  other,  and  the  tension  conducts 
this  light  into  space,  and  the  different  currents  of 
air,  moving  in  different  directions,  agitate  and  in- 
crease this  light,  giving  it  the  appearance  of 
flashes,  similar  to  flashes  of  lightning.  But  this 
is  cold  light,  caused  by  cold  radiation  into  cold 
tension.  There  is  no  heat  caused  in  this  radia- 
tion of  light,  for  there  is  no  expansion  of  mat- 
ter. It  is  a  shrinkage.  This  shrinkage  light  is 
without  heat.  There  is  no  action  here  to  cause 
heat.  It  is  a  vacuum  of  heat,  but  can  cause 
light.  Now,  sometimes  the  temperature  will 
vary,  and  the  ice  will  be,  say  zero,  and  the  cold 
will  suddenly  change  to  perhaps  thirty  degrees 
below  zero.  Now,  the  air  is  thirty  degrees  be- 
low the  temperature  of  the  ice.  This  makes  the 
ice  heated  in  comparison  to  the  air.  They  want  to 
become  equalized.  This  causes  a  great  agitation 
in  the  ice  and  air.  This  is  imparted  to  the  ten- 
sion of  space.  The  air,  resisting,  causes  friction 
and  luminosity.  This  causes  a  circulation 
through  the  ice  and  tension ;  the  air,  resisting. 


206  FROM   DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

becomes  luminous,  and  flashes  this  up  into  the 
tension,  and  is  flashed  back  into  the  ice,  thus 
forming  a  circulation,  or  equilibrium.  This  will 
continue  until  the  ice  and  air  are  of  the  same 
temperature ;  then  they  find  their  equilibrium 
and  point  of  rest.  This  action  can  take  place 
wherever  this  condition  may  be.  This  is  Na- 
ture's light  without  heat.  There  is  a  pressure  in 
the  ice  of  heat,  and  around  it  of  cold.  They 
want  to  become  equalized ;  they  resist  each  other, 
and  this  struggle  vibrates  the  tension,  causing 
luminosity. 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  207 


WHAT    IS   THE  CAUSE    OF   CYCLONES? 

AMASS  of  heated  air  is  close  to  the  earth, 
and  a  mass  of  cold  air  is  pressing  down  on 
this  heated  air.  The  heated  air  presses  up,  and 
the  cold  air  presses  down.  They  press  against 
each  other.  They  are  seeking  an  equilibrium,  or 
point  of  rest.  The  heated  air  presses  up,  trying 
to  break  through  the  cold  air,  and  the  cold  air  is 
trying  to  do  the  same  thing  with  the  heated  air ; 
but  these  bodies  are  too  dense.  They  cannot 
break  each  other's  lines.  These  masses  of  air  are 
moving,  say  with  a  velocity  of  fifty  miles  an 
hour.  This  mass  in  motion  would  not  do  much 
injury  to  the  vicinity  it  would  pass  over  as  long 
as  it  remained  in  this  condition.  But  suddenly 
the  heated  air  breaks  through  the  cold,  and 
presses  up  and  out  into  the  cold  space  beyond 
the  air.  Now,  there  is  no  resistance  to  this  heated 
air ;  it  is  pulled  up  into  this  cold  space  ;  for  it  is 
a  vacuum,  and  this  vacuum  pulls  the  heat  up 
into  this  space,  and  the  air  resists,  and  is  pulled 
with  the  heat.  This  heat  has  found  an  outlet  in 
this  cold  space.  It  has  formed  a  circulation  for 
the  heated  air  close  to  the  earth — has  made  a 
cylindrical  opening  through  these  masses  of  air, 


208  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

and  the  heated  air  is  pulled  out  through  this 
C3dinder  into  this  cold  space;  and  as  this  heated 
air  is  pulled  up  into  this  vacuum,  the  cold  air  is 
pressing  down  against  the  heated.  This  forces 
the  heated  air  out  through  this  cylinder  with 
great  force.  The  mouth,  or  opening,  of  this 
cylinder  may  be  several  miles  in  diameter,  and 
the  rush  of  air  through  this  opening  may  be  one 
hundred  miles  an  hour;  for  the  temperature  of 
the  air  at  the  earth  would  be  about  seventy  de- 
grees above  zero,  and  beyond  the  air  about  two 
hundred  degrees  below  zero.  These  conditions 
would  be  seeking  an  equilibrium  through  this 
opening.  The  cold  space  w^ould  be  a  great  pull- 
ing force.  It  would  pull  all  the  heat  from  the 
earth  through  this  opening.  This  cylinder  would 
be  almost  solid,  for  the  air  in  passing  upwards 
would  have  a  screw  motion.  This  would  make 
the  walls  of  the  air  around  this  cylinder  rigid. 
The  pressure  of  air  passing  through  this  cylinder 
would  be  constantly  enlarging  it  until  the  heat 
and  cold  would  find  their  equilibrium.  If  we 
have  a  cylinder,  say  two  hundred  feet  long  and 
about  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  and  at  one  end 
we  raise  the  temperature  to  about  one  hundred 
degrees  above  zero,  and  at  the  other  end  we  reduce 
the  temperature  to  fifty  degrees  below  zero,  we 
wall  find  the  heated  air  will  be  pulled  through 
the  cylinder  into  the  cold  space  witli  great  force. 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  209 

This  will  form  a  circulation  of  heat  and  cold ; 
but  the  cold  air  cannot  come  to  the  heated  air. 
It  would  be  repelled,  for  the  heated  air  expands, 
and  the  cold  contracts ;  therefore,  heat  repels 
and  cold  attracts.  The  different  temperatures 
are  constantly  trying  to  become  equalized.  This 
causes  the  air  motion  and  circulation,  inter- 
change of  place,  seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  point 
of  rest. 

The  cold  is  the  point  of  rest.  It  is  inert  and 
dead.  The  heat  disturbs  this  inertia  by  vibrat- 
ing it.  These  vibrations  are  resisted  by  this 
cold  tension,  and  it  is  thrown  out  of  equilibrium, 
and  all  the  tension  of  space  is  pressing  into  this 
disturbed  space,  trying  to  fill  it  and  get  its  equi- 
librium ;  but  the  heat  keeps  up  the  disturbance, 
and  the  fight  goes  on.  This  is  like  trying  to 
make  a  hole  in  the  ocean  ten  thousand  feet  deep 
by  disturbing  this  space.  All  the  ocean  would 
be  ready  to  fill  this  disturbed  space.  And  if  we 
had  a  hose  that  would  reach  down  ten  thousand 
feet  into  the  ocean,  and  pumped  heated  air  down 
through  this  hose,  this  heat  would  have  to  dis- 
place this  ten  thousand  feet  of  water  that  the 
hose  would  occupy ;  and  as  the  heated  air  would 
escape  into  the  water,  it  would  be  compressed 
almost  into  a  liquid  from  the  weight  of  water 
around  it.  All  the  ocean  would  be  pressing 
into  this  space  disturbed  by  the  heated  air.    The 


210  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

air  would  be  occupying  the  water's  space,  and  it 
w^ould  have  to  fight  for  it.  One  would  resist  the 
other  until  they  became  equalized,  or  till  the  air 
was  forced  out,  for  the  air  could  not  force  the 
water  out.  It  is  the  solid,  and  crushes  out  the 
air  displacing  it. 

Now,  the  water  is  the  dead  weight,  or  inertia. 
It  is  quiet  and  at  rest.  The  heated  air  disturbs 
this  quietness  by  encroaching  on  it,  and  the 
water  resists  the  air,  and  the  air  resists  the  water, 
and  there  is  a  battle  between  the  two  opposing 
actions.  The  air  has  to  do  all  the  fighting,  for 
the  water  is  constantly  pressing  against  the  air, 
and  these  pressures  exert  the  forces  between 
them,  for  they  resist  each  other,  and  this  resist- 
ance is  the  force.  The  cold  resists  the  heat,  and 
the  heat  resists  the  cold.  One  is  equal  to  the 
other,  and  the  fight  goes  on ;  and  if  there  was 
any  matter  between  the  heated  air  and  water 
that  would  offer  a  resistance  to  them,  it  would 
be  crushed  into  vapor.  This  vapor  would  be 
heat,  and  this  heat  would  be  forced  up  to  the 
surface  of  the  water,  and  there  condensed ;  for  it 
could  not  find  its  equilibrium  until  it  reached 
the  surface  and  mixed  with  the  air.  This  re- 
lieves it  of  the  pressure,  and  it  is  free  to  condense 
and  find  its  equilibrium,  or  point  of  rest,  on  the 
surface  of  the  water.  The  heated  air  in  passing 
up  through  the  cylinder  would  carry  the  moist- 


FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  211 

ure  with  it.  This  moisture,  or  heat,  would  be 
condensed  into  rain  and  pressed  back  to  the 
earth  again.  This  would  be  a  tornado ;  for  as 
soon  as  the  heat  reached  the  cold  space,  it  would 
be  condensed  into  water,  and  come  back  to  the 
earth  in  torrents.  These  torrents  of  rain  would 
break  the  solidity  of  the  heated  air  in  passing 
through  it,  coming  to  the  earth.  This  would 
break  the  cylinder  and  equalize  the  pressure, 
and  form  a  partial  equilibrium  between  the  heat 
and  cold.  Nature's  pressures  are  continually 
seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  a  point  of  rest,  but 
the  heat  will  not  let  them  rest,  for  it  gives  life  to 
everything  by  giving  it  motion.  This  motion  is 
by  vibrating  the  air  and  tension.  The  air  is  put 
in  motion  by  these  vibrations,  but  the  tension  is 
only  disturbed,  and  it  disturbs  the  air,  and  the 
air  resists,  and  this  action  produces  heat  and 
life. 


212  FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


A  LOOK  INTO  A  MIRROR,  OR  LOOKING- 
GLASS. 

WHAT  do  we  see  in  this  glass ?  It  reflects 
our  body,  devoid  of  matter.  There  is  no 
matter  in  this  reflection,  or  shadow.  As  we 
move,  it  moves,  but  we  cannot  touch  it,  for  it  is 
not  a  substance.  Now,  this  glass  will  reflect  any 
substance,  or  matter,  true  to  Nature;  there  is  no 
deceit  in  this  reflection. 

We  look  in  the  glass,  but  we  do  not  see  the 
glass.  We  look  through  it  or  into  it.  The  glass 
is  in  the  tension,  part  and  parcel  of  it,  holding 
it  at  rest.  The  glass  and  tension  are  united  ;  but 
the  glass  divides  and  holds  the  tension,  making 
the  glass  solid,  and  the  glass  is  the  dividing  line 
of  the  tension.  Now,  this  glass  is  the  tension  in 
a  rigid  condition.  It  is  as  near  solid  as  any- 
thing we  can  produce.  The  tension  is  every- 
thing, and  everything  is  the  tension;  but  the 
glass  is  transparent,  like  the  tension,  and  is  in 
harmony  with  it.  This  glass  fills  no  space.  It 
only  occupies  a  portion  of  space.  This  glass 
holds  the  tension  at  rest,  preventing  vibrations, 
or  waves,  passing  through  it.  The  glass  and  ten- 
sion is  in  equilibrium  and  at  rest. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT,  213 

Now,  this  glass  is  like  as  if  we  cut  its  space  out 
of  the  tension,  and  the  silvering  is  near  the  color 
of  the  glass,  and  polished.  This  prevents  us 
from  looking  through  the  glass.  It  cuts  and  di- 
vides these  lines  abruptly,  preventing  the  light 
from  connecting  through  the  glass,  and  we  look 
into  the  glass,  but  we  do  not  see  it.  We  are  look- 
ing into  the  space  the  glass  occupies.  We  are 
looking  into  the  tension  of  space  in  the  glass, 
and  we  are  in  that  tension  as  solid  as  the  glass, 
and  are  reflected  through  it.  The  tension  re- 
flects all  matter,  and  all  matter  is  incased  in  it 
and  reflected  through  it. 

Now,  our  eyes  cannot  see  this  tension,  nor  our 
body  feel  it,  yet  it  is  our  life  force.  But  if  we 
could  see  it,  we  could  see  nothing  else ;  but  what 
we  see  is  only  a  shadow  in  the  tension,  like  our 
shadow  in  the  glass.  Now,  anything  with  a 
polished  surface  will  act  like  a  glass ;  for  this 
polished  surface  is  not  the  matter,  it  is  the  ten- 
sion, but  the  matter  holds  it  at  rest,  so  that  we 
can  act  on  it,  or  utilize  it. 

Now,  the  matter  is  only  a  piece  cut  out  of  the 
tension  of  space,  and  when  we  polish  it,  we  see 
the  tension,  not  the  matter.  The  tension  reflects 
this  matter  through  it.  Water  is  in  the  tension, 
and  reflects  matter,  like  the  glass.  It  holds  the 
tension  at  rest.  We  must  have  something  to 
hold  the  tension  at  rest,  so  that  we  can  act  on  it. 


214  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

or  see  through  it.  All  matter  and  tension  are 
continuous;  there  is  no  beginning  or  no  end. 
The  universe  is  one  solid  mass  of  tension.  The 
matter  that  we  see  is  only  condensed  gas  in  this 
solid  tension,  and  when  we  break  or  cut  a  piece 
off  this  matter,  we  cut  it  out  of  the  solid  uni- 
verse. This  cutting,  or  breaking,  does  not  dis- 
turb the  equilibrium  of  this  matter;  the  pres- 
sure is  always  uniform.  Nothing  can  disturb 
this  condition  but  heat  or  vibrations. 

This  matter  can  be  made  larger  or  smaller 
only  by  heat  or  cold.  These  are  Nature's  two 
actions,  producing  all  the  various  phenomena  of 
force. 

Now,  the  universe  is  one  continuous  mass,  and 
all  the  planetary  systems  are  condensed  in  this 
continuous  mass.  These  planets  are  a  continu- 
ation of  the  universe.  Everything,  from  an 
atom  to  the  earth,  is  a  continuation  of  one  and 
all. 

Let  us  see  what  takes  place  in  the  manufacture 
of  the  glass.  All  the  sand,  gravel,  flint,  and 
material  that  go  into  the  furnace  to  form  this 
glass,  is  in  the  tension  at  rest,  and  is  a  con- 
densed gas,  or  atoms,  held  in  their  forms  by  this 
tension,  and  all  this  mass  fills  no  space,  whether 
divided  or  solid.  Now,  the  furnace  occupies  a 
portion  of  space,  and  the  tension  is  in  that  space, 
at  rest,  and  we  take  all  this  mass  of  material  and 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  215 

put  it  into  the  furnace.  This  does  not  displace 
any  of  the  space  of  the  furnace.  The  tempera- 
ture is  about  seventy  degrees  above  zero,  and  we 
apply  heat  to  melt  this  mass.  Every  degree  of 
heat  we  apply  displaces,  or  raises,  a  degree  of 
cold,  and  as  the  heat  increases  the  cold  decreases. 
The  weight  is  being  lifted  from  the  mass  in  the 
furnace,  and  it  begins  to  unite.  The  heat  has 
lifted  the  cold  pressure  from  this  mass,  and  it  be- 
came a  liquid.  Its  atoms  are  all  united  by  the 
heat.  They  are  in  motion  and  in  life.  They  are 
free  to  move.  Now,  this  heat  has  lifted  about 
three  thousand  degrees  of  cold,  and  all  the  atoms 
are  liberated,  and  are  free  to  move  without  re- 
sistance. Now,  all  this  mass  is  united  by  the 
tension  in  the  furnace.  The  atoms  have  all  com- 
bined to  form  a  solid.  This  heat  has  lifted  a 
great  weight  of  cold.  One  is  equal  to  the  other. 
All  this  molten  mass  is  in  the  tension,  part  and 
parcel  of  it.  All  this  mass  is  only  a  condensed 
gas  in  this  furnace  and  tension.  They  are  one, 
and  indivisible.  We  now  draw  off  this  molten 
mass  into  mould  to  form  sheets  of  glass.  This 
glass  is  cooling,  and  as  it  cools  the  tension  of 
space  is  pressing  all  around  it,  compressing  it 
into  a  solid.  There  is  now  three  thousand  de- 
grees of  cold  holding  it  in  this  solid  form. 

The   tensions  in  the  glass  and  around  it  are 
united.     They  are  one.     The  heat  and  cold  liave 


216  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

made  this  glass  solid  in  the  tension,  and  it  is  in 
equilibrium  and  at  rest,  and  it  cannot  get  out  of 
this  solid  form  until  three  thousand  degrees  of 
heat  are  applied  to  it.  This  is  a  great  pressure 
around  the  glass.  Now,  the  glass  is  the  tensions 
in  a  solid  form.  They  are  transparent  and  in 
harmony.  Now,  the  pressure  of  the  tension  in 
the  furnace  was  about  ten  thousand  tons  to  the 
square  inch.  The  heat  lifted  a  portion  of  that 
pressure,  and  allowed  the  mass  to  become  a 
liquid.  Nothing  but  heat  could  lift  this  pres- 
sure. The  heat  expanded  the  cold  tension 
around  the  mass  in  the  furnace,  and  it  became  a 
liquid. 

Let  us  see  how  this  matter  is  melted  into 
glass.  All  the  material  in  the  furnace  is  in  the 
tension  at  rest,  and  we  apply  heat  to  this  matter. 
This  heat  vibrates  the  tension  and  air  in  the 
furnace.  This  causes  a  circulation,  or  draught. 
This  vibrates  the  tension  around  this  matter, 
disturbing  its  equilibrium.  This  disturbance  is 
in  between  all  the  particles  in  the  furnace.  This 
is  disturbing  the  pressure  that  holds  this  matter 
in  its  solid  form.  The  matter  now  has  nothing 
to  hold  it  together,  and  it  dissolves.  The  ten- 
sion in  the  matter  resists  the  vibrations  of  the 
tension  around  it.  This  heats  the  matter,  and 
the  vibrations  increase  with  the  heat,  and  all 
this  matter  dissolves  and  forms  a  liquid.     The 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  217 

tension  in  the  furnace  is  now  expanded,  and  this 
expanded  all  the  atoms.  They  now  fill  more 
space  than  when  cold.  This  is  the  only  period 
that  matter  can  fill  any  space.  The  pressure  of 
the  heat  around  the  cold  tension  liquefied  the 
matter.  The  heat  and  cold  pressed  together  and 
crushed  the  matter.  The  matter  was  the  resist- 
ing medium.  It  resisted  the  expansion  ;  it  was 
occupying  the  space  between  the  heat  and  cold, 
and  this  liberated  all  its  atoms,  giving  them  free 
motion  in  a  fluid  form.  This  heat  had  to  raise 
three  thousand  degrees  of  cold.  The  cold  held 
this  matter  in  its  solid  form,  and  the  heat  raised 
the  weight  of  cold,  and  it  became  a  fluid.  All 
matter  is  in  the  tension,  and  when  heat  is  ap- 
plied to  this  matter,  it  expands  it.  This  expan- 
sion is  trying  to  fill  more  space,  but  all  space  is 
full,  and  there  is  no  room  for  any  more  matter, 
and  this  expanding  matter  has  to  press  against 
all  the  universe.  There  is  ten  thousand  tons  to 
the  square  inch  of  surface  pressing  against  this 
expanding  matter.  This  is  what  crushes  all  mat- 
ter, generating  heat  in  it.  This  crushed  matter 
is  now  a  gas,  offering  no  resistance.  It  fills  no 
space,  and  is  free  to  move  out  of  the  way  of  the 
pressure  against  it ;  and  this  gas  is  heat,  and  is 
pulled  up  to  the  cold  air  space  and  condensed, 
and  pressed  back  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest. 
Now,  the  action  of  the  heat  and  cold  crushed 


218  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

the  matter  into  gas,  and  forced  this  gas  up  into 
the  clouds.  This  was  the  force  exerted  by  these 
two  actions.  It  was  the  work  done.  They  raised 
that  weight  a  certain  height. 

The  tension  we  find  is  everything,  and  every- 
thing is  the  tension.  The  matter  that  we  see  is 
condensed  gases.  These  gases  are  heat,  for  they 
resist  the  cold.  Now,  all  matter  is  heat,  and  all 
space  is  the  cold  tension ;  and  all  matter  is  con- 
densed into  this  tension,  and  anything  that  can 
vibrate,  or  make  heat,  will  disturb  the  equilib- 
rium of  this  matter  and  tension.  This  will  gen- 
erate heat  in  this  matter,  for  it  will  resist  these 
vibrations.  Now,  the  tension  is  the  one  univer- 
sal force.  It  is  Electricity  and  Magnetism  ;  it  is 
heat  and  cold;  it  is  our  daylight  and  all  other 
lights ;  it  is  the  life  of  everything  on  the  earth ; 
it  is  mind  and  thought ;  it  is  gravity  and  attrac- 
tion ;  it  is  cohesion,  adhesion,  and  affinity ;  it  is 
combustion  ;  it  is  the  Leyden  Jar ;  it  is  the  fire- 
fly ;  it  is  the  glow-worm ;  it  is  the  galvanic  bat- 
tery ;  it  is  the  telegraph  ;  it  is  the  telephone ;  it 
is  the  medium  of  all  sound;  it  is  what  holds  all 
the  planetary  systems  in  place,  imparting  life  and 
motion  to  them. 

This  simplifies  all  the  phenomena  of  Nature's 
action  of  heat  and  cold. 

The  air  around  the  earth  is  all  in  motion  and 
circulation,  disturbing  all  this  space.     It  is  like 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  219 

the  water  in  the  ocean.  As  we  go  down  into  the 
water  we  find  it  all  full  of  life,  like  our  air.  All 
the  fishes  and  animalculse  are  moving  through 
it,  without  resistance,  for  without  the  water  they 
could  not  swim.  These  fishes  are  all  happy  and 
active ;  they  do  not  feel  the  pressure  of  the 
water.  We  find  all  these  fishes  breathing  like 
animals  on  the  land,  but  the  fishes  breathe  water. 
They  must  obey  the  law  that  gives  them  life. 
This  breathing  disturbs  the  lines  of  tension  gen- 
erating heat,  and  this  produces  the  circulation  in 
them.  This  is  the  circulation  of  the  sun  and 
earth,  and  is  imparted  to  all  fishes  in  all  waters, 
for  these  waters  fill  no  space  in  this  tension.  The 
waters  are  a  condensed  gas,  or  vapor. 

As  we  go  further  down  we  find  the  pressure 
greater,  but  it  does  not  disturb  or  injure  the  fish. 
As  we  go  down  from  ten  thousand  to  fifty  thou- 
sand feet,  we  find  the  waters  swarming  with  all 
kinds  of  fish,  swimming  in  all  directions,  ap- 
parently without  any  exertion.  The  pressure  of 
the  water  does  not  interfere  with  their  motion, 
yet  there  is  several  tons  to  the  square  inch 
around  them.  The  temperature  down  here  is 
about  uniform,  about  fifty  degrees  above  zero, 
and  all  the  life  down  here  appears  to  be  in  a 
happy  and  healthy  condition.  They  are  all 
moving  around  in  their  own  family  circles. 
These  families  do  not  quarrel  with  each  other. 


220  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

We  find  different  currents  of  water  at  different 
depths.  These  currents  run  in  opposite  direc- 
tions, and  have  different  temperatures,  like  the 
air.  Now,  tliese  different  currents  of  water  dis- 
turb the  lines  of  tension  and  generate  heat  in 
this  water. 

The  water  holds  the  tension  almost  solid,  and 
when  two  currents  are  moving  in  opposite  direc- 
tions, this  disturbs  the  lines  of  tension,  and  heat 
is  generated  in  the  water.  This  expands  the 
water,  giving  it  more  motion,  and  generating 
more  heat.  This  is  a  continuous  action.  This 
keeps  the  water  always  in  motion  and  agitation, 
keeping  up  the  circulation  in  the  water,  like  the 
circulation  in  the  air.  Now,  these  fishes 
move  through  the  water  like  we  move  through 
the  air,  without  apparent  resistance. 

We  will  now  pass  through  the  water  of  the 
ocean  up  to  the  north  pole ;  and,  as  we  approach 
it,  we  find  it  getting  colder — degree  by  degree  it 
increases  until  we  come  near  the  pole.  We  are 
twenty  thousand  feet  below  the  surface  of  the 
water,  and  it  is  about  the  freezing  point ;  but  we 
can  move  through  the  water  without  resistance, 
and  as  we  move  towards  the  surface,  we  find  the 
water  is  rigid.  We  cannot  penetrate  it,  for  it 
appears  to  be  solid.  It  is  a  frozen  mass  for  thou- 
sands of  feet  over  our  heads,  and  we  wonder  how 
this  ice  was  formed  ;  but  we  can  move  through 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  221 

the  water  under  this  great  mountain  of  ice  as 
though  there  was  nothing  above  us.  This  moun- 
tain of  ice  appears  to  be  transparent,  for  we  can 
see  through  it,  and  out  into  space,  but  we  cannot 
move  through  it,  for  it  is  rigid  and  at  rest ;  but 
the  water  down  here  is  all  in  motion,  and  every- 
thing is  moving  through  it.  The  temperature 
in  the  ice  is  from  ten  to  sixty  degrees  colder  than 
in  the  water. 

Now,  the  ice  is  condensed  vapor,  and  the  water 
under  the  ice  is  the  same,  but  they  are  separated 
by  the  different  conditions  of  heat.  The  water  is 
flexible,  and  the  ice  is  rigid  and  at  rest.  The  ice 
is  like  the  cold  tension  of  space  outside  the  air 
space  of  the  earth,  and  the  water  under  the  ice  is 
like  the  air  space  around  the  earth.  The  air  is 
in  motion,  like  the  water,  and  the  cold  tension 
beyond  the  air  is  solid  and  rigid,  like  the  ice. 
The  lines  of  tension  in  the  ice  are  held  rigidly, 
but  the  water  disturbs  these  lines,  generating 
heat  in  it. 

Whatever  has  motion  must  have  heat,  for  it  is 
the  motion  that  gives  it  heat.  This  motion  dis- 
turbs the  lines  of  tension  in  the  water,  gener- 
ating heat  in  it.  This  prevents  the  water  from 
freezing,  and  allows  the  fishes  to  move  through  it. 

Now,  the  cold  tension  of  space  is  rigid  and  at 
rest,  and  the  earth,  with  its  air  space,  is  rolling 
through   this  cold,  rigid  tension,  disturbing  its 


222  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

equilibrium,  breaking  its  rigidity  and  gener- 
ating heat.  This  makes  the  air  and  tension 
flexible,  allowing  everything  to  move  through  it 
without  resistance;  but  if  the  air  around  the 
earth  was  rigid,  and  had  no  motion  or  heat,  then 
it  would  be  like  the  ice,  and  nothing  could  move 
through  it,  and  there  could  be  no  life  or  motion ; 
but  the  heated  air  breaks  the  rigidity,  and  gives 
motion  and  life  to  everything  on  the  earth. 

We  find  the  universe  in  one,  all  united  by  the 
tension  of  space;  and  all  the  planetary  system 
is  a  condensation  in  this  tension,  and  all  these 
planets  are  composed  of  atoms,  and  all  these 
atoms  have  life  and  motion.  These  atoms  are 
condensed,  are  consolidated,  together,  and  they 
form  and  build  up  a  world,  or  planet.  All  these 
atoms  are  seeking  a  point  of  rest,  and  they  rest 
against  their  own  kind,  or  family.  These  atoms 
have  heat  within  them.  This  is  their  life  and 
motion,  and  the  atoms  are  a  continuation  of  the 
universe.  There  is  no  space  between  these  atoms ; 
there  may  be  distance,  and  these  atoms  fill  no 
space  in  the  tension,  for  nothing  can  expel,  or 
displace,  this  tension  but  heat,  when  this  heat  is 
great  enough. 

Now,  everything  is  connected  and  united,  but 
can  move  individually.  This  movement  is  a 
continuation  of  the  whole  universe.  Nothing 
can  break  or  separate  this  continuity ;  everything 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  223 

is  moving  in  it,  and  is  of  it,  and  cannot  get  out 
of  it.  Now,  there  is  nothing  coming  into  this 
universe,  or  going  out  of  it.  It  is  full,  and  can 
hold  no  more ;  and  everything  that  grows  must 
grow  up  in  this  tension  by  condensation  of  the 
gases  that  are  here.  This  growth  brings  no  new 
matter  with  it.  It  is  a  continuation  of  the  whole 
universe,  a  universal  circulation.  Now,  all  the 
planetary  systems  are  united.  There  is  no  space 
between  them.  There  may  be  a  distance,  but  this 
distance  takes  no  time  for  transmission,  or  com- 
munication. If  we  had  a  conductor  that  would 
encircle  the  universe,  the  time  occupied  in  this 
communication  would  be  the  resistance  in  the 
matter,  or  the  wire  ;  but  it  would  take  no  time  in 
the  tension,  for  it  is  one  and  indivisible. 

Now,  when  we  look  at  anything,  we  are  look- 
ing at  a  part  of  the  solid,  or  continuous  uni- 
verse. This  thing  is  only  condensed  gases  in 
this  solid  tension.  It  is  only  like  a  shadow  in 
the  glass.  This  thing  can  be  vaporized,  and 
would  disappear  in  gas.  This  separation  of  the 
atoms  of  this  thin^  would  not  disturb  the  space, 
or  tension,  that  this  thing  occupied.  These  gases 
might  be  collected  and  condensed  into  a  similar 
thing  by  heat.  All  this  action,  or  change,  would 
disturb  the  continuity,  or  equilibrium,  of  the 
universe,  only  during  the  period  of  change, 
and  that  would  be  the  time  of  heating.     This 


224  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

heat  would  be  trying  to  make  a  hole  in  this  solid 
universe.  The  heated  space  would  be  all  in  vi- 
bration. It  would  be  pressing  against  the  whole 
universe,  for  this  space  would  be  expanded  from 
the  heat ;  but  the  heat  is  now  removed,  and  the 
heat  space  is  filled  with  the  solid  universe.  It 
has  found  its  equilibrium  and  point  of  rest  in 
itself. 

Now,  if  we  could  see  the  tension,  we  could  see 
nothing  else,  for  we  would  see  through  all  mat- 
ter, the  same  as  we  would  see  through  a  piece  of 
glass,  and  as  we  would  look  at  the  earth,  it  would 
be  like  looking  into  space,  and  if  we  looked  at  a 
solid  piece  of  steel  ten  feet  square,  it  would  be  as 
transparent  as  the  glass;  but  the  mind  can  see 
through  all  matter.  Everj^thing  is  transparent 
to  it  when  it  once  understands  it.  Nothing  can 
insulate  or  separate  mind  ;  it  is  the  universal 
tension  and  force  permeating  all  matter  and 
space,  and  mind  looks  through  this  like  the 
glass.  There  is  a  limit  to  the  eye's  seeing,  but 
there  is  no  limit  to  the  mind  seeing,  and  there  is 
no  darkness,  or  recess,  that  the  mind  cannot 
pierce  and  see  through. 

Now,  all  matter  being  a  continuation  of  the 
universe,  this  matter  is  the  tension,  and  every- 
thing is  of  that  tension,  and  nothing  can  insu- 
late or  divide  it.  We  wonder  why  there  cannot 
be  some  substance  that  will  insulate  magnetism. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  225 

Now,  magnetism  is  the  tension  circulating 
through  the  magnet,  and  the  magnet  is  filled 
with  it,  and  nothing  can  separate  or  divide  it,  for 
-all  substance  is  condensed  into  this  tension,  and 
nothing  ever  can  be  produced  that  can  divide  it, 
for  everything  is  continuous  in  this  tension. 
The  clouds  are  a  partial  insulation  of  heat  and 
light.  They  contain  moisture,  or  water,  in  a 
vapor  form.  All  this  vapor  is  in  motion.  It 
offers  a  resistance  to  the  lines  of  tension,  absorb- 
ing the  heat  and  light,  preventing  them  from 
passing  down  on  the  earth.  These  clouds  par- 
tially separate  the  circulation  of  the  earth's  at- 
mosphere, preventing  the  continuity  of  it.  This  is 
what  causes  the  shadows.  These  clouds  are  from 
one  to  three  miles  above  the  earth,  and  the 
■earth's  circulation  is  about  two  hundred  miles ; 
and  all  the  air  space  above  the  clouds  is  lumi- 
nous, for  all  this  space  is  in  vibration  from  the 
'Circulation  of  the  air,  and  as  we  look  down  on 
these  clouds,  we  see  them  brilliantly  illumin- 
ated, reflecting  their  light  and  heat  upwards, 
thus  cutting  it  off  from  the  earth.  These  clouds 
are  in  layers  of  different  density,  rolling  over 
each  other,  absorbing  the  heat  and  light  into 
them,  for  these  clouds  are  cold,  perhaps  in  the 
form  of  fine  snow.  This  snow  can  absorb  large 
quantities  of  heat.  This  heat  and  light  is  cut 
off  by  these  clouds,  leaving  the  earth  in  partial 


226  FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

darkness,  and  cool.  The  clouds  have  absorbed 
the  vibrations  disturbing  their  continuity. 

Now,  all  space  being  filled  with  the  universal 
tension,  anything  that  we  may  make,  or  manu- 
facture, contains  this  tension  within  it,  and  is 
part  and  parcel  of  it,  and  nothing  can  separate 
or  divide  it.  This  manufactured  article  cannot 
insulate  magnetism,  or  the  tension,  for  they  are 
one  and  indivisible ;  but  anything  that  will  not 
vibrate,  or  produce  sound,  deadens,  or  partially 
breaks,  the  continuity  of  the  vibrations.  This 
has  a  tendency  towards  insulating,  but  cannot 
prevent  the  tension  from  circulating  through  it. 

This  is  why  we  cannot  find  an  insulator  for 
magnetism..  Rubber,  and  all  so-called  insula- 
tors, are  condensed  gases  in  the  solid  tension,  and 
this  tension  can  circulate  through  them  as  read- 
ily as  air  can  circulate  through  a  wire  screen 
with  meshes  an  inch  square.  Nothing  can  con- 
fine, separate,  or  insulate  the  tension  when  heat,, 
or  vibrations,  are  applied  to  it.  It  is  the  great 
equalizing  force,  filling  all  space  and  all  matter. 

Now,  electricity  is  not  a  thing,  or  is  not  gener- 
ated. What  we  call  electricity  is  only  the  ten- 
sion disturbed  by  vibrations  of  heat.  The  vibra- 
tions cause  the  heat,  for  the  cold  tension  of  space 
resists  the  vibrations,  and  heat  is  the  result  of 
the  battle.  This  is  a  disturbance  of  a  perma- 
nent condition,  but  we  do  not  generate,  produce^ 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  227 

or  make  anything.  We  simply  disturb  the  equi- 
librium of  the  space  we  are  acting  on,  and  this 
disturbed  space  seeks  to  find  its  equilibrium  in 
some  other  space,  and  heat  is  not  generated  or 
produced. 

The  conditions  to  cause  this  heat  are  here ; 
and  when  these  conditions  are  disturbed,  heat  is 
the  result  of  the  disturbance.  The  tension  is  the 
inertia  filling  all  space ;  and  when  this  is  dis- 
turbed, heat  is  the  result. 

All  metals  are  atoms  condensed  into  a  solid. 
The  different  kinds  of  metals  have  diff*erent 
ranges  of  vibrations.  They  are  of  different  fami- 
lies. These  families  travel  on  their  own  lines; 
when  liberated,  they  are  of  different  densities 
and  different  temperature — for  it  takes  different 
degrees  of  heat  to  liquefy,  or  liberate,  these 
metals.  They  seek  their  equilibrium,  or  point 
of  rest,  in  their  own  families ;  they  do  not  care 
to  associate,  or  mix,  with  strangers.  This  they 
do  only  when  man  interferes  with  them,  and 
confines  them  together,  and  applies  heat  to 
them.  Then  they  are  not  free  to  act;  they  must 
submit  to  the  greater  force  around  them.  This 
is  man's  will,  not  the  will  of  the  atoms  of  the 
metals.  Now,  all  these  atoms  have  their  different 
modes  of  motion,  aiid  can  rest  only  in  their  own 
embrace,  or  family — for  every  atom  is  seeking 
its  point  of  rest.     But  it  cannot  rest  against  an 


228  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

atom  of  another  family — for  they  will  not  assim- 
ilate, or  harmonize,  owing  to  the  difference  in 
their  vibrating  structure.  When  two  atoms  of 
the  same  family  meet,  they  embrace  each  other 
with  the  greatest  love  and  emotion,  and  this  emo- 
tion is  imparted  to  each  other  through  the  ten- 
sion that  unites  them.  This  tension  now  circu- 
lates through  these  two  atoms,  making  them  one ; 
they  have  found  their  point  of  rest  in  their  own 
embrace,  and  are  united  by  the  tension  of  space. 
Now,  these  atoms  can  continue  to  combine  and 
consolidate  and  form  a  mass.  This  mass  will 
offer  a  resistance  to  the  circulation  of  the  ten- 
sion through  them.  This  will  generate  heat  in 
them,  and  the  tension  will  press  against  this 
mass,  gradually  compressing  them  into  a  smaller 
space.  This  action  is  constant,  and  will  form  these 
atoms  into  a  solid — for  their  great  love  for  each 
other  causes  them  to  press  as  close  together  as 
their  density  will  admit.  Now,  all  matter  is 
atoms;  and  the  atoms  have  their  own  families, 
and  one  family  does  not  interfere  with  another. 
Each  family  is  desirous  to  stay  by  themselves,  if 
they  are  not  molested  or  disturbed.  This  is 
Nature's  simple  way  of  keeping  harmony  in  her 
vast  families  of  atoms.  One  law,  and  one  force, 
and  all  the  universe,  with  its  vast  planetary  sys- 
tems, and  their  families  of  atoms,  all  obeying 
this  one  simple  law,  without  any  contention  or 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  229 

quarreling,  all  happy  and  contented,  moving 
through  space,  traveling  on  their  own  lines  or 
circuit,  visiting  each  other  on  their  journey 
through  space.  The  visit  is  mutual,  without 
contact.  They  communicate  through  the  ten- 
sion, not  through  their  matter.  Now,  it  is  rea- 
sonable to  assume  that  these  atoms  and  planets 
have  intelligence — for  it  is  intelligence  that  gives 
them  form  and  motion  ;  and  everything  that  has 
form  has  intelligence;  it  could  not  exist  without 
intelligence — for  the  whole  universe  is  one  mass 
of  wisdom  beyond  man's  conception.  Now, 
man  must  not  think  he  is  the  only  intelligent 
being — for  man's  intelligence  is  artificial.  It  is 
not  natural;  it  is  acquired.  But  all  the  uni- 
verse, with  all  the  planetary  systems,  is  one  mass 
of  natural  intelligence,  from  the  atom  to  the 
earth.  They  obey  the  law  of  Nature,  which  is 
their  life;  but  man  ignores  the  law  of  Nature. 
He  makes  his  own  laws;  and  when  he  breaks 
Nature's  laws,  he  suffers  through  his  body  for 
his  disobedience.  This  suffering  is  in  the  matter 
of  the  body. 

Now,  man  is  an  intelligent  being.  He  is  built 
up  of  atoms,  and  each  one  of  these  atoms  has 
life,  motion,  intelligence,  and  reason.  All  these 
atoms  perform  their  own  work,  and  are  in 
harmony  and  consolidated  into  this  body,  mak- 
ing it  one;    but  these  atoms  in  this  body  can 


230  FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

be  separated  by  heat  or  cold,  when  it  is  great 
enough. 

Now,  all  animals  are  built  up  of  atoms  of  the 
same  tind  as  man,  and  these  atoms  have  intelli- 
gence and  reason — for  they  obey  the  same  law 
that  gives  them  life  and  motion.  These  atoms 
composing  man  and  animal  are  of  the  same 
families,  brothers  and  sisters,  male  and  female, 
in  perfect  harmony  and  accord,  all  assisting  each 
other,  with  brotherly  love  and  affection,  to  main- 
tain the  life  of  these  bodies  of  man  and  animal. 
These  bodies  are  a  continuation  and  a  part  of  the 
whole  universe.  They  are  part  and  parcel  of  all 
the  planetary  system,  and  are  in  communication 
with  all  this  great  universe.  They  are  of  it, 
united  to  it,  and  part  of  it,  and  nothing  can  de- 
stroy the  atoms  composing  these  bodies — for  they 
always  have  existed  and  always  will  exist;  and 
the  space  that  these  bodies  occupy  is  the  univer- 
sal tension,  and  nothing  can  move  this  or  destroy 
it.  And  when  the  atoms  composing  any  of  these 
bodies  leave  them,  through  heat  or  cold,  this 
space  that  these  atoms  have  left  remains  in  this 
place,  or  space,  and  nothing  can  move  this  but 
the  body  that  occupied  it — for  this  body  grew  up 
in  it,  and  acted  on  it,  and  retained  it ;  and  no 
other  body,  or  matter,  could  occupy,  or  utilize, 
this  space — for  it  could  not  get  into  it  only  by 
growth.     No  two  atoms,  or  bodies,  can  occupy 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  231 

the  same  place,  or  space  —  for  all  atoms  and 
bodies  hold  this  space,  or  tension,  within  them, 
and  everything  occupies  its  own  space,  and  can 
get  out  of  this  space  only  by  heat  or  cold,  when 
it  is  great  enough,  and  this  must  be  by  the  atoms 
separating  into  gas.  Each  one  of  these  atoms 
occupies  its  own  space,  and  nothing  can  get  into 
this  space — for  it  belongs  to  this  atom  by  growth. 
Everything  must  grow  up  in  this  space  by  con- 
densation of  the  gases  of  atoms  that  are  of  the 
earth  and  air. 

Now,  each  one  of  these  atoms  occupies  its  own 
individual  space,  and  nothing  can  destroy  this 
atom,  or  the  space  it  occupies ;  and  when  these 
atoms  condense  together,  being  of  the  same  fam- 
ily and  of  the  same  range  of  vibrations,  all  these 
atoms  consolidate  and  form  a  mass.  The}^  are  in 
harmony,  and  the  tension  circulates  through 
them  as  if  they  were  one.  This  causes  a  pres- 
sure around  these  atoms,  and  heat  is  generated 
in  their  mass.  This  causes  the  mass  to  vibrate, 
and  the  cold  tension  is  constantly  pressing 
around  them,  compressing  them  into  a  smaller 
space,  forming  them  into  what  we  call  a  solid. 
This  solid  is  composed  of  individual  atoms,  sur- 
rounded by  the  tension  of  space.  This  is  what 
holds  them  in  this  solid  form.  And  when  we 
can  vibrate  this  space  composing  the  atoms  rap- 
idly enough  to  destroy  the  equilibrium  of  tliis 

lUHIVBIlSITTl 


232  FROM  DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT. 

space,  then  we  can  liberate  these  atoms;  but 
these  vibrations  will  cause  heat  in  each  one  of 
these  atoms,  making  them  incandescent.  These 
atoms  resist  the  vibrations  of  the  tension  that 
holds  them  in  this  solid  form.  This  resistance 
is  what  causes  the  heat,  and  liberates  all  the 
atoms,  or  gas. 


FKOM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  233 


A   LOOK   INTO  WHAT  TAKES  PLACE  IN 
A  COMMON  KETTLE  WHEN  BOIL- 
ING WATER. 

THIS  kettle  occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and 
the  tension  is  in  that  space  at  rest.  We  fill 
this  kettle  with  water.  This  does  not  displace 
the  tension,  or  space,  in  this  kettle.  The  water 
was  gas,  and  condensed  into  water.  This  water 
fills  no  space  in  this  kettle.  The  tension  fills  all 
space  ;  but  the  water  is  condensed  into  it. 

Now,  we  apply  heat  to  this  kettle  and  water. 
The  heat  vibrates  the  tension  in  the  kettle,  pro- 
ducing a  circulation,  and  the  water  resists  the 
vibrations  and  circulation,  and  heat  is  generated 
in  the  water.  The  water  prevents  the  tension 
from  circulating  freely,  absorbing  the  heat,  hold- 
ing it.  This  heat  is  the  vibrations  against  the 
water,  the  water  resisting  and  retaining  the  vi- 
brations and  heat  in  it. 

Now,  all  the  water  and  space  in  the  kettle  are  in 
vibration,  from  the  heat  applied  to  it.  All  the 
space  in  this  kettle  is  thrown  out  of  equilibrium 
from  these  vibrations.  This  vaporizes  the  water, 
and  it  goes  off  in  steam.  The  tension  in  the  ket- 
tle divides  all  the  atoms,  or  molecules,  of  the 


234  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

water,  separating  it,  and  the  heat  applied  in- 
creases the  vibrations,  preventing  the  water  from 
holding  together. 

The  water  is  seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  point 
of  rest,  but  the  heat  will  not  let  the  water  rest ; 
and  as  the  heat  increases,  the  vibrations  in- 
crease, and  the  water  is  vaporized,  goii^ig  off  in 
heat  or  steam.  Now,  the  tension  in  the  kettle  of 
water  cut  and  divided  this  water  into  steam. 
The  particles  of  water  could  not  hold  together, 
and  they  were  crushed  into  vapor,  or  steam,  and 
this  steam  goes  up  into  the  clouds  and  condenses 
into  rain.     This  is  Nature's  simple  circulation. 

The  space  in  this  kettle  was  the  tension  of 
space,  and  when  it  was  disturbed  by  the  vibra- 
tions, produced  heat.  This  heat  was  trying  to 
make  a  hole  in  this  space ;  but  all  the  tension 
was  pressing  against  this  vibrating  space  in  this 
kettle;  and  as  the  heat  increased  it  pressed 
against  the  cold,  and  the  cold  resisted  the  heat, 
and  the  heat  resisted  the  cold,  and  the  water  was 
vaporized,  or  crushed,  into  heat,  or  steam.  The 
water  resisted  the  action,  or  pressure,  of  the  heat 
and  cold,  and  was  crushed  into  vapor.  This 
water  expanded,  and  tried  to  fill  more  space; 
but  all  space  is  full,  and  can  hold  no  more,  and 
the  cold  tension  pressed  against  this  expanding 
water,  and  crushed  it  into  vapor — for  it  could 
not  fill  any  more  space   and   hold  its  form  as 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  235 

water.  It  must  take  the  form  of  gas,  filling  no 
space.  Now,  all  this  gas,  or  steam,  is  divided 
into  atoms,  or  molecules,  and  is  floating  in  the 
tension,  but  it  cannot  divide  it.  The  tension  can 
divide  everything,  but  nothing  can  divide  the 
tension.  It  is  indivisible,  and  everything  is  con- 
densed into  it ;  and  when  vibrated,  it  separates 
everything,  giving  it  freedom  in  a  gaseous  form, 
where  it  came  from.  This  is  Nature's  way  of 
separating  and  equalizing  her  presssure  and 
force.  Now,  this  steam  was  not  generated  or 
produced.  It  was  condensed  water,  or  vapor, 
held  in  the  tension,  and  when  this  tension  was 
vibrated,  it  vaporized  the  water — for  the  water 
resisted  these  vibrations,  and  heat  was  the  re- 
sult. The  heat  was  not  generated  or  produced  ; 
it  was  a  disturbance  of  the  tension  in  the  kettle. 
This  tension  is  a  permanent  condition,  and  any- 
thing that  can  vibrate  it  will  cause  heat — for 
these  vibrations  are  resisted  b}^  the  w^ater  and 
tension,  and  heat  is  the  result  of  the  fight. 

We  have  not  been  able  to  find  a  secret  or  mys- 
tery in  all  the  phenomena  that  we  have  enumer- 
ated— for  heat  and  cold  produce  all  these  phe- 
nomena, and  these  actions,  we  are  well  acquainted 
with,  for  we  see  them  in  every  action  of  life  and 
motion  around  us.  We  see  it  in  the  coal  and 
wood  fire,  cooking  our  food  and  heating  our 
bodies,  lighting   our  houses  and  streets,  propel- 


23G  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

ling  our  ships  and  railroads,  running  all  our  ma- 
chinery for  all  purposes.  We  find  them  making 
rain,  and  ice,  and  snow,  wind,  hail,  and  cyclone 
storms,  thunder  and  lightning,  sunshine  and 
calm ;  producing  fruits  and  vegetable  life,  and 
all  beautiful  flowers,  with  their  various  colors 
and  hues.  These  are  no  secrets  or  mysteries. 
We  find  them  in  the  magnet,  giving  it  circula- 
tion ;  producing  electricity  encircling  the  earth, 
imparting  our  thoughts  to  it.  This  is  no  mys- 
tery or  secret.  We  are  using  these  forces,  and 
utilizing  them,  and  handling  them,  and  if  we 
are  ignorant  of  their  nature,  it  is  not  Nature's 
fault. 

We  are  familiar  with  the  telephone,  but  not 
its  nature.  We  are  well  acquainted  with  life, 
for  we  see  it  all  around  us ;  but  we  say  this  is 
the  greatest  mystery  of  all ;  yet  we  see  every- 
thing around  us  has  life.  It  is  a  very  common 
thing,  but  its  nature  we  do  not  understand. 
This  is  our  fault,  not  Nature's ;  but  we  feel  the 
effect  of  heat  or  cold  when  it  is  too  great  for  our 
bodies.  There  is  a  certain  condition  of  heat  that 
we  like.  This  is  Nature's  guide;  but  when  we 
are  surrounded  by  cold,  the  body  shivers.  This 
generates  heat  in  it  by  vibrating  the  tension, 
and  the  matter  resists,  and  heat  is  the  result. 

Everything  in  Nature  is  simple,  and  open  for 
investigation,  for  all  who  want  to  understand  her 


FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  237 

law  and  force.  Everything  is  a  mystery  to  those 
that  do  not  want  to  investigate  or  seek  the  truth 
of  Nature.  This  is  the  truth,  that  cannot  be 
confounded,  confuted,  or  contaminated.  It  is 
the  universal  force,  and  truth,  and  life  of  every- 
thing in  the  universe,  and  the  fundamental 
principle  and  foundation  of  all  truth,  everlast- 
ing, one,  and  indivisible ;  and  when  man  under- 
stands this  truth,  and  lives  in  it,  and  up  to  it, 
then*he  will  raise  himself  above  the  animal  that 
he  is,  and  his  mind  will  be  unchained,  and  set 
free,  to  soar  into  space,  illimitable  space,  with  all 
the  planetary  systems  throughout  that  space; 
and  man  has  all  this  as  mind  and  thought,  all  at 
his  command,  and  he  can  communicate  through 
all  this  vastness.  This  whole  universe  is  all 
mind,  and  man  is  part  and  parcel  in  and  of  that 
mind,  and  everything  is  solidly  incased  in  that 
solid  mind.  How  could  man  ever  get  out  of  the 
animal  without  knowing  what  mind  and  thought 
is,  and  life,  and  motion,  and  the  law  of  Nature, 
with  its  force?  Man's  mind  had  no  conductor, 
or  lines,  to  travel  on.  It  had  no  basis,  or  founda- 
tion ;  it  was  wandering  without  a  guide,  or  a 
connecting  link,  to  travel  on  ;  but  when  he  once 
understands  wdiat  he  is,  and  what  relation  he 
bears  to  the  universe,  then  his  mind  will  be  ele- 
vated beyond  the  matter  of  his  body,  and  he  will 
be  lifted  from  ignorance  into  the  most  exalted 


238  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

position,  or  place,  that  man  could  occupy.     It 
Avill  be  from  darkness  to  light  everlasting. 

How  simple  every  phenomenon  and  action  in 
Nature  is,  when  we  once  understand  it,  and  its 
cause.  Everything  existing  has  mind — for  all 
space  is  mind,  and  all  matter  is  incased  in  that 
solid  mind.  This  matter  may  be  divided,  but 
the  mind  is  indivisible,  and  indestructible.  How 
could  anything  be  destroyed  ?  What  could  de- 
stroy this  thing  ?  A  thing  cannot  destroy  itself. 
Man  may  kill  himself,  but  he  cannot  destroy  his 
body.  If  he  consumes  his  body,  he  does  not  de- 
stroy it ;  he  simply  liberates  the  gases  composing 
his  body,  allowing  these  gases  to  go  free  and  as- 
similate with  the  gases  composing  the' air.  These 
gases  cannot  be  destroyed.  Nature  never  made 
anything  that  could  be  destroyed.  Everything 
can  change  from  a  solid  to  a  gas,  and  from  a  gas 
to  a  solid.  This  is  done  by  heat  and  cold.  This 
is  Nature's  process  of  changing  places  through 
her  circulation.  If  we  could  throw  the  matter 
off  the  earth  into  space,  it  would  not  be  de- 
stroyed. It  could  not  get  out  of  the  universe — 
for  there  is  no  beginning  or  end  to  it,  and  it 
would  always  remain  the  same  matter.  There  is 
nothing  coming  or  going  out  of  all  this  universe. 
The  &ame  quantity  remains  eternally,  for  all  the 
universe  is  filled  more  solidly  than  steel,  and 
nothing  can  break  this  solidity,  for  everything  is 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  23(> 

incased  in  it,  and  is  part  and  parcel  of  it,  and 
united  to  it,  and  this  is  all  mind  and  matter; 
but  the  mind  can  crush  and  circulate  through 
this  matter — for  this  matter  is  only  gases  con- 
densed into  mind.  Mind  is  the  solid  universe, 
and  how  could  anything  exist  without  mind  ?' 
And  if  this  thing  has  mind,  it  must  have  reason,, 
and  if  it  has  reason,  it  cannot  be  destroyed,  for 
reason  is  the  universal  tension. 


240  FKOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


MIND    AND     ITS     RELATION    TO     THE 
BODY. 

THE  body  is  a  receptacle  for  the  mind,  and 
all  space  is  mind,  and  this  mind  must  have 
matter  to  hold  it,  to  act  on  it.  The  body  holds 
this  mind,  arid  acts  on  it,  and  utilizes  it,  it  being 
the  life  of  the  body.  This  body  is  only  a  shadow 
floating  in  the  mind.  All  the  nervous  structure 
of  the  body  is  vibrating  in  this  mind,  giving  life 
to  this  body.  This  action  is  harmonious  and  re- 
ciprocal, and  the  more  the  nerves  act  on  the 
mind,  the  more  mind  they  utilize.  All  the  blood 
in  circulation  through  the  body  is  disturbing 
and  acting  on  this  mind ;  but  the  bram  is  the 
seat  of  thought  and  reason.  Its  nerves,  being 
fine  and  sensitive,  are  able  to  act  more  and 
oftener  than  the  nerves  of  the  body.  The  nerves 
of  the  body  are  very  coarse  in  comparison  to  the 
nerves  of  the  brain;  but  the  brain  is  the  center 
of  all  the  nerves  of  the  body,  and  is  the  center 
of  all  the  universe.  It  is  a  central  station,  com 
municating  with  all  the  universe,  and  the  more 
the  brain  acts  on  and  communicates  with  the 
universe,  the  more  it  understands  and  sees 
through  it.     Now,  the  body  cannot  act  witliout 


FROM  DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT.  241 

i;he  brain.  They  are  united  and  indivisible. 
They  work  in  harmony.  One  is  necessary  to  the 
other,  each  has  its  o\  ii  work  to  perform. 
The  body  is  guided  by  the  brain,  and  can  act 
only  through  the  will  of  the  brain  acting  on  the 
mind.  The  mind  is  the  universal  force,  and 
mind  fills  all  space  and  matter.  The  brain  has 
all  this  to  act  on  and  utilize.  Now,  if  the  brain 
does  not  act  on  this  mind,  it  does  not  utilize  it, 
and  cannot  understand  it;  and  so  the  brain  has 
no  mind  when  it  does  not  utilize  or  act  on  mind. 
Now,  all  matter  acts  on  mind,  but  all  matter  has 
not  brains,  or  nerves.  These  are  of  the  animal 
family,  having  self  motion. 

This  motion  is  through  the  brain  acting  on 
mind,  and  the  mind  acts  through  the  nerves  and 
muscles  of  the  body,  and  motion,  or  movement, 
is  the  result  of  mind  acting  through  nerves  and 
muscles,  or  muscles  acting  on  mind.  These 
actions  must  be  harmonious  to  cause  motion. 
The  brain  acting  on  mind,  guides  and  directs 
the  motion  and  action  of  the  body,  but  all  the 
body  is  acting  on  mind.  This  is  the  life  and 
force  that  the  body  is  using,  and  this  force  never 
varies;  it  is  the  matter  of  the  body  that  varies — 
for  the  more  the  body  acts  on  and  disturbs  this 
mind  and  force,  the  more  mind  and  force  the 
body  exerts.  Now,  if  the  body  and  brain  does 
not  act  on,  or  utilize,  this  mind  and  force,  it  can- 


242  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

not  exert  mind,  or  force,  and  this  body  would  be  ex- 
isting without  exercising  mind,  thought,  or  force. 
It  would  be  merely  occupying  a  portion  of  spaca 
without  utilizing  the  conditions  in  that  space. 
Now,  the  body  has  the  use  of  mind  and  force,, 
if  it  wants  to  use  or  act  on  this  force.  Every- 
thing has  the  use  of  this  mind  and  force,  and 
they  can  utilize  it  according  to  their  structure,  or 
capacity,  to  act  on  it.  Now,  man's  intelligence 
and  thought  are  through  his  brain  acting  on  his 
mind,  and  the  more  he  exercises  and  uses  this 
mind,  the  more  mind,  or  intelligence,  he  ac- 
quires. Thought  and  thinking  are  what  exercises 
mind,  for  the  nerves  of  the  brain  are  acting  and 
vibrating  this  mind.  They  are  getting  ac- 
quainted with  each  other,  and  are  acquiring  a 
friendship,  and  love  and  harmony,  and  are  assist- 
ing each  other  to  perform  their  work  of  investi- 
gation, and  acquiring  intelligence,  experience, 
and  knowledge.  This  is  the  work  of  the  nerves 
of  the  brain  on  mind,  and  the  more  nerves  the 
brain  has  the  more  mind  and  thought  it  exer- 
cises. A  small  brain  acts  on  a  small  surface,  or 
quantity,  of  mind,  and  cannot  exert  as  mucli 
mind  as  a  larger  brain.  If  this  brain  is  of  a  fine^ 
texture,  or  highly  sensitive,  its  organs  are  well 
developed,  and  well  exercised,  by  thought  and 
study,  and  all  the  organs  of  the  brain  assist  each 
other.     If  these   organs  are  exercised   and  used 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  243 

harmoniously,  this  strengthens  the  brain  and 
prepares  it  for  a  great  mental  work ;  but  if  the 
brain  is  concentrated  on  one  subject,  or  thing, 
then  it  becomes  weakened  in  all  organs  but  the 
one  that  the  mind  is  concentrated  on.  This  one 
consolidates  and  controls  all  the  weaker  ones, 
and  the  brain  becomes  of  one  idea,  or  one-sided, 
and  loses  its  balance — for  it  cannot  understand, 
or  reason,  on  other  subjects  outside  the  one  it  is 
interested  in  ;  and  the  stronger  rules  aud  con- 
trols the  weaker  organs,  making  them  slaves  to 
it ;  and  the  brain  is  now  concentrated  on  one 
thought,  or  one  object,  and  is  controlled,  and  in- 
fluenced, b}^  this  thought,  and  is  carried  away 
by  it,  and  lost  in  it,  and  all  the  other  organs  of 
the  brain  are  weakened  and  reduced  in  vitality 
for  the  want  of  use,  or  exercise.  This  is  why  so 
many  brains  exercise  so  little  mind  and  reason, 
for  these  brains  are  not  balanced,  or  in  harmony. 
The  organs  do  not  assist  each  other,  by  con- 
sulting, consoling,  and  reasoning  with  each  other 
— for  all  the  organs  of  the  brain  are  like  a  large 
family,  in  perfect  accord  and  harmony,  consult- 
ing and  reasoning,  advising  and  assisting  each 
other  to  perform  their  various  works,  or  studies. 
These  studies  with  the  organs  of  the  brain,  by 
the  body's  assistance,  bring  the  brain  and  the 
body  into  harmony,  and  they  learn  to  know  each 
other,  and  they  gain  confidence,  strength,  expe- 
rience, and  wisdom  by  harmonizing. 


244  FROM   D.!iRKXESS   TO   LIGHT. 


ADHESION  AND  AFFINITY. 

ADHESION  and  affinity  are  names  or  actions 
that  Nature  ignores.  Nature's  law  is  simple, 
not  complicated.  She  has  no  room  for  these  names. 
The  cold  tension  of  space  occupies  all  space,  and 
there  is  no  room  for  anything  else.  This  ten- 
sion reaches  into  an  atom  as  it  does  into  a  moun- 
tain, and  its  pressure  is  felt  everywhere.  When 
these  atoms  come  together,  they  are  seeking  a 
point  of  rest,  and  the}^  rest  against  each  other, 
and  they  are  united  by  the  tension  of  space. 
This  is  what  presses  them  together ;  they  are  un- 
der the  same  strain,  and  in  the  same  range  of 
vibrations.  They  are  in  harmony,  and  they  are 
seeking  each  other — for  the}^  are  of  the  same 
family,  they  are  brothers  and  sisters,  male  and 
female,  all  iu  motion,  and  no  quarreling  or 
growling.  They  are  in  perfect  accord,  and  in 
harmony,  moving  on  their  own  lines.  These 
are  the  lines  of  tension.  These  lines  are  the 
guiding  lines  for  all  matter  and  all  action.  All 
ranges  of  vibrations  have  their  own  lines,  and 
these  vibrations  do  not  interfere  with  each  other; 
they  never  make  a  mistake.  They  mind  their 
own  business,  as  long  as  they  are  not  interfered 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  245 

with.  It  is  only  when  man  handles,  or  annoys, 
them  that  they  make  trouble.  All  the  different 
kinds  of  atoms  have  their  ranges  of  vibrations 
— for  all  atoms  offer  some  resistance  to  the  lines 
of  tension,  and  heat  is  generated  in  them.  This 
is  what  gives  them  motion,  and  this  motion  is 
peculiar  to  themselves,  or  to  this  family,  and 
when  man  handles,  or  incloses,  these  atoms  in  a 
receptacle,  then  they  find  their  relatives  and  join 
them.  They  are  seeking  a  union,  and  want  to 
be  united,  to  resist  and  defend  themselves.  Are 
these  atoms  intelligent,  or  is  man  the  only  intel- 
ligent being,  or  is  he  more  than  an  atom  ?  These 
atoms  have  life  and  motion;  what  more  has  man? 
The  same  force  gives  motion  to  man  and  atom. 
They  are  obeying  the  same  law.  They  cannot 
resist  this  law,  for  it  is  their  life.  Now,  these 
atoms  are  guided  by  the  structure  of  the  matter 
within  them.  This  matter  resists  the  circula- 
tion of  the  tension,  and  heat  is  generated  in  them, 
and  circulation  is  produced.  This  circulation  is 
an  interchange  of  heat  and  cold.  This  vibrates 
the  tension,  and  the  tension  vibrates  the  atoms, 
and  the  atoms  resist,  and  heat  is  the  result.  The 
same  action  gives  man  life — for  Nature  knows, 
and  has,  but  one  law,  and  everything  must  obey 
that  law.  Now,  the  earth  is  a  large  atom,  or  a 
concentration  of  atoms.  It  is  a  resting-place  for 
all  atoms  that  may  approach  it ;  and  all  these 


246  FKOM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

atoms  are  separate  and  individual  atoms,  but  are 
consolidated  into  one  mass  to  form  a  planet  world. 

Now,  the  earth  and  sun,  and  its  systems,  are 
one  family.  They  are  in  perfect  harmony,  and 
in  the  same  ranges  of  vibration.  They  are  as- 
sisting each  other  to  generate  heat,  to  maintain 
life.  How  could  this  family  of  worlds  maintain 
themselves,  if  they  were  quarreling,  or  fighting, 
and  burning  each  other  up,  in  order  to  dissipate 
that  lieat  into  space  for  no  use?  Can  Nature  be 
so  unwise  as  to  waste  all  her  energy  for  no  pur- 
pose? Nature  wastes,  or  consumes,  nothing. 
Man  being  a  wasteful  and  destructive  being,  he 
loves  to  w^aste  and  destroy  all  the  resources  of 
Nature  for  his  own  selfish  purpose,  not  caring 
how  Nature  may  suffer  by  his  destructiveness. 

Man  looks  at  Nature  through  himself,  not  as 
Nature  looks  at  him.  Nature  is  liberal ;  it  has 
no  favorites,  it  has  but  one  law.  Man  makes 
many  laws,  and  he  breaks  them  to  suit  himself; 
but  Nature  ignores  these  laws.  Nature  is  su- 
preme. We  see  all  the  atoms  have  their  mode  of 
motion,  and  these  atoms  cannot  go  astray,  or  be 
destroyed,  or  burned  up.  They  are  indestruct- 
ible. Like  all  other  matter,  they  are  traveling 
on  their  own  lines,  and  in  their  own  circuit,  and 
it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that  all  the  planetary 
systems  are  moving  like  these  atoms,  in  perfect 
harmony,  traveling  through  si)ace,  visiting  and 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  247 

saluting  each  other  as  they  pass — for  they  are  all 
brothers  and  sisters,  male  and  female,  all  of  one 
family,  having  an  intense  love  for  each  other. 
They  are  encircling  the  universe,  and  communi- 
cating with  eacli  other — for  they  are  all  united 
by  the  tension  of  space. 

Now,  everytliing  that  has  form  must  have 
heat  within  it — for  that  it  has  form  is  a  proof  of 
its  heat.  This  heat  is  its  life.  Let  us  take  a 
block  of  ice  and  put  it  into  an  iron  tank,  sus- 
pending it  in  the  center  of  this  tank.  This 
block  of  ice  is,  say  at  a  temperature  of  twenty- 
degrees  above  zero,  and  we  reduce  this  tempera- 
ture in  this  tank  to  twenty  degrees  below  zero. 
This  makes  a  pressure  around  the  ice.  This 
cold  pressure  around  the  ice  is  trjdng  to  crush 
out  the  heat  in  the  ice,  and  the  heat  in  the  ice 
presses  out  against  the  cold.  The  temperature  of 
the  ice  is  forty  degrees  higher  than  around  it. 
These  two  pressures  are  pressing  against  each 
other.  They  are  exerting  force.  They  are  try- 
ing to  become  equalized.  They  are  seeking  a 
point  of  rest ;  but  the  heat  in  the  ice  will  not  let 
the  cold  rest,  and  as  we  increase  the  cold,  the  ice 
resists  it,  for  it  takes  some  time  before  these  dif- 
ferent temperatures  can  become  equalized ;  and 
we  still  continue  to  reduce  the  heat  around  the 
ice  until  we  reach  about  two  hundred  degrees 
below  zero.     This  is  the  critical  point.     There  is 


248  FROM  DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 

a  great  battle  between  the  two.  This  ice  is  the- 
heat.  It  has  to  fight  the  cold.  The  cold  is  con- 
stantly reducing  the  heat  in  the  ice,  and  as  long 
as  the  ice  can  keep  out  this  cold,  it  can  maintain 
its  form  and  circulation.  This  is  its  motion,  or 
life.  It  is  not  inert,  or  dead,  as  long  as  there  are- 
two  conditions  of  heat  in  the  tank.  Now,  this 
ice  was  heat,  and  the  cold  crushed  that  heat  into 
vapor.  The  ice  occupied  the  space  belonging  to 
the  cold.  As  long  as  the  ice  could  keep  out,  or 
resist,  this  cold,  it  could  maintain  its  form ;  but 
as  soon  as  the  cold  crushed  out  all  the  heat  of 
the  ice,  it  became  vapor,  and  this  vapor  was^ 
crushed  matter,  or  heat.  The  action  of  the  heat 
and  cold  vaporized  the  water.  They  were  seek- 
ing an  equilibrium,  or  a  point  of  rest,  but  the- 
heat  would  not  let  the  cold  rest  until  it  was  con- 
quered; then  the  cold  took  possession  of  the 
heat,  and  there  was  no  more  action  or  resistance, 
and  the  cold  found  its  equilibrium  and  point  of 
rest,  and  is  inert  and  dead.  This  cold  is  equal 
to  any  heat  produced.  The  heat  is  a  product 
and  inconstant.  The  cold  is  constant  and  nat- 
ural. These  two  actions  produce  motion,  life, 
and  all  the  phenomena  in  Nature.  The  ice  was 
water,  and  the  water  was  condensed  gases.  These 
gases  were  atoms,  and  these  atoms  had  form  and 
heat  within  themselves.  This  heat  was  their  lif& 
and  motion. 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  24& 

These  atoms  were  consolidated  into  water. 
They  were  of  their  own  families,  and  in  har- 
mony, and  floating  in  the  tension  of  space,  but 
these  atoms  filled  no  space.  They  were  only  a 
gas,  filling  no  space.  The  tension  fills  all  space, 
and  there  is  no  more  room  for  any  more  matter. 
The  water  was  the  atoms  condensed  into  the  ten- 
sion, and  the  cold  compressed  them  together^ 
forming  what  we  call  a  solid. 

The  heat  in  the  water,  or  atoms,  resisted  the 
cold,  and  the  cold  resisted  the  heat,  and  the 
atoms  were  pressed  together,  forming  the  block 
of  ice.  If  the  ice  could  not  resist  the  cold  pres- 
sure, there  could  be  no  motion,  or  ice.  As  tho 
cold  increases,  the  ice  resists  it,  and  this  is  what 
gives  form  to  the  ice,  and  all  other  matter.  As 
long  as  the  ice  can  resist  this  cold,  it  can  main- 
tain its  form.  This  resistance  is  the  heat  in  the 
ice,  for  all  the  ice  is  heat  when  the  cold  is  greater 
around  it.  Now,  these  atoms  were  the  matter, 
or  heat,  but  the  cold  was  too  strong  for  the  heat, 
it  crushed  it  into  gas,  or  vapor,  where  it  came 
from,  and  all  these  atoms  are  free  again.  They 
could  not  retain  their  form  against  the  cold  ten- 
sion around  them.  The  ice  w^as  occupying  the 
space  belonging  to  the 'cold,  and  this  space  could 
not  hold  two  matters.  Either  one  must  be  sub- 
dued or  displaced.  Heat  and  cold  cannot  oc- 
cupy the  same  place,  or  space. 


^50  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

An  atom  of  heat  and  an  atom  of  cold  coming 
in  contact,  the  heat  expanding  and  pressing 
against  the  cold,  it  repels  it,  and  the  cold  shrinks 
and  absorbs  the  heat  into  it.  There  is  a  battle 
between  the  two  atoms.  They  are  in  contact — 
they  are  seeking  a  point  of  rest ;  but  they  can- 
not rest  against  each  other,  for  they  are  enemies. 
They  are  not  in  harmony.  The  cold  tries  to  de- 
vour the  heat,  and  the  heat  repels  and  presses 
.against  the  cold.  This  causes  the  cold  to  ex- 
pand and  the  heat  to  shrink.  They  are  trying 
to  become  equalized.  These  actions  are  vibra- 
ting the  tensions  in  and  around  these  atoms. 
This  generates  heat  within  them,  and  this  keeps 
them  in  motion,  for  they  cannot  rest,  as  the 
atoms  are  continually  changing  places  and  con- 
ditions of  heat.  This  is  what  disturbs  the  lines 
of  tension,  preventing  them  from  concentrating, 
or  becoming  rigid,  or  at  rest.  This  is  what  gen- 
erates heat  and  light  in  our  atmosphere. 

We  find  that  all  atoms  have  heat,  and  can  gen- 
erate heat  in  motion.  These  atoms  appear  to  be 
heat,  for  they  resist  the  cold  and  are  put  in  mo- 
tion, and  circulate  through  the  air.  This  circu- 
lation extends,  perhaps,  two  hundred  miles  be- 
yond the  earth.  These  atoms,  in  ascending,  are 
resisted  by  the  cold,  and  pressed  back  to  the 
earth  in  the  form  of  rain.  This  rain  was  gas, 
or  atoms,  condensed  into  rain.     This  rain  is  con- 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  251 

densed  heat,  and  was  pressed  to  the  earth,  the 
point  of  rest.  This  is  the  earth's  circulation  and 
life,  and  the  life  of  everything  on  it. 


252  FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


WHAT  IS  A  EESISTANCE   COIL? 

AEESISTANCE  COIL  is  a  piece  of  iron  and 
some  copper  wire.  We  wind  this  iron  with 
the  wire  as  a  resistance ;  this  causes  the  iron  to 
become  heated  and  expand,  preventing  a  free 
circulation  of  the  tension  through  the  iron.  This 
iron  fills  no  space  in  this  solid  tension.  It  is  a 
gas  condensed  into  this  tension.  Now,  this  iron 
is  a  continuation  and  part  of  the  whole  universe, 
indivisible,  and  it  offers  a  resistance  to  the  free 
circulation  of  this  universe ;  and  the  wire  is  a 
part  and  parcel  of  this  universe,  offering  a  re- 
sistance to  the  free  circulation  of  this  tension, 
causing  heat;  and  the  more  wire  we  wind  around 
this  iron,  the  more  resistance  it  will  offer,  and 
the  more  heat  will  be  caused  in  it.  The  cur- 
rent vibrates  the  tension  in  the  wire,  and  the 
copper  resists  and  is  heated.  This  heat  is  im- 
parted to  the  iron,  and  sets  its  tension  in  vibra- 
tion, and  the  iron  resists,  causing  heat. 

Now,  this  iron  is  in  the  circuit,  offering  a  re- 
sistance to  its  free  action  and  circulation,  and 
heat  is  the  result.  All  this  space  that  this  iron 
and  wire  occupy  is  thrown  out  of  equilibrium, 
and  is  in  intense  vibrations,  and  wants  to  rest ; 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  253 

but  the  current  applied  will  not  let  this  dis- 
turbed place  rest,  and  the  heat  and  vibrations 
are  continued,  and  the  battle  goes  on.  Now, 
everything  in  the  universe,  from  an  atom  to  a 
planet,  or  world,  is  like  a  resistance  coil.  They 
offer  some  resistance  to  the  circulation  of  this 
tension  through  their  system,  causing  heat,  light, 
motion,  and  life. 


254  FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


NATURE  OF  THE  GALVANIC  BATTERY. 

KNOWING  the  conditions  of  space,  we  take  a 
two-cell  battery.  It  is  ready  to  be.  operated. 
The  metal  occupies  a  portion  of  space ;  whatever 
is  in  space  is  in  the  metal.  The  acid  acts  on  the 
molecules  of  the  metal  and  sets  it  in  vibration. 
These  vibrations  are  imparted  to  the  tension  in 
the  metal.  Now,  the  metal  being  in  vibration, 
the  tension  outside  and  around  the  metal  is  con- 
stantly pressing  into  the  metal.  This  puts  the 
vibrating  tension  in  motion,  and  produces  elec- 
tricity, or  galvanism,  or  circulation.  This  is  the 
same  as  the  magnet.  There  must  be  an  inlet 
and  an  outlet  for  the  two  poles.  The  pressure 
passing  in  one  pole  must  find  its  equilibrium 
through  the  other.  It  matters  not  how  long  the 
circuit  may  be,  the  time  of  displacement  is  the 
same.  The  acid  acts  on  the  metal,  heating  it. 
The  heat  vibrates  the  molecules  of  the  metal, 
and  they  vibrate  the  tension  in  the  metal,  and 
the  tension  around  the  metal  presses  into  it,  pro- 
ducing the  circulation,  or  flow,  through  the  poles, 
or  circuit,  of  the  conductors.  The  zinc,  or  lead, 
is  filled  with  the  tension  of  space.  The  acid  acts 
on  its  atoms,  dissolving  them,  producing  heat  in 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  255 

the  metal.  The  natural  condition  of  the  metal 
is  cold,  and  the  heat  has  to  raise,  or  displace,  tho 
cold  to  produce  the  circuit,  or  circulation. 


256  FKOM  DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 


WHAT  IS  THE  TELEGRAPH  WIRE? 

THE  telegraph  wire  is  simply  a  hole  in  space, 
and  the  current  a  displacement  of  the  ten- 
sion in  the  wire.  The  tension  of  space  is  in  and 
around  the  wire.  The  lines  pass  through  the 
wire,  and  the  battery  is  applied,  and  the  lines  in 
the  wire  are  disturbed  from  the  outside  tension, 
for  every  vibration  the  battery  makes,  there  is  a 
displacement  of  the  same  quantity  at  the  other 
pole,  or  end  of  the  wire  in  circuit. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  257 


WHAT  IS  THE  ELECTRIC  LIGHT? 

THE  dynamo  acts  on  the  tension  in  space,  and 
the  wire  is  the  tube  for  displacing  it.  The 
arc  light,  or  carbon,  is  near  the  tension  of  iron, 
and  hard.  If  we  follow  the  process  of  manu- 
facture of  the  carbons,  we  will  find  the  main  ob- 
ject is  to  get  them  hard  and  close-grained.  The 
hardening  and  tempering  puts  them  in  tension, 
and  makes  them  sonorous  and  good  conductors. 
The  carbon  points  are  separated  a  little  to  break 
the  circuit.  Now,  this  space  is  the  resisting 
point.  The  tension  is  the  resisting  force;  the 
carbon  points  try  to  force  a  hole  through  it  and 
are  opposed.  The  carbons  hold  the  tension  in 
them,  and  the  tension  outside  presses  against 
them,  and  this  pressure  vaporizes  the  carbons, 
and  the  tensions  become  luminous.  The  inside 
of  the  carbon  is  in  vibration,  and  these  are  re- 
sisted by  the  outside  pressure  of  the  tension. 
One  pressure  resists  the  other,  and  there  is  a  bat- 
tle between  the  two  opposing  actions.  Nature 
resists,  and  light  is  the  result  of  the  battle. 
When  the  current  is  in  the  carbons,  they  are  in 
vibration,  and  the  tension  of  space  is  pressing^ 
against  them.     This  causes  all  the  resistances  to 


258  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

be   concentrated  at  the  points  of  contact.     This 
is  where  space  is  broken,  or  open. 

The  carbons  occupy  a  portion  of  space.  The 
current  vibrates  the  tension  in  the  carbon ;  this 
breaks  the  lines  of  the  inside  from  the  outside, 
throwing  all  resistance  to  the  points,  this  appa- 
rently making  a  hole  in  space. 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  259 


STEAM  WHISTLE. 

THE  metal  of  the  whistle  is  incased  in  the 
tension.  It  is  part  and  parcel  of  it,  and 
when  it  vibrates,  it  imparts  them  to  the  tension 
around  it.  The  air  resisting,  is  vibrated,  and 
acts  on  the  tension,  carrying  the  sound  wave,  or 
vibration.  The  metal  is  solidly  incased  in  this 
tension,  and  when  vibrated  by  the  escaping 
steam,  these  vibrations  are  imparted  to  the  ten- 
sion around  it;  the  air  resisting  and  carrying 
the  sound  into  space. 


260  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 


BELL  SOUND. 

T^HE  bell  occupies  a  portion  of  space,  and  the 
1  tension  is  in  that  space,  in  equilibrium  and 
at  rest ;  and  when  struck  with  the  hammer  all 
this  space  that  the  bell  occupies  is  thrown  out  of 
equilibrium.  The  tension  in  the  bell  is  all  in 
vibration,  and  the  tension  around  the  bell  presses 
all  around  it,  seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  a  point 
of  rest ;  but  the  vibrating  bell  will  not  let  the 
tension,  or  air,  rest.  These  vibrations  are  car- 
ried into  space  by  the  tension  and  air.  The 
tension  is  solid  in  the  bell  and  around  it,  and 
the  stroke  sounds  the  tension  in  and  outside  the 
bell ;  they  are  united. 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  261 


VITAL  FORCE  AND  ITS  NATURE. 

IN  reviewing  all  the  phenomena  of  vital  force, 
and  its  effects  and  results,  we  find  that  the  great 
pressure  around  all  bodies  is  the  cold  tension  of 
space.  It  permeates  everything.  It  is  our  at- 
traction, for  it  presses  all  matter  to  the  earth,  the 
point  of  rest.  It  pulls  the  heat  out  of  the  metal, 
compressing  it  into  a  solid.  It  is  the  life  of  the 
magnet,  causing  its  circulation  and  magnetic  at- 
traction, and  electricity;  producing  heat,  and 
light,  and  power,  encircling  the  earth,  communi- 
cating with  all  its  people,  imparting  our  thoughts 
to  them.  It  is  the  secret  of  the  Leyden  Jar, 
making  its  light.  It  is  the  light  of  the  glow- 
worm, and  its  life,  and  of  the  fire-fl}'',  its  life  and 
light. 

The  galvanic  battery,  and  its  phenomena,  are 
through  its  actions.  The  telephone  is  the  me- 
dium through  which  it  carries  our  voice  and 
sounds.  It  is  the  producer  of  lightning,  causing 
thunder,  wind,  rain,  and  storms.  It  is  the  cause 
of  all  sound,  conducting  the  same.  It  is  the 
cause  of  the  phenomenon  of  candle  and  oil  light, 
and  all  other  lights  are  produced  through  it. 
We   find   it  hidden   in   the  coal,  holding  it  to- 


262  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

gether,  ready  to  be  acted  on  and  liberated,  pro- 
ducing heat.  Cohesion  is  no  more  a  secret.  It 
exposes  its  action,  showing  that  it  is  pressure 
that  holds  matter  together.  This  is  the  pres- 
sure that  holds  the  earth  in  form  and  place^ 
connecting  it  with  the  sun,  imparting  life  to  it, 
and  producing  its  heat  and  light.  It  is  in  the 
sea,  and  all  waters,  imparting  life  and  motion  to 
the  fish,  and  all  other  animalculse  therein. 

We  find  it  is  the  life  of  everything  on  earth, 
even  man ;  he,  being  a  product  of  the  earth, 
must  obey  the  law  that  governs  it.  He  is  mat- 
ter, and  has  mind,  or  brain.  This  brain  acts  on 
this  force — that  is,  his  mind — matter  acting  on 
mind,  or  mind  acting  through  matter.  This  is 
his  brain  power,  or  force.  We  find  it  in  the  re- 
sistance coil,  holding  it  rigid  and  at  rest,  resist- 
ing the  circuit,  generating  heat.  It  is  the  life  of 
the  dynamo  and  its  power — the  force  that  pro- 
jjels  the  motor,  and  its  life.  All  the  phenomena 
of  the  sunbeam  is  through  this  medium,  pro- 
ducing the  molecular  motion  of  heat  and  cold,, 
shrinking  and  expanding.  It  is  in  the  seed,  in 
the  plant,  in  the  tree,  being  its  circulation  and 
life.  We  find  the  birds  have  it  in  their  bodies, 
acting  on  it,  giving  them  great  powder  of  en- 
durance, it  being  their  life  force.  It  is  in  the 
rock,  holding  it  together  in  all  its  forms.  It  is 
the  medium  that   holds   all  metal   in  its  rigid 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  26S 

form,  pressing  its  atoms  together.  We  find  it 
always  ready  to  be  acted  on.  It  is  always  har- 
nessed, ready  for  the  driver,  a  willing  and  obedi- 
ent servant;  no  limit  to  its  resources,  and  not 
displaceable  or  compressible — indestructible  and 
everlasting,  as  gentle  as  a  lamb,  and  as  fierce  a& 
a  lion.  All  ranges  of  vibrations  act  on  it,  pro- 
ducing all  the  phenomena  that  w^e  have  seen  and 
enumerated.  We  find  it  produces  all  the  phe- 
nomena of  all  the  various  colors  in  Nature 
throughout  animal  and  vegetable  life,  and  the 
rainbow,  with  all  its  variety  of  hues,  is  from 
vibrations  on  it.  All  the  beautiful  flowers,  and 
their  various  colors,  are  produced  through  it. 
All  the  great  variety  of  our  tropical  birds,  and 
their  various  colors,  are  blended  by  this  tension. 
The  different  ranges  of  vibrations  produce  differ- 
ent varieties  of  colors.  All  the  various  sounds 
and  music,  and  musical  instruments,  and  their 
variations,  are  through  its  actions. 

All  the  diff'erent  forms  and  expressions  of  the 
human  face,  and  all  bodies,  are  its  work.  All 
thought,  mind,  and  remembrance  are  impres- 
sions on  it,  through  the  nerves  of  the  brain.  All 
feeling,  and  sensation,  and  seeing,  tasting,  smell- 
ing, eating,  drinking,  hunger,  thirst,  enjoyment, 
disappointment,  ambition,  anticipation,  love,  hate^ 
life,  and  death — these  are  all  natural  results  of 
the   tension   of  space  through    all   matter   and 


264  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

bodies — for  all  matter  and  bodies  are  inert^  and 
dead,  when  cold.  The  heat  gives  them  life  by 
raising  the  cold  that  holds  them  rigid,  and  al- 
lows them  to  move,  or  gives  them  motion. 

What  is  this  heat  that  moves  the  cold,  and 
gives  it  life  ?  Anything  that  can  vibrate  on  this 
cold  tension  will  produce  heat,  for  it  disturbs  its 
lines,  and  it  resists,  and  heat  is  the  result.  There 
are  only  two  actions  in  all  the  phenomena  of 
force — heat  and  cold.  One  is  equal  to  the  other, 
and  anything  that  disturbs  the  cold  generates 
heat,  for  it  takes  heat  to  displace  the  cold.  All 
heat  is  vibratory,  expanding  the  molecules,  or 
atoms,  and  they  vibrate  the  tension  by  expand- 
ing it,  filling  more  space.  When  the  vibrations 
are  rapid  enough,  they  generate  heat  and  light. 
These  vibrations  must  be  very  fine  to  be  able  to 
reach  the  lines  of  tension.  The  air  is  the  me- 
dium to  act  on  this  tension  and  vibrate  it.  The 
air  molecules  are  floating  in  the  tension,  and 
when  they  are  disturbed,  they  vibrate  on  it,  and 
are  expanded,  and  put  in  motion,  which  is  circu- 
lation. This  circulation  disturbs  the  lines  of 
tension,  constantly  crossing  its  lines,  producing 
heat,  light,  and  life. 

In  observing  the  different  phenomena  we  have 
not  been  able  to  find  a  force,  or  action,  in  Nature 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  205 

that  we  could  call  electricity.  What  we  call 
electricity  is  only  a  disturbance  of  the  cold  ten- 
sion of  space,  and  this  is  done  either  by  vibra- 
tions or  heat.  One  is  equal  to  the  other.  These 
actions  are  the  only  things  that  are  fine  enough 
to  reach  it.  They  disturb  its  equilibrium,  and 
prevent  it  from  resting,  and  it  rests  in  the  mag- 
net, for  the  metal  of  the  magnet  offers  a  resist- 
ance to  this  tension,  and  heat  is  generated  in  it, 
and  a  circulation  produced.  This  circulation  is 
the  interchange  of  heat  and  cold  through  the 
tension.  We  cannot  call  this  magnetism — for  it 
is  not  the  metal  in  the  magnet  that  generates 
this  force,  or  circulation,  or  pull,  as  the  magnet 
does  not  pull,  or  attract,  anything.  It  is  simply 
a  point  of  rest  for  particles  of  iron.  These  par- 
ticles of  iron  are  filled  with  the  tension,  and  offer 
a  resistance  to  the  circulation  of  this  tension,  and 
iire  pressed  into,  or  against,  the  magnet.  Now, 
these  particles  of  iron  are  resting  against  the  sur- 
face of  the  magnet.  They  cannot  move  any  fur- 
ther, for  the  magnet  resists  them,  but  the  circu- 
lation still  continues;  and  as  we  place  the  arma- 
ture across  the  poles,  it  offers  a  resistance  to  the 
circulation  of  the  tension,  and  is  pressed  into  the 
poles,  filling  them  ;  but  the  circulation  still  con- 
tinues through  the  armature.  The  pressure  is 
on  the  outside  of  the  magnet  at  this  time.  The 
armature  and  magnet   have  found  their  equilib- 


266  FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT. 

rium  and  point  of  rest.  They  are  united  by  the 
tension  of  space. 

Now,  when  we  act  on  the  magnet,  we  are  act- 
ing on  the  tension  of  space  that  the  magnet 
occupies,  and  when  we  disturb  the  circulation 
between  the  poles,  we  are  disturbing  the  equilib- 
rium of  the  magnet;  and  if  the  magnet  can  sus- 
tain one  hundred  pounds,  we  are  then  acting  on 
a  pressure,  or  force,  of  one  hundred  pounds,  and 
the  more  we  disturb  this  space,  the  more  force 
^e  produce.  This  is  the  only  force  that  we  have 
been  able  to  discover  in  all  the  actions  and  phe- 
nomena of  Nature.  It  is  the  universal  and  only 
force  that  we  have  been  able  to  discover  in  all 
the  actions  and  phenomena  of  Nature.  It  is  the- 
universal  and  only  force. 

We  cannot  find  any  action  in  Nature  that  we 
could  call  cohesion.  It  is  the  pressure  of  the 
cold  tension  of  space  that  holds  all  matter  in  its 
solid  form,  and  the  heat  liberates  this  matter. 
Now,  this  heat  is  not  a  force — for  there  could  be 
no  heat  if  there  were  no  resistance.  The  cold 
tension  is  the  resistance  for  all  heat  produced. 

We  cannot  find  anything  in  Nature  that  we 
could  name  attraction.  No  bodies  can  attract 
each  other.  They  are  pressed  together  by  the 
cold  tension  of  space. 

Gravity  is  a  name  that  does  not  harmonize 
with  Nature's  law.     The  cold   tension  of  space 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO    LIGHT.  267 

presses  everything  that  is  of  the  earth  to  the 
earth.  Nothing  can  get  away  from  the  earth 
but  heat,  and  when  this  heat  has  reached  a  cer- 
tain distance,  the  cold  condenses  it,  and  presses 
it  back  to  the  eartli,  to  the  pomt  of  rest. 

Now,  the  earth  resists  all  matter  when  this 
matter  is  pressed  to  it.  The  earth  is  like  the 
magnet.  We  find  that  the  iron  resists  the  circu- 
lation and  is  pressed  into  the  poles,  they  being 
the  point  of  rest.  Now,  all  matter  resists  the 
circulation  between  the  sun  and  earth,  and  this 
matter  is  pressed  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest. 

This  matter  can  go  no  further.  The  earth  re- 
sists it,  but  the  circulation  continues  through  the 
earth  and  back  to  the  sun.  The  matter  simply 
offers  a  resistance  to  this  circulation,  the  same  as 
the  magnet.  This  tension  can  circulate  through 
all  matter.  But  all  matter  offers  some  resistance 
to  its  circulation,  and  this  is  what  presses  all 
matter  together,  for  the  tension  presses  every- 
thing into  as  small  a  space  as  possible,  holding  it 
in  this  form.  Now,  the  earth  is  the  resting-place 
for  all  matter  within  the  earth's  circulation. 
This  is  perhaps  two  hundred  miles,  radiating 
out  in  all  directions,  and  any  matter  that  may 
come  within  these  lines  will  be  pressed  to  the 
earth. 

How  does  the  matter  resist  the  circulation  ? 
Let  us  stretch  a  fish  net,  or  seine,  in  a  river,  or 


268  FROM  Darkness  to  light. 

ba}^,  where  the  tide  is  running  at  full  speed. 
Now,  this  net  will  offer  a  resistance  to  the  motion 
of  the  water.  It  will  resist  the  water,  and  the 
finer  the  meshes  in  the  net,  the  more  they  resist 
the  motion  of  the  water.  Now,  the  tide  wants  to 
carr}^  the  net  with  it,  and  it  takes  a  great  force  to 
prevent  the  tide  from  carrying  it.  They  resist 
each  other ;  but  if  the  net  is  free,  it  will  move 
along  with  the  water;  and  if  the  meshes  are 
filled,  or  closed  almost  solid,  then  it  receives  the 
full  weight,  or  pressure,  of  the  moving  tide,  and 
it  would  be  almost  impossible  to  prevent  it  from 
moving  with  the  water.  Any  matter  that  we 
may  suspend  in  the  water  will  offer  a  resistance 
to  its  motion.  This  resistance  will  be  in  propor- 
tion to  its  density.  The  moving  water  is  seek- 
ing a  point  of  rest,  so  it  rests  against  anything 
that  may  oppose  it,  but  the  tide  moves  on. 

In  concluding,  or  summing  up  all  the  phe- 
nomena that  we  have  enumerated,  we  find  these 
phenomena  to  be  very  simple  and  very  few,  only 
two  actions  and  one  force.  The  cold  tension  of 
space  is  the  inertia,  or  dead  weight,  filling  all 
space,  and  all  matter  is  a  condensation  in  this 
tension,  by  this  tension — for  this  tension  vapor- 
izes all  matter.  We  cannot  find  any  matter,  or 
substance,  that  can  dissolve,  or  vaporize,  the 
tension.     It  is  indestructible,  immovable,  non- 


FROM    DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT.  260 

compressible,  and  non-displaceable,  and  non-di- 
visible. Now,  this  tension  appears  to  be  the 
matter,  if  there  is  any  matter.  It  is  the  solid — 
for  nothing  can  divide  or  separate  it.  It  is  the 
solid  of  the  universe ;  and  what  we  call  a  solid, 
or  matter,  is  only  a  gas  condensed  into  this  solid 
tension.  Now,  this  solid  tension  fills  all  space, 
and  there  is  no  room  for  any  more ;  and  when 
we  produce  heat,  we  expand,  or  press  against 
this  solid,  cold  tension.  This  heat  is  trying  to 
displace,  or  force  a  hole,  in  this  space,  and  all 
the  universe  is  resisting  this  heat,  or  expansion. 
The  hsat  and  cold  press  against  each  other, 
and  they  exert  the  force,  and  whichever  is  the 
strongest  must  be  the  victor.  This  struggle 
keeps  up  the  force.  If  there  were  no  cold,  the 
heat  would  have  nothing  to  resist  it,  and  there 
could  be  no  action,  or  force,  exerted  ;  and  if  tliere 
were  no  heat,  there  could  be  no  resistance,  or 
motion,  action,  light,  or  life.  The  heat  and  cold 
pressing  together  crush  the  matter  into  vapor. 
They  crush  everything  that  resists  them  into  an 
invisible  gas.  This  gas  is  the  crushed  matter. 
It  is  pulled  up  to  the  cold  space  and  condensed, 
and  pressed  back  to  the  earth  again,  to  make 
more  matter.  This  is  a  continuous  work  of  Na- 
ture of  keeping  up  its  circulation  of  heat  and 
cold,  shrinking  and  expanding.  This  gas  is 
floatino:   in  the  air  in  atoms.     These  atoms  are 


270  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

separated  from  each  other  by  the  air ;  but  if 
these  atoms  could  come  together  iu  the  outer 
part  of  the  atmosphere,  and  a  sufficient  number 
of  them  unite  to  form  a  mass,  or  cloud,  this 
would  offer  a  resistance  to  the  lines  of  tension, 
and  heat  would  be  generated  in  this  mass.  The 
interior  of  this  mass  would  be  put  in  vibration, 
and  the  cold  tension  around  them  would  press 
them  into  a  solid.  This  solid  would  be  pressed 
to  the  earth,  and  as  it  would  pass  through  the 
air,  it  would  be  heated  to  incandescence — for  the 
air  would  offer  a  resistance  to  its  descent.  This 
would  be  a  very  solid  matter — for  the  pressure 
of  air  and  tension  would  be  pressing  against  its 
mass ;  it  would  be  encroaching  on  them.  It 
would  be  occupying  their  space.  This  solid 
would  contain  all  the  different  gases  of  all  the 
metallic  substances  known  to  us.  These  gases 
w^ould  now  be  a  solid,  or  as  near  as  we  can  get  to 
a  solid,  for  Nature  has  made  this  solid  in  her 
own  way.  This  gas  could  be  solidified  in  this 
way  in  perhaps  one  minute. 

The  volcanoes  are  continually  throwing  off 
gas.  This  is  matter  of  all  kinds,  and  metals  of 
various  kinds,  in  a  vapor  form.  This  vapor  is 
sometimes  forced  beyond  the  air  space.  This 
vapor  is  heat,  and  is  pulled  up  to  the  cold  space 
and  condensed.     If  there  is  a  sufficiency  of  this 


liim.^ 


FROM   DARKNESS   TO    Ll 

heat  in  a  body  to  be  suddenly  chilled,  this 
■chilling  would  condense,  or  press  this  heat  to- 
gether— for  this  heat  is  matter,  and  this  matter 
would  be  solidified,  and  then  pressed  back  to  the 
^arth,  the  point  of  rest ;  and  as  it  would  descend, 
the  air  and  tension  would  resist  its  motion,  and 
it  would  become  incandescent,  and  as  hard  as 
flint.  Now,  this  would  be  the  volcanic  vapor 
•condensed  into  a  volcanic  solid.  This  is  a  con- 
tinuous work  of  Nature,  a  simple  circulation  of 
heat  and  cold.  The  heat  vaporized  the  matter 
in  the  volcano.  This  heat  was  pulled  up  to  the 
•cold  space  and  condensed,  and  pressed  back  to 
the  earth,  the  point  of  rest. 

The  heat  did  as  much  work  as  the  cold  ;  one 
is  equal  to  the  other.  Great  masses  of  heat  are 
ascending  from  our  smelting  works  and  furnaces. 
This  heat  is  crushed  matter,  and  may  ascend  be- 
yond the  clouds  in  a  mass,  like  smoke.  We  can 
see  the  smoke  ascending,  but  we  cannot  see  the 
heat,  or  heated  gas.  It  is  invisible.  If  the  air  is 
•calm  and  no  movement  to  it,  this  heat  can  ascend 
beyond  the  clouds,  and  beyond  the  air,  as  long 
as  the  furnace  supplies  this  heat  to  maintain  the 
force.  Now,  this  heat  has  formed  an  opening 
til  rough  this  space  like  a  c\^linder,  and  the  cold 
space  pulls  this  heat  up  into  the  vacuum — for 
this  cold  space  is  a  vacuum  of  heat.  This  heat 
ds  in   the   form   of  a  cloud,  or  balloon-shaped. 


272  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

Now^  there  is  no  air  around  this  heat  to  disturb 
its  equilibrium ;  it  is  floating  up  above  the  air 
in  a  mass,  and  the  heat  from  the  furnace  is  ex- 
panding this  mass,  and  the  cold  tension  of  space 
is  pressing  all  around  this  mass.  There  is  a 
pressure  inside  of  heat,  and  a  pressure  outside  of 
cold.  They  are  resisting  each  other.  The  cold 
is  constant,  and  presses  all  around  the  heat, 
gradually  compressing  it  into  a  smaller  space^ 
and  the  heat  concentrates  all  its  force  to  resist 
the  cold.  As  this  mass  becomes  smaller,  it  gets 
heavier,  for  the  cold  is  pressing  the  heat  out  of 
it.  The  supply  of  heat  is  suddenly  cut  off  by  a 
movement  of  air,  or  the  stopping  of  the  furnace. 
This  gives  the  cold  possession  of  the  heat.  The 
cold  then  soon  condenses,  or  compresses,  this 
heat  into  its  own  embrace,  and  makes  it  solid^ 
and  presses  it  to  the  earth,  the  point  of  rest. 
This  solid  is  the  gas  that  arose  from  the  furnace. 
It  is  the  crushed  matter,  or  heat  condensed  by 
the  cold  tension  of  space.  What  would  this 
matter  contain?  All  the  elements  of  the  fur- 
nace and  air.  These  would  be  concentrated  in 
this  solid  mass,  and  this  mass  would  be  harder 
than  anything  that  we  could  produce — for  it  was 
forced  from  a  very  high  temperature  to  a  very 
low  one.  This  sudden  chilling,  and  cold  pres- 
sure, solidifies  the  gases  and  makes  them  hard. 
If  a  nortion  of  these  gases  were  from  a  glass  fur- 


FROM    DARKNESS    TO    LIGHT.  273 

nace,  and  the  heat  in  the  furnace  was  great 
enough  to  vaporize  the  glass,  and  this  vapor 
could  ascend  in  a  mass,  or  cloud,  and  get  beyond 
the  air  space,  and  be  suddenly  chilled  by  the 
cold,  say  this  cold  would  be  two  thousand  de- 
grees below  zero,  and  the  heat  in  the  vapor  four 
thousand  degrees  above  zero,  then  the  vapor 
could  hold  its  form  against  the  cold.  The  cold 
would  press  all  around  the  heat,  gradually  press- 
ing it  into  a  smaller  space.  There  could  be  no 
air  around  this  heat,  nothing  but  the  pure  gases 
and  the  cold  tension  of  space.  They  would  be 
resisting  each  other,  and  the  gases  would  become 
a  solid ;  the  center  of  this  gas  would  be  the  hot- 
test part,  for  the  heat  would  be  concentrated.  It 
would  become  a  liquid,  for  the  gases  would  be 
pressed  into  a  liquid,  and  as  this  mass  would  be 
cooled  under  the  cold  pressure,  it  would  imprison 
the  tension  of  space  within  its  mass. 

Now,  this  mass  is  a  solid,  and  has  become 
weighty.  The  heat  has  been  extracted  from  it, 
and  the  cold  took  its  place,  giving  it  weight. 
This  weight  is  pressed  back  to  the  earth ;  and 
as  this  solid  would  pass  into  the  air,  it  would 
meet  a  resistance,  and  would  become  heated. 
The  heat  would  expand  it,  and  it  would  explode 
from  the  resistance  of  the  air.  And  if  we  could 
find  any  of  these  pieces,  we  would  find  a  dia- 
mond— for  the  chilled  vapor,  or  glass,  would  be 


274  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

as  hard  as  a  diamond,  and  the  tension  would  be 
imprisoned  within  the  glass.  It  would  be  under 
strain  from  the  sudden  chilling,  and  expanding, 
by  the  heat,  generated  by  the  resistance  of  the 
air.  The  same  actions  are  taking  place  in  the 
furnaces  and  volcanoes,  and  when  there  is  a 
sufficient  quantity  of  this  heat  in  a  mass,  it  gets 
beyond  the  air  space,  and  is  there  cooled  in  a 
temperature  of  from  one  thousand  to  five  thou- 
sand degrees  below  zero.  This  is  a  great  pres- 
sure, and  anything  that  can  withstand  it  will  be 
as  hard  as  diamonds,  or  any  matter  that  can  be 
made.  Now,  these  gases  have  been  condensed 
under  a  cold  pressure  of  about  four  thousand  de- 
grees. This  pressure  holds  them  in  their  present 
form,  at  rest ;  and  if  we  raise  or  lift  this  pres- 
sure off  them  by  applying  heat,  they  will  go  off 
in  a  gas  again.  The  heat  raises  the  weight  from 
them,  and  allows  them  to  become  fluid,  or  gas. 


fbom:  darkness  to  light.:  273 


ACTION  OF  THE  DYNAMO. 

(See  page  155.) 

NOW,  we  will  put  the  dynamo  in  motion, 
slowly,  to  follow  the  action  of  changes. 
The  copper  wire  around  the  armature  is  filled 
with  the  tension.  This  tension  is  disturbed  from 
the  outer  tension,  and  produces  vibrations  in  the 
tension  of  the  wire.  Once  the  tension  in  the 
wire  vibrates,  the  tension  outside  presses  into  the 
wire,  the  same  as  a  vacuum  tube,  and  the  action, 
begins.  These  vibrations  pass  through  the  mag- 
netic coil,  and  vibrate  the  tension  in  the  magnet 
When  the  tension  in  the  magnet  is  in  vibration, 
the  tension  outside,  being  constant,  presses  into 
the  magnet  poles,  and  we  have  a  magnetic  pull. 
The  greater  the  quantity  of  vibrations,  or  dis- 
turbance, the  greater  the  magnetic  pull.  The 
armature  rotating  between  the  poles,  disturbs  the 
tension,  or  magnetic  pull.  The  dynamo  is  now 
at  full  speed,  and  the  action  regular.  The  ten- 
sion in  the  magnet  is  in  a  great  vibratory  con- 
dition. The  atoms  are  in  stress,  and  the  tension 
is  in  a  circuit  through  the  poles  of  the  magnet ; 
that  is,  the  tension  has  found  its  equilibrium 
through  the  magnet.    The  magnet,  at  this  period, 


276  FROM  DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT. 

is  like  an  open  tube,  the  metal  offering  little  re- 
sistance to  the  action  of  the  tension.  The  pres- 
sure on  the  outside  pressing  against  the  surface 
of  the  magnet,  presses  in  at  one  pole  and  out 
through  the  other,  forming  a  circuit.  The  arma- 
ture continually  making  and  breaking  this  cir- 
cuit, or  tension,  produces  electricity.  The  mag- 
net is  a  receptacle  for  the  tension  at  rest,  but 
when  vibrated,  it  is  thrown  out  of  equilibrium. 
This  causes  the  pressure  of  the  tension  to  press 
against  the  surface  of  the  magnet.  The  lines  in- 
side being  in  motion,  the  pressure  outside  then 
presses  in,  and  produces  the  flow,  or  circuit,  or 
point  of  rest. 


FROM  DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT.  277 


WHAT  IS  DISEASE  AND  DECAY  IN  THE 
VEGETABLE  FAMILY  ? 

WE  will  illustrate  a  plant  in  a  healthy  and 
vigorous  condition  of  growth.  This  plant 
must  have  all  the  natural  elements  and  condi- 
tions in  soil,  air,  sunshine  and  drainage.  All 
these  are  necessary  to  keep  this  plant  sweet.  The 
soil  must  have  good  drainage  to  keep  it  sweet 
and  pure,  and  a  certain  amount  of  heat  to  keep 
up  a  free  circulation  of  sap.  This  is  the  vital 
part  of  a  plant. 

As  long  as  these  conditions  can  be  maintained, 
the  plant  can  continue  to  grow  and  mature  in  a 
healthy  condition,  but  as  soon  as  this  is  denied 
this  plant,  disease  sets  in  ;  first  in  the  soil.  This 
is  the  food  of  the  plant,  supplying  its  circula- 
tion, which  is  its  life.  The  soil  not  having  the 
conditions  around  it  to  keep  up  an  active  circu- 
lation in  it,  becomes  sour,  or  stagnant.  This  is 
imparted  to  the  roots,  and  up  into  the  sap,  or 
circulation.  The  roots  are  incased  in  this  soil, 
and  the  plant  must  absorb  its  ingredients,  or 
contents,  through  its  circulation.  This  sour- 
ness is  imparted  to  the  sap;  then  comes  a  strug- 
gle between  the  two  conditions  of  sweetness  and 


278  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

sourness,  life  and  death.  One  resists  the  other, 
and  the  fight  goes  on.  Now,  this  plant  cannot 
assist  itself;  it  is  compelled  to  stay  in  this  un- 
favorable condition,  and  suffer  decay  by  fer- 
mentation— for  the  sourness  has  conquered,  and 
taken  possession  of  this  plant,  and  it  begins  to 
ferment. 

This  fermentation  is  a  liberation  of  the  gases, 
or  matter,  composing  the  plant.  This  action 
causes  heat,  and  increases  the  liberation  of  the 
gases,  allowing  them  to  go  free  and  condense 
into  some  other  matter.  These  gases  do  not  rot, 
or  decay,  going  off"  into  nothing.  They  are 
simply  liberated  by  the  action  of  the  fermenta- 
tion. 

This  is  what  is  termed  chemical  action.  It  is 
the  change  from  sweetness  to  sourness,  or  from 
alkali  to  acid.  These  changes  are  acting  on  the 
tension,  keeping  it  in  vibration,  causing  heat. 
The  acid  and  alkali  are  battling  for  place,  but 
cannot  find  it — for  this  keeps  the  tension  in  agi- 
tation, keeping  up  the  commotion,  and  this  al- 
lows the  gases  to  dissolve  or  go  free.  The  alkali 
is  like  the  cold  tension  of  space — it  is  sweet  and 
pure,  quiet  and  at  rest.  The  acid  disturbs  this 
rest  by  trying  to  mix  with  it,  and  the  alkali  re- 
sists,' and  does  not  want  to  associate  with  the 
acid,  but  the  acid  insists,  and  forces  itself  into 
the  alkali,  and  there  is  a  battle  between  them^. 


FROM   DARKNESS  TO   LIGHT.  279 

and  this  liberates  the  matter  that  opposes  these 
combatants.  AH  this  action  is  acting  on,  and 
disturbing  the  tension,  and  the  tension  dis- 
turbs the  matter  and  chemicals.  They  are  all 
seeking  an  equilibrium,  or  a  point  of  rest,  but 
this  they  cannot  find  until  they  become  equal- 
ized; and  as  we  apply  more  acid,  it  increases  the 
heat  and  disturbance,  and  the  gases  seek  their 
own  families,  and  want  to  consolidate  to  resist 
this  acid,  but  the  acid  forces  itself  between  these 
gases,  separating  them. 

Now,  the  acid  has  conquered,  and  taken  pos- 
session of  the  plant,  and  liberated  all  its  gases, 
or  matter,  but  there  is  nothing  lost  in  this  decay, 
or  change,  from  a  solid  to  gas,  the  same  amount 
of  matter  remains  eternally.  This  is  the  earth's 
circulation,  or  interchange  of  matter,  keeping  up 
its  life,  and  as  we  apply  alkali  to  this  chemical 
compound  of  sweetness  and  sourness,  it  will  be- 
come sweet  again — for  the  alkali  will  conquer  the 
acid,  and  subdue  it,  and  allow  the  gases  to  asso- 
ciate with  their  own  families  through  the  ten- 
sion. These  gases  find  their  relatives,  and  con- 
solidate, combining  and  uniting  to  protect  them- 
selves, for  the  alkali  assists  them. 

Now,  to  cause  any  action  or  change,  there 
must  be  two  opposing  actions,  heat  and  cold, 
sweetness  and  sourness,  or  alcali  and  acid.  These 
resist  each  other,  causing  heat.     The  heat  vibratea 


280  FROM   DARKNESS   TO   LIGHT. 

the  tension,  liberating  the  gases,  or  matter,  op- 
posing these  actions.  All  these  changes  are 
simply  an  action  disturbing  the  equilibrium  of 
the  tension,  causing  heat  in  this  disturbed  space. 
This  is  where  the  force  is  exerted,  and  the  atoms, 
or  gases,  are  acted  on. 

This  will  apply  to  all  chemical  actions  and 
compounds,  and  to  all  vegetable  and  animal  life 
or  matter. 


^^'^  or  THl^'^ 

HFIVBRSITT] 


UNR^EESITY  OF  CALIFOENIA  LIBRAEY, 
BERKELEY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 

STAMPED  BELOW 

Books  not  returned  on  time  are  subject  to  a  fine  of 
50c  per  volume  after  the  third  day  overdue,  increasing 
to  $1.00  per  volume  after  the  sixth  day.  Books  not  in 
demand  may  be  renewed  if  application  is  made  before 
expiration  of  loan  period. 


JAN  29  )92J 
MAY  IS  1924 


m^^ 


1925 


Xtw 


!X>- 


20ot-11,'20 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


